GNU C Language Manual
Next: The First Example [Contents][Index]
GNU C Manual
This manual explains the C language for use with the GNU Compiler Collection (GCC) on the GNU/Linux system and other systems. We refer to this dialect as GNU C. If you already know C, you can use this as a reference manual.
If you understand basic concepts of programming but know nothing about C, you can read this manual sequentially from the beginning to learn the C language.
If you are a beginner in programming, we recommend you first learn a language with automatic garbage collection and no explicit pointers, rather than starting with C. Good choices include Lisp, Scheme, Python and Java. C’s explicit pointers mean that programmers must be careful to avoid certain kinds of errors.
C is a venerable language; it was first used in 1973. The GNU C Compiler, which was subsequently extended into the GNU Compiler Collection, was first released in 1987. Other important languages were designed based on C: once you know C, it gives you a useful base for learning C++, C#, Java, Scala, D, Go, and more.
The special advantage of C is that it is fairly simple while allowing close access to the computer’s hardware, which previously required writing in assembler language to describe the individual machine instructions. Some have called C a “high-level assembler language” because of its explicit pointers and lack of automatic management of storage. As one wag put it, “C combines the power of assembler language with the convenience of assembler language.” However, C is far more portable, and much easier to read and write, than assembler language.
This manual describes the GNU C language supported by the GNU Compiler Collection, as of roughly 2017. Please inform us of any changes needed to match the current version of GNU C.
When a construct may be absent or work differently in other C compilers, we say so. When it is not part of ISO standard C, we say it is a “GNU C extension,” because it is useful to know that. However, standards and other dialects are secondary topics for this manual. For simplicity’s sake, we keep those notes short, unless it is vital to say more.
Likewise, we hardly mention C++ or other languages that the GNU Compiler Collection supports. We hope this manual will serve as a base for writing manuals for those languages, but languages so different can’t share one common manual.
Some aspects of the meaning of C programs depend on the target platform: which computer, and which operating system, the compiled code will run on. Where this is the case, we say so.
The C language provides no built-in facilities for performing such common operations as input/output, memory management, string manipulation, and the like. Instead, these facilities are provided by functions defined in the standard library, which is automatically available in every C program. See The GNU C Library in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.
GNU/Linux systems use the GNU C Library to do this job. It is itself a C program, so once you know C you can read its source code and see how its library functions do their jobs. Some fraction of the functions are implemented as system calls, which means they contain a special instruction that asks the system kernel (Linux) to do a specific task. To understand how those are implemented, you’d need to read Linux source code instead. Whether a library function is a system call is an internal implementation detail that makes no difference for how to call the function.
This manual incorporates the former GNU C Preprocessor Manual, which was among the earliest GNU manuals. It also uses some text from the earlier GNU C Manual that was written by Trevis Rothwell and James Youngman.
GNU C has many obscure features, each one either for historical compatibility or meant for very special situations. We have left them to a companion manual, the GNU C Obscurities Manual, which will be published digitally later.
Please report errors and suggestions to c-manual@gnu.org.
Table of Contents
- 1 The First Example
- 2 A Complete Program
- 3 Storage and Data
- 4 Beyond Integers
- 5 Lexical Syntax
- 6 Arithmetic
- 7 Assignment Expressions
- 8 Execution Control Expressions
- 9 Binary Operator Grammar
- 10 Order of Execution
- 11 Primitive Data Types
- 12 Constants
- 13 Type Size
- 14 Pointers
- 14.1 Address of Data
- 14.2 Pointer Types
- 14.3 Pointer-Variable Declarations
- 14.4 Pointer-Type Designators
- 14.5 Dereferencing Pointers
- 14.6 Null Pointers
- 14.7 Dereferencing Null or Invalid Pointers
- 14.8 Void Pointers
- 14.9 Pointer Comparison
- 14.10 Pointer Arithmetic
- 14.11 Pointers and Arrays
- 14.12 Pointer Arithmetic at Low-Level
- 14.13 Pointer Increment and Decrement
- 14.14 Drawbacks of Pointer Arithmetic
- 14.15 Pointer-Integer Conversion
- 14.16 Printing Pointers
- 15 Structures
- 15.1 Referencing Structure Fields
- 15.2 Arrays as Fields
- 15.3 Dynamic Memory Allocation
- 15.4 Field Offset
- 15.5 Structure Layout
- 15.6 Packed Structures
- 15.7 Bit Fields
- 15.8 Bit Field Packing
- 15.9
const
Fields - 15.10 Arrays of Length Zero
- 15.11 Flexible Array Fields
- 15.12 Overlaying Different Structures
- 15.13 Structure Assignment
- 15.14 Unions
- 15.15 Packing With Unions
- 15.16 Cast to a Union Type
- 15.17 Structure Constructors
- 15.18 Unnamed Types as Fields
- 15.19 Incomplete Types
- 15.20 Intertwined Incomplete Types
- 15.21 Type Tags
- 16 Arrays
- 17 Enumeration Types
- 18 Defining Typedef Names
- 19 Statements
- 19.1 Expression Statement
- 19.2
if
Statement - 19.3
if-else
Statement - 19.4 Blocks
- 19.5
return
Statement - 19.6 Loop Statements
- 19.7
switch
Statement - 19.8 Example of
switch
- 19.9 Duff’s Device
- 19.10 Case Ranges
- 19.11 Null Statement
- 19.12
goto
Statement and Labels - 19.13 Locally Declared Labels
- 19.14 Labels as Values
- 19.15 Statements and Declarations in Expressions
- 20 Variables
- 20.1 Variable Declarations
- 20.2 Initializers
- 20.3 Designated Initializers
- 20.4 Referring to a Type with
__auto_type
- 20.5 Local Variables
- 20.6 File-Scope Variables
- 20.7 Static Local Variables
- 20.8
extern
Declarations - 20.9 Allocating File-Scope Variables
- 20.10
auto
andregister
- 20.11 Omitting Types in Declarations
- 21 Type Qualifiers
- 22 Functions
- 23 Compatible Types
- 24 Type Conversions
- 25 Scope
- 26 Preprocessing
- 26.1 Preprocessing Overview
- 26.2 Directives
- 26.3 Preprocessing Tokens
- 26.4 Header Files
- 26.5 Macros
- 26.6 Conditionals
- 26.7 Diagnostics
- 26.8 Line Control
- 26.9 Null Directive
- 27 Integers in Depth
- 28 Floating Point in Depth
- 28.1 Floating-Point Representations
- 28.2 Floating-Point Type Specifications
- 28.3 Special Floating-Point Values
- 28.4 Invalid Optimizations
- 28.5 Floating Arithmetic Exception Flags
- 28.6 Exact Floating-Point Arithmetic
- 28.7 Rounding
- 28.8 Rounding Issues
- 28.9 Significance Loss
- 28.10 Fused Multiply-Add
- 28.11 Error Recovery
- 28.12 Exact Floating-Point Constants
- 28.13 Handling Infinity
- 28.14 Handling NaN
- 28.15 Signed Zeros
- 28.16 Scaling by Powers of the Base
- 28.17 Rounding Control
- 28.18 Machine Epsilon
- 28.19 Complex Arithmetic
- 28.20 Round-Trip Base Conversion
- 28.21 Further Reading
- 29 Compilation
- 30 Directing Compilation
- Appendix A Type Alignment
- Appendix B Aliasing
- Appendix C Digraphs
- Appendix D Attributes in Declarations
- Appendix E Signals
- Appendix F GNU Free Documentation License
- Index of Symbols and Keywords
- Concept Index
Short Table of Contents
- 1 The First Example
- 2 A Complete Program
- 3 Storage and Data
- 4 Beyond Integers
- 5 Lexical Syntax
- 6 Arithmetic
- 7 Assignment Expressions
- 8 Execution Control Expressions
- 9 Binary Operator Grammar
- 10 Order of Execution
- 11 Primitive Data Types
- 12 Constants
- 13 Type Size
- 14 Pointers
- 15 Structures
- 16 Arrays
- 17 Enumeration Types
- 18 Defining Typedef Names
- 19 Statements
- 20 Variables
- 21 Type Qualifiers
- 22 Functions
- 23 Compatible Types
- 24 Type Conversions
- 25 Scope
- 26 Preprocessing
- 27 Integers in Depth
- 28 Floating Point in Depth
- 29 Compilation
- 30 Directing Compilation
- Appendix A Type Alignment
- Appendix B Aliasing
- Appendix C Digraphs
- Appendix D Attributes in Declarations
- Appendix E Signals
- Appendix F GNU Free Documentation License
- Index of Symbols and Keywords
- Concept Index
Next: A Complete Program, Previous: GNU C Manual, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
1 The First Example
This chapter presents the source code for a very simple C program and uses it to explain a few features of the language. If you already know the basic points of C presented in this chapter, you can skim it or skip it.
We present examples of C source code (other than comments) using a fixed-width typeface, since that’s the way they look when you edit them in an editor such as GNU Emacs.
Next: The Stack, And Stack Overflow, Up: The First Example [Contents][Index]
1.1 Example: Recursive Fibonacci
To introduce the most basic features of C, let’s look at code for a simple mathematical function that does calculations on integers. This function calculates the nth number in the Fibonacci series, in which each number is the sum of the previous two: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, ….
int
fib (int n)
{
if (n <= 2) /* This avoids infinite recursion. */
return 1;
else
return fib (n - 1) + fib (n - 2);
}
This very simple program illustrates several features of C:
- A function definition, whose first two lines constitute the function header. See Function Definitions.
- A function parameter
n
, referred to as the variablen
inside the function body. See Function Parameter Variables. A function definition uses parameters to refer to the argument values provided in a call to that function. - Arithmetic. C programs add with ‘+’ and subtract with ‘-’. See Arithmetic.
- Numeric comparisons. The operator ‘<=’ tests for “less than or equal.” See Numeric Comparisons.
- Integer constants written in base 10. See Integer Constants.
- A function call. The function call
fib (n - 1)
calls the functionfib
, passing as its argument the valuen - 1
. See Function Calls. - A comment, which starts with ‘/*’ and ends with ‘*/’. The
comment has no effect on the execution of the program. Its purpose is
to provide explanations to people reading the source code. Including
comments in the code is tremendously important—they provide
background information so others can understand the code more quickly.
See Comments.
In this manual, we present comment text in the variable-width typeface used for the text of the chapters, not in the fixed-width typeface used for the rest of the code. That is to make comments easier to read. This distinction of typeface does not exist in a real file of C source code.
- Two kinds of statements, the
return
statement and theif
…else
statement. See Statements. - Recursion. The function
fib
calls itself; that is called a recursive call. These are valid in C, and quite common.The
fib
function would not be useful if it didn’t return. Thus, recursive definitions, to be of any use, must avoid infinite recursion.This function definition prevents infinite recursion by specially handling the case where
n
is two or less. Thus the maximum depth of recursive calls is less thann
.
Next: Function Body, Up: Example: Recursive Fibonacci [Contents][Index]
1.1.1 Function Header
In our example, the first two lines of the function definition are the header. Its purpose is to state the function’s name and say how it is called:
int fib (int n)
says that the function returns an integer (type int
), its name is
fib
, and it takes one argument named n
which is also an
integer. (Data types will be explained later, in Primitive Data Types.)
Previous: Function Header, Up: Example: Recursive Fibonacci [Contents][Index]
1.1.2 Function Body
The rest of the function definition is called the function body. Like every function body, this one starts with ‘{’, ends with ‘}’, and contains zero or more statements and declarations. Statements specify actions to take, whereas declarations define names of variables, functions, and so on. Each statement and each declaration ends with a semicolon (‘;’).
Statements and declarations often contain expressions; an expression is a construct whose execution produces a value of some data type, but may also take actions through “side effects” that alter subsequent execution. A statement, by contrast, does not have a value; it affects further execution of the program only through the actions it takes.
This function body contains no declarations, and just one statement, but that one is a complex statement in that it contains nested statements. This function uses two kinds of statements:
return
The
return
statement makes the function return immediately. It looks like this:return value;
Its meaning is to compute the expression value and exit the function, making it return whatever value that expression produced. For instance,
return 1;
returns the integer 1 from the function, and
return fib (n - 1) + fib (n - 2);
returns a value computed by performing two function calls as specified and adding their results.
if
…else
The
if
…else
statement is a conditional. Each time it executes, it chooses one of its two substatements to execute and ignores the other. It looks like this:if (condition) if-true-statement else if-false-statement
Its meaning is to compute the expression condition and, if it’s “true,” execute if-true-statement. Otherwise, execute if-false-statement. See
if-else
Statement.Inside the
if
…else
statement, condition is simply an expression. It’s considered “true” if its value is nonzero. (A comparison operation, such asn <= 2
, produces the value 1 if it’s “true” and 0 if it’s “false.” See Numeric Comparisons.) Thus,if (n <= 2) return 1; else return fib (n - 1) + fib (n - 2);
first tests whether the value of
n
is less than or equal to 2. If so, the expressionn <= 2
has the value 1. So execution continues with the statementreturn 1;
Otherwise, execution continues with this statement:
return fib (n - 1) + fib (n - 2);
Each of these statements ends the execution of the function and provides a value for it to return. See
return
Statement.
Calculating fib
using ordinary integers in C works only for
n < 47, because the value of fib (47)
is too large to fit
in type int
. The addition operation that tries to add
fib (46)
and fib (45)
cannot deliver the correct result.
This occurrence is called integer overflow.
Overflow can manifest itself in various ways, but one thing that can’t possibly happen is to produce the correct value, since that can’t fit in the space for the value. See Integer Overflow.
See Functions, for a full explanation about functions.
Next: Example: Iterative Fibonacci, Previous: Example: Recursive Fibonacci, Up: The First Example [Contents][Index]
1.2 The Stack, And Stack Overflow
Recursion has a drawback: there are limits to how many nested levels of function calls a program can make. In C, each function call allocates a block of memory which it uses until the call returns. C allocates these blocks consecutively within a large area of memory known as the stack, so we refer to the blocks as stack frames.
The size of the stack is limited; if the program tries to use too much, that causes the program to fail because the stack is full. This is called stack overflow.
Stack overflow on GNU/Linux typically manifests itself as the
signal named SIGSEGV
, also known as a “segmentation
fault.” By default, this signal terminates the program immediately,
rather than letting the program try to recover, or reach an expected
ending point. (We commonly say in this case that the program
“crashes”). See Signals.
It is inconvenient to observe a crash by passing too large
an argument to recursive Fibonacci, because the program would run a
long time before it crashes. This algorithm is simple but
ridiculously slow: in calculating fib (n)
, the number of
(recursive) calls fib (1)
or fib (2)
that it makes equals
the final result.
However, you can observe stack overflow very quickly if you use this function instead:
int
fill_stack (int n)
{
if (n <= 1) /* This limits the depth of recursion. */
return 1;
else
return fill_stack (n - 1);
}
Under gNewSense GNU/Linux on the Lemote Yeeloong, without optimization and using the default configuration, an experiment showed there is enough stack space to do 261906 nested calls to that function. One more, and the stack overflows and the program crashes. On another platform, with a different configuration, or with a different function, the limit might be bigger or smaller.
Previous: The Stack, And Stack Overflow, Up: The First Example [Contents][Index]
1.3 Example: Iterative Fibonacci
Here’s a much faster algorithm for computing the same Fibonacci
series. It is faster for two reasons. First, it uses iteration
(that is, repetition or looping) rather than recursion, so it doesn’t
take time for a large number of function calls. But mainly, it is
faster because the number of repetitions is small—only n
.
int fib (int n) { int last = 1; /* Initial value isfib (1)
. */ int prev = 0; /* Initial value controlsfib (2)
. */ int i; for (i = 1; i < n; ++i) /* Ifn
is 1 or less, the loop runs zero times, */ /* sincei < n
is false the first time. */ { /* Nowlast
isfib (
andi
)prev
isfib (
. */ /* Computei
- 1)fib (
. */ int next = prev + last; /* Shift the values down. */ prev = last; last = next; /* Nowi
+ 1)last
isfib (
andi
+ 1)prev
isfib (
. But that won’t stay true for long, because we are about to incrementi
)i
. */ } return last; }
This definition computes fib (n)
in a time proportional
to n
. The comments in the definition explain how it works: it
advances through the series, always keeps the last two values in
last
and prev
, and adds them to get the next value.
Here are the additional C features that this definition uses:
- Internal blocks
Within a function, wherever a statement is called for, you can write a block. It looks like
{ … }
and contains zero or more statements and declarations. (You can also use additional blocks as statements in a block.)The function body also counts as a block, which is why it can contain statements and declarations.
See Blocks.
- Declarations of local variables
This function body contains declarations as well as statements. There are three declarations directly in the function body, as well as a fourth declaration in an internal block. Each starts with
int
because it declares a variable whose type is integer. One declaration can declare several variables, but each of these declarations is simple and declares just one variable.Variables declared inside a block (either a function body or an internal block) are local variables. These variables exist only within that block; their names are not defined outside the block, and exiting the block deallocates their storage. This example declares four local variables:
last
,prev
,i
, andnext
.The most basic local variable declaration looks like this:
type variablename;
For instance,
int i;
declares the local variable
i
as an integer. See Variable Declarations.- Initializers
When you declare a variable, you can also specify its initial value, like this:
type variablename = value;
For instance,
int last = 1;
declares the local variable
last
as an integer (typeint
) and starts it off with the value 1. See Initializers.- Assignment
Assignment: a specific kind of expression, written with the ‘=’ operator, that stores a new value in a variable or other place. Thus,
variable = value
is an expression that computes
value
and stores the value invariable
. See Assignment Expressions.- Expression statements
An expression statement is an expression followed by a semicolon. That computes the value of the expression, then ignores the value.
An expression statement is useful when the expression changes some data or has other side effects—for instance, with function calls, or with assignments as in this example. See Expression Statement.
Using an expression with no side effects in an expression statement is pointless except in very special cases. For instance, the expression statement
x;
would examine the value ofx
and ignore it. That is not useful.- Increment operator
The increment operator is ‘++’.
++i
is an expression that is short fori = i + 1
. See Increment and Decrement Operators.for
statementsA
for
statement is a clean way of executing a statement repeatedly—a loop (see Loop Statements). Specifically,for (i = 1; i < n; ++i) body
means to start by doing
i = 1
(seti
to one) to prepare for the loop. The loop itself consists of- Testing
i < n
and exiting the loop if that’s false. - Executing body.
- Advancing the loop (executing
++i
, which incrementsi
).
The net result is to execute body with 1 in
i
, then with 2 ini
, and so on, stopping just before the repetition wherei
would equaln
. Ifn
is less than 1, the loop will execute the body zero times.The body of the
for
statement must be one and only one statement. You can’t write two statements in a row there; if you try to, only the first of them will be treated as part of the loop.The way to put multiple statements in such a place is to group them with a block, and that’s what we do in this example.
- Testing
Next: Storage and Data, Previous: The First Example, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
2 A Complete Program
It’s all very well to write a Fibonacci function, but you cannot run it by itself. It is a useful program, but it is not a complete program.
In this chapter we present a complete program that contains the
fib
function. This example shows how to make the program
start, how to make it finish, how to do computation, and how to print
a result.
- Complete Program Example
- Complete Program Explanation
- Complete Program, Line by Line
- Compiling the Example Program
Next: Complete Program Explanation, Up: A Complete Program [Contents][Index]
2.1 Complete Program Example
Here is the complete program that uses the simple, recursive version
of the fib
function (see Example: Recursive Fibonacci):
#include <stdio.h>
int
fib (int n)
{
if (n <= 2) /* This avoids infinite recursion. */
return 1;
else
return fib (n - 1) + fib (n - 2);
}
int
main (void)
{
printf ("Fibonacci series item %d is %d\n",
20, fib (20));
return 0;
}
This program prints a message that shows the value of fib (20)
.
Now for an explanation of what that code means.
Next: Complete Program, Line by Line, Previous: Complete Program Example, Up: A Complete Program [Contents][Index]
2.2 Complete Program Explanation
Here’s the explanation of the code of the example in the previous section.
This sample program prints a message that shows the value of fib
(20)
, and exits with code 0 (which stands for successful execution).
Every C program is started by running the function named main
.
Therefore, the example program defines a function named main
to
provide a way to start it. Whatever that function does is what the
program does. See The main
Function.
The main
function is the first one called when the program
runs, but it doesn’t come first in the example code. The order of the
function definitions in the source code makes no difference to the
program’s meaning.
The initial call to main
always passes certain arguments, but
main
does not have to pay attention to them. To ignore those
arguments, define main
with void
as the parameter list.
(void
as a function’s parameter list normally means “call with
no arguments,” but main
is a special case.)
The function main
returns 0 because that is
the conventional way for main
to indicate successful execution.
It could instead return a positive integer to indicate failure, and
some utility programs have specific conventions for the meaning of
certain numeric failure codes. See Returning Values from main
.
The simplest way to print text in C is by calling the printf
function, so here we explain very briefly what that function does.
For a full explanation of printf
and the other standard I/O
functions, see The GNU C Library in The GNU
C Library Reference Manual.
The first argument to printf
is a string constant
(see String Constants) that is a template for output. The
function printf
copies most of that string directly as output,
including the newline character at the end of the string, which is
written as ‘\n’. The output goes to the program’s standard
output destination, which in the usual case is the terminal.
‘%’ in the template introduces a code that substitutes other text
into the output. Specifically, ‘%d’ means to take the next
argument to printf
and substitute it into the text as a decimal
number. (The argument for ‘%d’ must be of type int
; if it
isn’t, printf
will malfunction.) So the output is a line that
looks like this:
Fibonacci series item 20 is 6765
This program does not contain a definition for printf
because
it is defined by the C library, which makes it available in all C
programs. However, each program does need to declare
printf
so it will be called correctly. The #include
line takes care of that; it includes a header file called
stdio.h into the program’s code. That file is provided by the
operating system and it contains declarations for the many standard
input/output functions in the C library, one of which is
printf
.
Don’t worry about header files for now; we’ll explain them later in Header Files.
The first argument of printf
does not have to be a string
constant; it can be any string (see Strings). However, using a
constant is the most common case.
Next: Compiling the Example Program, Previous: Complete Program Explanation, Up: A Complete Program [Contents][Index]
2.3 Complete Program, Line by Line
Here’s the same example, explained line by line. Beginners, do you find this helpful or not? Would you prefer a different layout for the example? Please tell rms@gnu.org.
#include <stdio.h> /* Include declaration of usual */ /* I/O functions such asprintf
. */ /* Most programs need these. */ int /* This function returns anint
. */ fib (int n) /* Its name isfib
; */ /* its argument is calledn
. */ { /* Start of function body. */ /* This stops the recursion from being infinite. */ if (n <= 2) /* Ifn
is 1 or 2, */ return 1; /* makefib
return 1. */ else /* otherwise, add the two previous */ /* Fibonacci numbers. */ return fib (n - 1) + fib (n - 2); } int /* This function returns anint
. */ main (void) /* Start here; ignore arguments. */ { /* Print message with numbers in it. */ printf ("Fibonacci series item %d is %d\n", 20, fib (20)); return 0; /* Terminate program, report success. */ }
Previous: Complete Program, Line by Line, Up: A Complete Program [Contents][Index]
2.4 Compiling the Example Program
To run a C program requires converting the source code into an
executable file. This is called compiling the program,
and the command to do that using GNU C is gcc
.
This example program consists of a single source file. If we call that file fib1.c, the complete command to compile it is this:
gcc -g -O -o fib1 fib1.c
Here, -g says to generate debugging information, -O says to optimize at the basic level, and -o fib1 says to put the executable program in the file fib1.
To run the program, use its file name as a shell command. For instance,
./fib1
However, unless you are sure the program is correct, you should expect to need to debug it. So use this command,
gdb fib1
which starts the GDB debugger (see A Sample GDB Session in Debugging with GDB) so you can run and
debug the executable program fib1
.
Richard Stallman’s advice, from personal experience, is to turn to the debugger as soon as you can reproduce the problem. Don’t try to avoid it by using other methods instead—occasionally they are shortcuts, but usually they waste an unbounded amount of time. With the debugger, you will surely find the bug in a reasonable time; overall, you will get your work done faster. The sooner you get serious and start the debugger, the sooner you are likely to find the bug.
See Compilation, for an introduction to compiling more complex programs which consist of more than one source file.
Next: Beyond Integers, Previous: A Complete Program, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
3 Storage and Data
Storage in C programs is made up of units called bytes. A byte is the smallest unit of storage that can be used in a first-class manner.
On nearly all computers, a byte consists of 8 bits. There are a few peculiar computers (mostly “embedded controllers” for very small systems) where a byte is longer than that, but this manual does not try to explain the peculiarity of those computers; we assume that a byte is 8 bits.
Every C data type is made up of a certain number of bytes; that number
is the data type’s size. See Type Size, for details. The
types signed char
and unsigned char
are one byte long;
use those types to operate on data byte by byte. See Signed and Unsigned Types. You can refer to a series of consecutive bytes as an
array of char
elements; that’s what a character string looks
like in memory. See String Constants.
Next: Lexical Syntax, Previous: Storage and Data, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
4 Beyond Integers
So far we’ve presented programs that operate on integers. In this chapter we’ll present examples of handling non-integral numbers and arrays of numbers.
- An Example with Non-Integer Numbers
- An Example with Arrays
- Calling the Array Example
- Variations for Array Example
Next: An Example with Arrays, Up: Beyond Integers [Contents][Index]
4.1 An Example with Non-Integer Numbers
Here’s a function that operates on and returns floating point numbers that don’t have to be integers. Floating point represents a number as a fraction together with a power of 2. (For more detail, see Floating-Point Data Types.) This example calculates the average of three floating point numbers that are passed to it as arguments:
double average_of_three (double a, double b, double c) { return (a + b + c) / 3; }
The values of the parameter a, b and c do not have to be integers, and even when they happen to be integers, most likely their average is not an integer.
double
is the usual data type in C for calculations on
floating-point numbers.
To print a double
with printf
, we must use ‘%f’
instead of ‘%d’:
printf ("Average is %f\n", average_of_three (1.1, 9.8, 3.62));
The code that calls printf
must pass a double
for
printing with ‘%f’ and an int
for printing with ‘%d’.
If the argument has the wrong type, printf
will produce meaningless
output.
Here’s a complete program that computes the average of three specific numbers and prints the result:
double average_of_three (double a, double b, double c) { return (a + b + c) / 3; } int main (void) { printf ("Average is %f\n", average_of_three (1.1, 9.8, 3.62)); return 0; }
From now on we will not present examples of calls to main
.
Instead we encourage you to write them for yourself when you want
to test executing some code.
Next: Calling the Array Example, Previous: An Example with Non-Integer Numbers, Up: Beyond Integers [Contents][Index]
4.2 An Example with Arrays
A function to take the average of three numbers is very specific and limited. A more general function would take the average of any number of numbers. That requires passing the numbers in an array. An array is an object in memory that contains a series of values of the same data type. This chapter presents the basic concepts and use of arrays through an example; for the full explanation, see Arrays.
Here’s a function definition to take the average of several
floating-point numbers, passed as type double
. The first
parameter, length
, specifies how many numbers are passed. The
second parameter, input_data
, is an array that holds those
numbers.
double avg_of_double (int length, double input_data[]) { double sum = 0; int i; for (i = 0; i < length; i++) sum = sum + input_data[i]; return sum / length; }
This introduces the expression to refer to an element of an array:
input_data[i]
means the element at index i
in
input_data
. The index of the element can be any expression
with an integer value; in this case, the expression is i
.
See Accessing Array Elements.
The lowest valid index in an array is 0, not 1, and the highest valid index is one less than the number of elements. (This is known as zero-origin indexing.)
This example also introduces the way to declare that a function
parameter is an array. Such declarations are modeled after the syntax
for an element of the array. Just as double foo
declares that
foo
is of type double
, double input_data[]
declares that each element of input_data
is of type
double
. Therefore, input_data
itself has type “array
of double
.”
When declaring an array parameter, it’s not necessary to say how long
the array is. In this case, the parameter input_data
has no
length information. That’s why the function needs another parameter,
length
, for the caller to provide that information to the
function avg_of_double
.
Next: Variations for Array Example, Previous: An Example with Arrays, Up: Beyond Integers [Contents][Index]
4.3 Calling the Array Example
To call the function avg_of_double
requires making an
array and then passing it as an argument. Here is an example.
{ /* The array of values to average. */ double nums_to_average[5]; /* The average, once we compute it. */ double average; /* Fill in elements ofnums_to_average
. */ nums_to_average[0] = 58.7; nums_to_average[1] = 5.1; nums_to_average[2] = 7.7; nums_to_average[3] = 105.2; nums_to_average[4] = -3.14159; average = avg_of_double (5, nums_to_average); /* …now make use ofaverage
… */ }
This shows an array subscripting expression again, this time on the left side of an assignment, storing a value into an element of an array.
It also shows how to declare a local variable that is an array:
double nums_to_average[5];
. Since this declaration allocates the
space for the array, it needs to know the array’s length. You can
specify the length with any expression whose value is an integer, but
in this declaration the length is a constant, the integer 5.
The name of the array, when used by itself as an expression, stands
for the address of the array’s data, and that’s what gets passed to
the function avg_of_double
in avg_of_double (5,
nums_to_average)
.
We can make the code easier to maintain by avoiding the need to write
5, the array length, when calling avg_of_double
. That way, if
we change the array to include more elements, we won’t have to change
that call. One way to do this is with the sizeof
operator:
average = avg_of_double ((sizeof (nums_to_average) / sizeof (nums_to_average[0])), nums_to_average);
This computes the number of elements in nums_to_average
by dividing
its total size by the size of one element. See Type Size, for more
details of using sizeof
.
We don’t show in this example what happens after storing the result of
avg_of_double
in the variable average
. Presumably
more code would follow that uses that result somehow. (Why compute
the average and not use it?) But that isn’t part of this topic.
Previous: Calling the Array Example, Up: Beyond Integers [Contents][Index]
4.4 Variations for Array Example
The code to call avg_of_double
has two declarations that
start with the same data type:
/* The array of values to average. */ double nums_to_average[5]; /* The average, once we compute it. */ double average;
In C, you can combine the two, like this:
double nums_to_average[5], average;
This declares nums_to_average
so each of its elements is a
double
, and average
so that it simply is a
double
.
However, while you can combine them, that doesn’t mean you should. If it is useful to write comments about the variables, and usually it is, then it’s clearer to keep the declarations separate so you can put a comment on each one. That also helps with using textual tools to find occurrences of a variable in source files.
We set all of the elements of the array nums_to_average
with
assignments, but it is more convenient to use an initializer in the
declaration:
{
/* The array of values to average. */
double nums_to_average[]
= { 58.7, 5.1, 7.7, 105.2, -3.14159 };
/* The average, once we compute it. */
average = avg_of_double ((sizeof (nums_to_average)
/ sizeof (nums_to_average[0])),
nums_to_average);
/* …now make use of average
… */
}
The array initializer is a comma-separated list of values, delimited by braces. See Initializers.
Note that the declaration does not specify a size for
nums_to_average
, so the size is determined from the
initializer. There are five values in the initializer, so
nums_to_average
gets length 5. If we add another element to
the initializer, nums_to_average
will have six elements.
Because the code computes the number of elements from the size of
the array, using sizeof
, the program will operate on all the
elements in the initializer, regardless of how many those are.
Next: Arithmetic, Previous: Beyond Integers, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
5 Lexical Syntax
To start the full description of the C language, we explain the lexical syntax and lexical units of C code. The lexical units of a programming language are known as tokens. This chapter covers all the tokens of C except for constants, which are covered in a later chapter (see Constants). One vital kind of token is the identifier (see Identifiers), which is used for names of any kind.
- Write Programs in English!
- Characters
- Whitespace
- Comments
- Identifiers
- Operators and Punctuation
- Line Continuation
Next: Characters, Up: Lexical Syntax [Contents][Index]
5.1 Write Programs in English!
In principle, you can write the function and variable names in a program, and the comments, in any human language. C allows any kinds of Unicode characters in comments, and you can put them into identifiers with a special prefix (see Unicode Character Codes). However, to enable programmers in all countries to understand and develop the program, it is best under today’s circumstances to write all identifiers and comments in English.
English is the common language of programmers; in all countries, programmers generally learn English. If names and comments in a program are written in English, most programmers in Bangladesh, Belgium, Bolivia, Brazil, Bulgaria and Burundi can understand them. In all those countries, most programmers can speak English, or at least read it, but they do not read each other’s languages at all. In India, with so many languages, two programmers may have no common language other than English.
If you don’t feel confident in writing English, do the best you can, and follow each English comment with a version in a language you write better; add a note asking others to translate that to English. Someone will eventually do that.
The program’s user interface is a different matter. We don’t need to
choose one language for that; it is easy to support multiple languages
and let each user choose the language for display. This requires writing
the program to support localization of its interface. (The
gettext
package exists to support this; see The GNU C Library in The GNU C Library Reference
Manual.) Then a community-based translation effort can provide
support for all the languages users want to use.
Next: Whitespace, Previous: Write Programs in English!, Up: Lexical Syntax [Contents][Index]
5.2 Characters
GNU C source files are usually written in the ASCII character set, which was defined in the 1960s for English. However, they can also include Unicode characters represented in the UTF-8 multibyte encoding. This makes it possible to represent accented letters such as ‘á’, as well as other scripts such as Arabic, Chinese, Cyrillic, Hebrew, Japanese, and Korean.1
In C source code, non-ASCII characters are valid in comments, in wide character constants (see Wide Character Constants), and in string constants (see String Constants).
Another way to specify non-ASCII characters in constants (character or string) and identifiers is with an escape sequence starting with backslash, specifying the intended Unicode character. (See Unicode Character Codes.) This specifies non-ASCII characters without putting a real non-ASCII character in the source file itself.
C accepts two-character aliases called digraphs for certain characters. See Digraphs.
Next: Comments, Previous: Characters, Up: Lexical Syntax [Contents][Index]
5.3 Whitespace
Whitespace means characters that exist in a file but appear blank in a printed listing of a file (or traditionally did appear blank, several decades ago). The C language requires whitespace in order to separate two consecutive identifiers, or to separate an identifier from a numeric constant. Other than that, and a few special situations described later, whitespace is optional; you can put it in when you wish, to make the code easier to read.
Space and tab in C code are treated as whitespace characters. So are line breaks. You can represent a line break with the newline character (also called linefeed or LF), CR (carriage return), or the CRLF sequence (two characters: carriage return followed by a newline character).
The formfeed character, Control-L, was traditionally used to divide a file into pages. It is still used this way in source code, and the tools that generate nice printouts of source code still start a new page after each “formfeed” character. Dividing code into pages separated by formfeed characters is a good way to break it up into comprehensible pieces and show other programmers where they start and end.
The vertical tab character, Control-K, was traditionally used to make printing advance down to the next section of a page. We know of no particular reason to use it in source code, but it is still accepted as whitespace in C.
Comments are also syntactically equivalent to whitespace.
Next: Identifiers, Previous: Whitespace, Up: Lexical Syntax [Contents][Index]
5.4 Comments
A comment encapsulates text that has no effect on the program’s execution or meaning.
The purpose of comments is to explain the code to people that read it. Writing good comments for your code is tremendously important—they should provide background information that helps programmers understand the reasons why the code is written the way it is. You, returning to the code six months from now, will need the help of these comments to remember why you wrote it this way.
Outdated comments that become incorrect are counterproductive, so part of the software developer’s responsibility is to update comments as needed to correspond with changes to the program code.
C allows two kinds of comment syntax, the traditional style and the C++ style. A traditional C comment starts with ‘/*’ and ends with ‘*/’. For instance,
/* This is a comment in traditional C syntax. */
A traditional comment can contain ‘/*’, but these delimiters do not nest as pairs. The first ‘*/’ ends the comment regardless of whether it contains ‘/*’ sequences.
/* This /* is a comment */ But this is not! */
A line comment starts with ‘//’ and ends at the end of the line. For instance,
// This is a comment in C++ style.
Line comments do nest, in effect, because ‘//’ inside a line comment is part of that comment:
// this whole line is // one comment This is code, not comment.
It is safe to put line comments inside block comments, or vice versa.
/* traditional comment // contains line comment more traditional comment */ text here is not a comment // line comment /* contains traditional comment */
But beware of commenting out one end of a traditional comment with a line comment. The delimiter ‘/*’ doesn’t start a comment if it occurs inside an already-started comment.
// line comment /* That would ordinarily begin a block comment. Oops! The line comment has ended; this isn't a comment any more. */
Comments are not recognized within string constants. "/* blah */" is the string constant ‘/* blah */’, not an empty string.
In this manual we show the text in comments in a variable-width font, for readability, but this font distinction does not exist in source files.
A comment is syntactically equivalent to whitespace, so it always separates tokens. Thus,
int/* comment */foo; is equivalent to int foo;
but clean code always uses real whitespace to separate the comment visually from surrounding code.
Next: Operators and Punctuation, Previous: Comments, Up: Lexical Syntax [Contents][Index]
5.5 Identifiers
An identifier (name) in C is a sequence of letters and digits, as well as ‘_’, that does not start with a digit. Most compilers also allow ‘$’. An identifier can be as long as you like; for example,
int anti_dis_establishment_arian_ism;
Letters in identifiers are case-sensitive in C; thus, a
and A
are two different identifiers.
Identifiers in C are used as variable names, function names, typedef
names, enumeration constants, type tags, field names, and labels.
Certain identifiers in C are keywords, which means they have
specific syntactic meanings. Keywords in C are reserved words,
meaning you cannot use them in any other way. For instance, you can’t
define a variable or function named return
or if
.
You can also include other characters, even non-ASCII characters, in identifiers by writing their Unicode character names, which start with ‘\u’ or ‘\U’, in the identifier name. See Unicode Character Codes. However, it is usually a bad idea to use non-ASCII characters in identifiers, and when the names are written in English, they never need non-ASCII characters. See Write Programs in English!.
As stated above, whitespace is required to separate two consecutive identifiers, or to separate an identifier from a preceding or following numeric constant.
Next: Line Continuation, Previous: Identifiers, Up: Lexical Syntax [Contents][Index]
5.6 Operators and Punctuation
Here we describe the lexical syntax of operators and punctuation in C. The specific operators of C and their meanings are presented in subsequent chapters.
Most operators in C consist of one or two characters that can’t be used in identifiers. The characters used for operators in C are ‘!~^&|*/%+-=<>,.?:’.
Some operators are a single character. For instance, ‘-’ is the operator for negation (with one operand) and the operator for subtraction (with two operands).
Some operators are two characters. For example, ‘++’ is the increment operator. Recognition of multicharacter operators works by grouping together as many consecutive characters as can constitute one operator.
For instance, the character sequence ‘++’ is always interpreted
as the increment operator; therefore, if we want to write two
consecutive instances of the operator ‘+’, we must separate them
with a space so that they do not combine as one token. Applying the
same rule, a+++++b
is always tokenized as a++ ++ + b
, not as a++ + ++b
, even though the latter could be part
of a valid C program and the former could not (since a++
is not an lvalue and thus can’t be the operand of ++
).
A few C operators are keywords rather than special characters. They
include sizeof
(see Type Size) and _Alignof
(see Type Alignment).
The characters ‘;{}[]()’ are used for punctuation and grouping. Semicolon (‘;’) ends a statement. Braces (‘{’ and ‘}’) begin and end a block at the statement level (see Blocks), and surround the initializer (see Initializers) for a variable with multiple elements or fields (such as arrays or structures).
Square brackets (‘[’ and ‘]’) do array indexing, as in
array[5]
.
Parentheses are used in expressions for explicit nesting of
expressions (see Basic Arithmetic), around the parameter
declarations in a function declaration or definition, and around the
arguments in a function call, as in printf ("Foo %d\n", i)
(see Function Calls). Several kinds of statements also use
parentheses as part of their syntax—for instance, if
statements, for
statements, while
statements, and
switch
statements. See if
Statement, and following
sections.
Parentheses are also required around the operand of the operator
keywords sizeof
and _Alignof
when the operand is a data
type rather than a value. See Type Size.
Previous: Operators and Punctuation, Up: Lexical Syntax [Contents][Index]
5.7 Line Continuation
The sequence of a backslash and a newline is ignored absolutely anywhere in a C program. This makes it possible to split a single source line into multiple lines in the source file. GNU C tolerates and ignores other whitespace between the backslash and the newline. In particular, it always ignores a CR (carriage return) character there, in case some text editor decided to end the line with the CRLF sequence.
The main use of line continuation in C is for macro definitions that would be inconveniently long for a single line (see Macros).
It is possible to continue a line comment onto another line with backslash-newline. You can put backslash-newline in the middle of an identifier, even a keyword, or an operator. You can even split ‘/*’, ‘*/’, and ‘//’ onto multiple lines with backslash-newline. Here’s an ugly example:
/\ * */ fo\ o +\ = 1\ 0;
That’s equivalent to ‘/* */ foo += 10;’.
Don’t do those things in real programs, since they make code hard to read.
Note: For the sake of using certain tools on the source code, it is wise to end every source file with a newline character which is not preceded by a backslash, so that it really ends the last line.
Next: Assignment Expressions, Previous: Lexical Syntax, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
6 Arithmetic
Arithmetic operators in C attempt to be as similar as possible to the abstract arithmetic operations, but it is impossible to do this perfectly. Numbers in a computer have a finite range of possible values, and non-integer values have a limit on their possible accuracy. Nonetheless, except when results are out of range, you will encounter no surprises in using ‘+’ for addition, ‘-’ for subtraction, and ‘*’ for multiplication.
Each C operator has a precedence, which is its rank in the grammatical order of the various operators. The operators with the highest precedence grab adjoining operands first; these expressions then become operands for operators of lower precedence. We give some information about precedence of operators in this chapter where we describe the operators; for the full explanation, see Binary Operator Grammar.
The arithmetic operators always promote their operands before operating on them. This means converting narrow integer data types to a wider data type (see Operand Promotions). If you are just learning C, don’t worry about this yet.
Given two operands that have different types, most arithmetic
operations convert them both to their common type. For
instance, if one is int
and the other is double
, the
common type is double
. (That’s because double
can
represent all the values that an int
can hold, but not vice
versa.) For the full details, see Common Type.
- Basic Arithmetic
- Integer Arithmetic
- Integer Overflow
- Mixed-Mode Arithmetic
- Division and Remainder
- Numeric Comparisons
- Shift Operations
- Bitwise Operations
Next: Integer Arithmetic, Up: Arithmetic [Contents][Index]
6.1 Basic Arithmetic
Basic arithmetic in C is done with the usual binary operators of
algebra: addition (‘+’), subtraction (‘-’), multiplication
(‘*’) and division (‘/’). The unary operator ‘-’ is
used to change the sign of a number. The unary +
operator also
exists; it yields its operand unaltered.
‘/’ is the division operator, but dividing integers may not give the result you expect. Its value is an integer, which is not equal to the mathematical quotient when that is a fraction. Use ‘%’ to get the corresponding integer remainder when necessary. See Division and Remainder. Floating point division yields value as close as possible to the mathematical quotient.
These operators use algebraic syntax with the usual algebraic precedence rule (see Binary Operator Grammar) that multiplication and division are done before addition and subtraction, but you can use parentheses to explicitly specify how the operators nest. They are left-associative (see Associativity and Ordering). Thus,
-a + b - c + d * e / f
is equivalent to
(((-a) + b) - c) + ((d * e) / f)
Next: Integer Overflow, Previous: Basic Arithmetic, Up: Arithmetic [Contents][Index]
6.2 Integer Arithmetic
Each of the basic arithmetic operations in C has two variants for integers: signed and unsigned. The choice is determined by the data types of their operands.
Each integer data type in C is either signed or unsigned. A signed type can hold a range of positive and negative numbers, with zero near the middle of the range. An unsigned type can hold only nonnegative numbers; its range starts with zero and runs upward.
The most basic integer types are int
, which normally can hold
numbers from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647, and unsigned
int
, which normally can hold numbers from 0 to 4,294,967,295. (This
assumes int
is 32 bits wide, always true for GNU C on real
computers but not always on embedded controllers.) See Integer Data Types, for full information about integer types.
When a basic arithmetic operation is given two signed operands, it does signed arithmetic. Given two unsigned operands, it does unsigned arithmetic.
If one operand is unsigned int
and the other is int
, the
operator treats them both as unsigned. More generally, the common
type of the operands determines whether the operation is signed or
not. See Common Type.
Printing the results of unsigned arithmetic with printf
using
‘%d’ can produce surprising results for values far away from
zero. Even though the rules above say that the computation was done
with unsigned arithmetic, the printed result may appear to be signed!
The explanation is that the bit pattern resulting from addition, subtraction or multiplication is actually the same for signed and unsigned operations. The difference is only in the data type of the result, which affects the interpretation of the result bit pattern, and whether the arithmetic operation can overflow (see the next section).
But ‘%d’ doesn’t know its argument’s data type. It sees only the
value’s bit pattern, and it is defined to interpret that as
signed int
. To print it as unsigned requires using ‘%u’
instead of ‘%d’. See The GNU C Library in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.
Arithmetic in C never operates directly on narrow integer types (those
with fewer bits than int
; Narrow Integers). Instead it
“promotes” them to int
. See Operand Promotions.
Next: Mixed-Mode Arithmetic, Previous: Integer Arithmetic, Up: Arithmetic [Contents][Index]
6.3 Integer Overflow
When the mathematical value of an arithmetic operation doesn’t fit in the range of the data type in use, that’s called overflow. When it happens in integer arithmetic, it is integer overflow.
Integer overflow happens only in arithmetic operations. Type conversion operations, by definition, do not cause overflow, not even when the result can’t fit in its new type. See Conversion among Integer Types.
Signed numbers use two’s-complement representation, in which the most negative number lacks a positive counterpart (see Integers in Depth). Thus, the unary ‘-’ operator on a signed integer can overflow.
Next: Overflow with Signed Integers, Up: Integer Overflow [Contents][Index]
6.3.1 Overflow with Unsigned Integers
Unsigned arithmetic in C ignores overflow; it produces the true result modulo the nth power of 2, where n is the number of bits in the data type. We say it “truncates” the true result to the lowest n bits.
A true result that is negative, when taken modulo the nth power of 2, yields a positive number. For instance,
unsigned int x = 1; unsigned int y; y = -x;
causes overflow because the negative number -1 can’t be stored
in an unsigned type. The actual result, which is -1 modulo the
nth power of 2, is one less than the nth power of 2. That
is the largest value that the unsigned data type can store. For a
32-bit unsigned int
, the value is 4,294,967,295. See Maximum and Minimum Values.
Adding that number to itself, as here,
unsigned int z; z = y + y;
ought to yield 8,489,934,590; however, that is again too large to fit, so overflow truncates the value to 4,294,967,294. If that were a signed integer, it would mean -2, which (not by coincidence) equals -1 + -1.
Previous: Overflow with Unsigned Integers, Up: Integer Overflow [Contents][Index]
6.3.2 Overflow with Signed Integers
For signed integers, the result of overflow in C is in principle undefined, meaning that anything whatsoever could happen. Therefore, C compilers can do optimizations that treat the overflow case with total unconcern. (Since the result of overflow is undefined in principle, one cannot claim that these optimizations are erroneous.)
Watch out: These optimizations can do surprising things. For instance,
int i;
…
if (i < i + 1)
x = 5;
could be optimized to do the assignment unconditionally, because the
if
-condition is always true if i + 1
does not overflow.
GCC offers compiler options to control handling signed integer overflow. These options operate per module; that is, each module behaves according to the options it was compiled with.
These two options specify particular ways to handle signed integer overflow, other than the default way:
- -fwrapv
Make signed integer operations well-defined, like unsigned integer operations: they produce the n low-order bits of the true result. The highest of those n bits is the sign bit of the result. With -fwrapv, these out-of-range operations are not considered overflow, so (strictly speaking) integer overflow never happens.
The option -fwrapv enables some optimizations based on the defined values of out-of-range results. In GCC 8, it disables optimizations that are based on assuming signed integer operations will not overflow.
- -ftrapv
Generate a signal
SIGFPE
when signed integer overflow occurs. This terminates the program unless the program handles the signal. See Signals.
One other option is useful for finding where overflow occurs:
- -fsanitize=signed-integer-overflow
Output a warning message at run time when signed integer overflow occurs. This checks the ‘+’, ‘*’, and ‘-’ operators. This takes priority over -ftrapv.
Next: Division and Remainder, Previous: Integer Overflow, Up: Arithmetic [Contents][Index]
6.4 Mixed-Mode Arithmetic
Mixing integers and floating-point numbers in a basic arithmetic operation converts the integers automatically to floating point. In most cases, this gives exactly the desired results. But sometimes it matters precisely where the conversion occurs.
If i
and j
are integers, (i + j) * 2.0
adds them
as an integer, then converts the sum to floating point for the
multiplication. If the addition causes an overflow, that is not
equivalent to converting each integer to floating point and then
adding the two floating point numbers. You can get the latter result
by explicitly converting the integers, as in ((double) i +
(double) j) * 2.0
. See Explicit Type Conversion.
Adding or multiplying several values, including some integers and some
floating point, performs the operations left to right. Thus, 3.0 +
i + j
converts i
to floating point, then adds 3.0, then
converts j
to floating point and adds that. You can specify a
different order using parentheses: 3.0 + (i + j)
adds i
and j
first and then adds that sum (converted to floating
point) to 3.0. In this respect, C differs from other languages, such
as Fortran.
Next: Numeric Comparisons, Previous: Mixed-Mode Arithmetic, Up: Arithmetic [Contents][Index]
6.5 Division and Remainder
Division of integers in C rounds the result to an integer. The result is always rounded towards zero.
16 / 3 ⇒ 5 -16 / 3 ⇒ -5 16 / -3 ⇒ -5 -16 / -3 ⇒ 5
To get the corresponding remainder, use the ‘%’ operator:
16 % 3 ⇒ 1 -16 % 3 ⇒ -1 16 % -3 ⇒ 1 -16 % -3 ⇒ -1
‘%’ has the same operator precedence as ‘/’ and ‘*’.
From the rounded quotient and the remainder, you can reconstruct the dividend, like this:
int original_dividend (int divisor, int quotient, int remainder) { return divisor * quotient + remainder; }
To do unrounded division, use floating point. If only one operand is floating point, ‘/’ converts the other operand to floating point.
16.0 / 3 ⇒ 5.333333333333333 16 / 3.0 ⇒ 5.333333333333333 16.0 / 3.0 ⇒ 5.333333333333333 16 / 3 ⇒ 5
The remainder operator ‘%’ is not allowed for floating-point operands, because it is not needed. The concept of remainder makes sense for integers because the result of division of integers has to be an integer. For floating point, the result of division is a floating-point number, in other words a fraction, which will differ from the exact result only by a very small amount.
There are functions in the standard C library to calculate remainders from integral-values division of floating-point numbers. See The GNU C Library in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.
Integer division overflows in one specific case: dividing the smallest
negative value for the data type (see Maximum and Minimum Values)
by -1. That’s because the correct result, which is the
corresponding positive number, does not fit (see Integer Overflow)
in the same number of bits. On some computers now in use, this always
causes a signal SIGFPE
(see Signals), the same behavior
that the option -ftrapv specifies (see Overflow with Signed Integers).
Division by zero leads to unpredictable results—depending on the
type of computer, it might cause a signal SIGFPE
, or it might
produce a numeric result.
Watch out: Make sure the program does not divide by zero. If you can’t prove that the divisor is not zero, test whether it is zero, and skip the division if so.
Next: Shift Operations, Previous: Division and Remainder, Up: Arithmetic [Contents][Index]
6.6 Numeric Comparisons
There are two kinds of comparison operators: equality and ordering. Equality comparisons test whether two expressions have the same value. The result is a truth value: a number that is 1 for “true” and 0 for “false.”
a == b /* Test for equal. */ a != b /* Test for not equal. */
The equality comparison is written ==
because plain =
is the assignment operator.
Ordering comparisons test which operand is greater or less. Their results are truth values. These are the ordering comparisons of C:
a < b /* Test for less-than. */ a > b /* Test for greater-than. */ a <= b /* Test for less-than-or-equal. */ a >= b /* Test for greater-than-or-equal. */
For any integers a
and b
, exactly one of the comparisons
a < b
, a == b
and a > b
is true, just as in
mathematics. However, if a
and b
are special floating
point values (not ordinary numbers), all three can be false.
See Special Floating-Point Values, and Invalid Optimizations.
Next: Bitwise Operations, Previous: Numeric Comparisons, Up: Arithmetic [Contents][Index]
6.7 Shift Operations
Shifting an integer means moving the bit values to the left or right within the bits of the data type. Shifting is defined only for integers. Here’s the way to write it:
/* Left shift. */ 5 << 2 ⇒ 20 /* Right shift. */ 5 >> 2 ⇒ 1
The left operand is the value to be shifted, and the right operand
says how many bits to shift it (the shift count). The left
operand is promoted (see Operand Promotions), so shifting never
operates on a narrow integer type; it’s always either int
or
wider. The result of the shift operation has the same type as the
promoted left operand.
Next: Caveats for Shift Operations, Up: Shift Operations [Contents][Index]
6.7.1 Shifting Makes New Bits
A shift operation shifts towards one end of the number and has to generate new bits at the other end.
Shifting left one bit must generate a new least significant bit. It always brings in zero there. It is equivalent to multiplying by the appropriate power of 2. For example,
5 << 3 is equivalent to 5 * 2*2*2 -10 << 4 is equivalent to -10 * 2*2*2*2
The meaning of shifting right depends on whether the data type is signed or unsigned (see Signed and Unsigned Types). For a signed data type, it performs “arithmetic shift,” which keeps the number’s sign unchanged by duplicating the sign bit. For an unsigned data type, it performs “logical shift,” which always shifts in zeros at the most significant bit.
In both cases, shifting right one bit is division by two, rounding towards negative infinity. For example,
(unsigned) 19 >> 2 ⇒ 4 (unsigned) 20 >> 2 ⇒ 5 (unsigned) 21 >> 2 ⇒ 5
For negative left operand a
, a >> 1
is not equivalent to
a / 2
. They both divide by 2, but ‘/’ rounds toward
zero.
The shift count must be zero or greater. Shifting by a negative number of bits gives machine-dependent results.
Next: Shift Hacks, Previous: Shifting Makes New Bits, Up: Shift Operations [Contents][Index]
6.7.2 Caveats for Shift Operations
Warning: If the shift count is greater than or equal to the width in bits of the promoted first operand, the results are machine-dependent. Logically speaking, the “correct” value would be either -1 (for right shift of a negative number) or 0 (in all other cases), but the actual result is whatever the machine’s shift instruction does in that case. So unless you can prove that the second operand is not too large, write code to check it at run time.
Warning: Never rely on how the shift operators relate in precedence to other arithmetic binary operators. Programmers don’t remember these precedences, and won’t understand the code. Always use parentheses to explicitly specify the nesting, like this:
a + (b << 5) /* Shift first, then add. */ (a + b) << 5 /* Add first, then shift. */
Note: according to the C standard, shifting of signed values isn’t guaranteed to work properly when the value shifted is negative, or becomes negative during the operation of shifting left. However, only pedants have a reason to be concerned about this; only computers with strange shift instructions could plausibly do this wrong. In GNU C, the operation always works as expected,
Previous: Caveats for Shift Operations, Up: Shift Operations [Contents][Index]
6.7.3 Shift Hacks
You can use the shift operators for various useful hacks. For
example, given a date specified by day of the month d
, month
m
, and year y
, you can store the entire date in a single
integer date
:
unsigned int d = 12; unsigned int m = 6; unsigned int y = 1983; unsigned int date = ((y << 4) + m) << 5) + d;
To extract the original day, month, and year out of
date
, use a combination of shift and remainder.
d = date % 32; m = (date >> 5) % 16; y = date >> 9;
-1 << LOWBITS
is a clever way to make an integer whose
LOWBITS
lowest bits are all 0 and the rest are all 1.
-(1 << LOWBITS)
is equivalent to that, due to associativity of
multiplication, since negating a value is equivalent to multiplying it
by -1.
Previous: Shift Operations, Up: Arithmetic [Contents][Index]
6.8 Bitwise Operations
Bitwise operators operate on integers, treating each bit independently. They are not allowed for floating-point types.
The examples in this section use binary constants, starting with
‘0b’ (see Integer Constants). They stand for 32-bit integers
of type int
.
~
a
Unary operator for bitwise negation; this changes each bit of
a
from 1 to 0 or from 0 to 1.~0b10101000 ⇒ 0b11111111111111111111111101010111 ~0 ⇒ 0b11111111111111111111111111111111 ~0b11111111111111111111111111111111 ⇒ 0 ~ (-1) ⇒ 0
It is useful to remember that
~x + 1
equals-x
, for integers, and~x
equals-x - 1
. The last example above shows this with -1 as x.a
&b
Binary operator for bitwise “and” or “conjunction.” Each bit in the result is 1 if that bit is 1 in both
a
andb
.0b10101010 & 0b11001100 ⇒ 0b10001000
a
|b
Binary operator for bitwise “or” (“inclusive or” or “disjunction”). Each bit in the result is 1 if that bit is 1 in either
a
orb
.0b10101010 | 0b11001100 ⇒ 0b11101110
a
^b
Binary operator for bitwise “xor” (“exclusive or”). Each bit in the result is 1 if that bit is 1 in exactly one of
a
andb
.0b10101010 ^ 0b11001100 ⇒ 0b01100110
To understand the effect of these operators on signed integers, keep
in mind that all modern computers use two’s-complement representation
(see Integer Representations) for negative integers. This means
that the highest bit of the number indicates the sign; it is 1 for a
negative number and 0 for a positive number. In a negative number,
the value in the other bits increases as the number gets closer
to zero, so that 0b111…111
is -1 and
0b100…000
is the most negative possible integer.
Warning: C defines a precedence ordering for the bitwise binary operators, but you should never rely on it. You should never rely on how bitwise binary operators relate in precedence to the arithmetic and shift binary operators. Other programmers don’t remember this precedence ordering, so always use parentheses to explicitly specify the nesting.
For example, suppose offset
is an integer that specifies
the offset within shared memory of a table, except that its bottom few
bits (LOWBITS
says how many) are special flags. Here’s
how to get just that offset and add it to the base address.
shared_mem_base + (offset & (-1 << LOWBITS))
Thanks to the outer set of parentheses, we don’t need to know whether ‘&’ has higher precedence than ‘+’. Thanks to the inner set, we don’t need to know whether ‘&’ has higher precedence than ‘<<’. But we can rely on all unary operators to have higher precedence than any binary operator, so we don’t need parentheses around the left operand of ‘<<’.
Next: Execution Control Expressions, Previous: Arithmetic, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
7 Assignment Expressions
As a general concept in programming, an assignment is a construct that stores a new value into a place where values can be stored—for instance, in a variable. Such places are called lvalues (see Lvalues) because they are locations that hold a value.
An assignment in C is an expression because it has a value; we call it an assignment expression. A simple assignment looks like
lvalue = value-to-store
We say it assigns the value of the expression value-to-store to the location lvalue, or that it stores value-to-store there. You can think of the “l” in “lvalue” as standing for “left,” since that’s what you put on the left side of the assignment operator.
However, that’s not the only way to use an lvalue, and not all lvalues
can be assigned to. To use the lvalue in the left side of an
assignment, it has to be modifiable. In C, that means it was
not declared with the type qualifier const
(see const
Variables and Fields).
The value of the assignment expression is that of lvalue after the new value is stored in it. This means you can use an assignment inside other expressions. Assignment operators are right-associative so that
x = y = z = 0;
is equivalent to
x = (y = (z = 0));
This is the only useful way for them to associate; the other way,
((x = y) = z) = 0;
would be invalid since an assignment expression such as x = y
is not valid as an lvalue.
Warning: Write parentheses around an assignment if you nest it inside another expression, unless that is a conditional expression, or comma-separated series, or another assignment.
- Simple Assignment
- Lvalues
- Modifying Assignment
- Increment and Decrement Operators
- Postincrement and Postdecrement
- Pitfall: Assignment in Subexpressions
- Write Assignments in Separate Statements
Next: Lvalues, Up: Assignment Expressions [Contents][Index]
7.1 Simple Assignment
A simple assignment expression computes the value of the right
operand and stores it into the lvalue on the left. Here is a simple
assignment expression that stores 5 in i
:
i = 5
We say that this is an assignment to the variable i
and
that it assigns i
the value 5. It has no semicolon
because it is an expression (so it has a value). Adding a semicolon
at the end would make it a statement (see Expression Statement).
Here is another example of a simple assignment expression. Its operands are not simple, but the kind of assignment done here is simple assignment.
x[foo ()] = y + 6
A simple assignment with two different numeric data types converts the right operand value to the lvalue’s type, if possible. It can convert any numeric type to any other numeric type.
Simple assignment is also allowed on some non-numeric types: pointers (see Pointers), structures (see Structure Assignment), and unions (see Unions).
Warning: Assignment is not allowed on arrays because there are no array values in C; C variables can be arrays, but these arrays cannot be manipulated as wholes. See Limitations of C Arrays.
See Assignment Type Conversions, for the complete rules about data types used in assignments.
Next: Modifying Assignment, Previous: Simple Assignment, Up: Assignment Expressions [Contents][Index]
7.2 Lvalues
An expression that identifies a memory space that holds a value is called an lvalue, because it is a location that can hold a value.
The standard kinds of lvalues are:
- A variable.
- A pointer-dereference expression (see Dereferencing Pointers) using unary ‘*’.
- A structure field reference (see Structures) using ‘.’, if the structure value is an lvalue.
- A structure field reference using ‘->’. This is always an lvalue since ‘->’ implies pointer dereference.
- A union alternative reference (see Unions), on the same conditions as for structure fields.
- An array-element reference using ‘[…]’, if the array is an lvalue.
If an expression’s outermost operation is any other operator, that
expression is not an lvalue. Thus, the variable x
is an
lvalue, but x + 0
is not, even though these two expressions
compute the same value (assuming x
is a number).
An array can be an lvalue (the rules above determine whether it is
one), but using the array in an expression converts it automatically
to a pointer to the zeroth element. The result of this conversion is
not an lvalue. Thus, if the variable a
is an array, you can’t
use a
by itself as the left operand of an assignment. But you
can assign to an element of a
, such as a[0]
. That is an
lvalue since a
is an lvalue.
Next: Increment and Decrement Operators, Previous: Lvalues, Up: Assignment Expressions [Contents][Index]
7.3 Modifying Assignment
You can abbreviate the common construct
lvalue = lvalue + expression
as
lvalue += expression
This is known as a modifying assignment. For instance,
i = i + 5; i += 5;
shows two statements that are equivalent. The first uses simple assignment; the second uses modifying assignment.
Modifying assignment works with any binary arithmetic operator. For instance, you can subtract something from an lvalue like this,
lvalue -= expression
or multiply it by a certain amount like this,
lvalue *= expression
or shift it by a certain amount like this.
lvalue <<= expression lvalue >>= expression
In most cases, this feature adds no power to the language, but it provides substantial convenience. Also, when lvalue contains code that has side effects, the simple assignment performs those side effects twice, while the modifying assignment performs them once. For instance,
x[foo ()] = x[foo ()] + 5;
calls foo
twice, and it could return different values each
time. If foo ()
returns 1 the first time and 3 the second
time, then the effect could be to add x[3]
and 5 and store the
result in x[1]
, or to add x[1]
and 5 and store the
result in x[3]
. We don’t know which of the two it will do,
because C does not specify which call to foo
is computed first.
Such a statement is not well defined, and shouldn’t be used.
By contrast,
x[foo ()] += 5;
is well defined: it calls foo
only once to determine which
element of x
to adjust, and it adjusts that element by adding 5
to it.
Next: Postincrement and Postdecrement, Previous: Modifying Assignment, Up: Assignment Expressions [Contents][Index]
7.4 Increment and Decrement Operators
The operators ‘++’ and ‘--’ are the increment and decrement operators. When used on a numeric value, they add or subtract 1. We don’t consider them assignments, but they are equivalent to assignments.
Using ‘++’ or ‘--’ as a prefix, before an lvalue, is called preincrement or predecrement. This adds or subtracts 1 and the result becomes the expression’s value. For instance,
#include <stdio.h> /* Declares printf
. */
int
main (void)
{
int i = 5;
printf ("%d\n", i);
printf ("%d\n", ++i);
printf ("%d\n", i);
return 0;
}
prints lines containing 5, 6, and 6 again. The expression ++i
increments i
from 5 to 6, and has the value 6, so the output
from printf
on that line says ‘6’.
Using ‘--’ instead, for predecrement,
#include <stdio.h> /* Declares printf
. */
int
main (void)
{
int i = 5;
printf ("%d\n", i);
printf ("%d\n", --i);
printf ("%d\n", i);
return 0;
}
prints three lines that contain (respectively) ‘5’, ‘4’, and again ‘4’.
Next: Pitfall: Assignment in Subexpressions, Previous: Increment and Decrement Operators, Up: Assignment Expressions [Contents][Index]
7.5 Postincrement and Postdecrement
Using ‘++’ or ‘--’ after an lvalue does something
peculiar: it gets the value directly out of the lvalue and then
increments or decrements it. Thus, the value of i++
is the same
as the value of i
, but i++
also increments i
“a
little later.” This is called postincrement or
postdecrement.
For example,
#include <stdio.h> /* Declares printf
. */
int
main (void)
{
int i = 5;
printf ("%d\n", i);
printf ("%d\n", i++);
printf ("%d\n", i);
return 0;
}
prints lines containing 5, again 5, and 6. The expression i++
has the value 5, which is the value of i
at the time,
but it increments i
from 5 to 6 just a little later.
How much later is “just a little later”? The compiler has some flexibility in deciding that. The rule is that the increment has to happen by the next sequence point; in simple cases, that means by the end of the statement. See Sequence Points.
Regardless of precisely where the compiled code increments the value
of i
, the crucial thing is that the value of i++
is the
value that i
has before incrementing it.
If a unary operator precedes a postincrement or postincrement expression, the increment nests inside:
-a++ is equivalent to -(a++)
That’s the only order that makes sense; -a
is not an lvalue, so
it can’t be incremented.
The most common use of postincrement is with arrays. Here’s an
example of using postincrement to access one element of an array and
advance the index for the next access. Compare this with the example
avg_of_double
(see An Example with Arrays), which is almost the same
but doesn’t use postincrement.
double avg_of_double_alt (int length, double input_data[]) { double sum = 0; int i; /* Fetch each element and add it intosum
. */ for (i = 0; i < length;) /* Use the indexi
, then increment it. */ sum += input_data[i++]; return sum / length; }
Next: Write Assignments in Separate Statements, Previous: Postincrement and Postdecrement, Up: Assignment Expressions [Contents][Index]
7.6 Pitfall: Assignment in Subexpressions
In C, the order of computing parts of an expression is not fixed.
Aside from a few special cases, the operations can be computed in any
order. If one part of the expression has an assignment to x
and another part of the expression uses x
, the result is
unpredictable because that use might be computed before or after the
assignment.
Here’s an example of ambiguous code:
x = 20; printf ("%d %d\n", x, x = 4);
If the second argument, x
, is computed before the third argument,
x = 4
, the second argument’s value will be 20. If they are
computed in the other order, the second argument’s value will be 4.
Here’s one way to make that code unambiguous:
y = 20; printf ("%d %d\n", y, x = 4);
Here’s another way, with the other meaning:
x = 4; printf ("%d %d\n", x, x);
This issue applies to all kinds of assignments, and to the increment and decrement operators, which are equivalent to assignments. See Order of Execution, for more information about this.
However, it can be useful to write assignments inside an
if
-condition or while
-test along with logical operators.
See Logical Operators and Assignments.
Previous: Pitfall: Assignment in Subexpressions, Up: Assignment Expressions [Contents][Index]
7.7 Write Assignments in Separate Statements
It is often convenient to write an assignment inside an
if
-condition, but that can reduce the readability of the
program. Here’s an example of what to avoid:
if (x = advance (x))
…
The idea here is to advance x
and test if the value is nonzero.
However, readers might miss the fact that it uses ‘=’ and not
‘==’. In fact, writing ‘=’ where ‘==’ was intended
inside a condition is a common error, so GNU C can give warnings when
‘=’ appears in a way that suggests it’s an error.
It is much clearer to write the assignment as a separate statement, like this:
x = advance (x);
if (x != 0)
…
This makes it unmistakably clear that x
is assigned a new value.
Another method is to use the comma operator (see Comma Operator), like this:
if (x = advance (x), x != 0)
…
However, putting the assignment in a separate statement is usually clearer unless the assignment is very short, because it reduces nesting.
Next: Binary Operator Grammar, Previous: Assignment Expressions, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
8 Execution Control Expressions
This chapter describes the C operators that combine expressions to control which of those expressions execute, or in which order.
- Logical Operators
- Logical Operators and Comparisons
- Logical Operators and Assignments
- Conditional Expression
- Comma Operator
8.1 Logical Operators
The logical operators combine truth values, which are normally
represented in C as numbers. Any expression with a numeric value is a
valid truth value: zero means false, and any other value means true.
A pointer type is also meaningful as a truth value; a null pointer
(which is zero) means false, and a non-null pointer means true
(see Pointer Types). The value of a logical operator is always 1
or 0 and has type int
(see Integer Data Types).
The logical operators are used mainly in the condition of an if
statement, or in the end test in a for
statement or
while
statement (see Statements). However, they are valid
in any context where an integer-valued expression is allowed.
- ‘! exp’
Unary operator for logical “not.” The value is 1 (true) if exp is 0 (false), and 0 (false) if exp is nonzero (true).
Warning: if
exp
is anything but an lvalue or a function call, you should write parentheses around it.- ‘left && right’
The logical “and” binary operator computes left and, if necessary, right. If both of the operands are true, the ‘&&’ expression gives the value 1 (which is true). Otherwise, the ‘&&’ expression gives the value 0 (false). If left yields a false value, that determines the overall result, so right is not computed.
- ‘left || right’
The logical “or” binary operator computes left and, if necessary, right. If at least one of the operands is true, the ‘||’ expression gives the value 1 (which is true). Otherwise, the ‘||’ expression gives the value 0 (false). If left yields a true value, that determines the overall result, so right is not computed.
Warning: never rely on the relative precedence of ‘&&’ and ‘||’. When you use them together, always use parentheses to specify explicitly how they nest, as shown here:
if ((r != 0 && x % r == 0) || (s != 0 && x % s == 0))
Next: Logical Operators and Assignments, Previous: Logical Operators, Up: Execution Control Expressions [Contents][Index]
8.2 Logical Operators and Comparisons
The most common thing to use inside the logical operators is a comparison. Conveniently, ‘&&’ and ‘||’ have lower precedence than comparison operators and arithmetic operators, so we can write expressions like this without parentheses and get the nesting that is natural: two comparison operations that must both be true.
if (r != 0 && x % r == 0)
This example also shows how it is useful that ‘&&’ guarantees to skip the right operand if the left one turns out false. Because of that, this code never tries to divide by zero.
This is equivalent:
if (r && x % r == 0)
A truth value is simply a number, so using r
as a truth value
tests whether it is nonzero. But r
’s meaning as en expression
is not a truth value—it is a number to divide by. So it is better
style to write the explicit != 0
.
Here’s another equivalent way to write it:
if (!(r == 0) && x % r == 0)
This illustrates the unary ‘!’ operator, and the need to write parentheses around its operand.
Next: Conditional Expression, Previous: Logical Operators and Comparisons, Up: Execution Control Expressions [Contents][Index]
8.3 Logical Operators and Assignments
There are cases where assignments nested inside the condition can
actually make a program easier to read. Here is an example
using a hypothetical type list
which represents a list; it
tests whether the list has at least two links, using hypothetical
functions, nonempty
which is true if the argument is a nonempty
list, and list_next
which advances from one list link to the
next. We assume that a list is never a null pointer, so that the
assignment expressions are always “true.”
if (nonempty (list) && (temp1 = list_next (list)) && nonempty (temp1) && (temp2 = list_next (temp1))) … /* usetemp1
andtemp2
*/
Here we take advantage of the ‘&&’ operator to avoid executing
the rest of the code if a call to nonempty
returns “false.” The
only natural place to put the assignments is among those calls.
It would be possible to rewrite this as several statements, but that could make it much more cumbersome. On the other hand, when the test is even more complex than this one, splitting it into multiple statements might be necessary for clarity.
If an empty list is a null pointer, we can dispense with calling
nonempty
:
if ((temp1 = list_next (list))
&& (temp2 = list_next (temp1)))
…
Next: Comma Operator, Previous: Logical Operators and Assignments, Up: Execution Control Expressions [Contents][Index]
8.4 Conditional Expression
C has a conditional expression that selects one of two expressions to compute and get the value from. It looks like this:
condition ? iftrue : iffalse
Next: Conditional Operator Branches, Up: Conditional Expression [Contents][Index]
8.4.1 Rules for the Conditional Operator
The first operand, condition, should be a value that can be compared with zero—a number or a pointer. If it is true (nonzero), then the conditional expression computes iftrue and its value becomes the value of the conditional expression. Otherwise the conditional expression computes iffalse and its value becomes the value of the conditional expression. The conditional expression always computes just one of iftrue and iffalse, never both of them.
Here’s an example: the absolute value of a number x
can be written as (x >= 0 ? x : -x)
.
Warning: The conditional expression operators have rather low syntactic precedence. Except when the conditional expression is used as an argument in a function call, write parentheses around it. For clarity, always write parentheses around it if it extends across more than one line.
Assignment operators and the comma operator (see Comma Operator) have lower precedence than conditional expression operators, so write parentheses around those when they appear inside a conditional expression. See Order of Execution.
Previous: Rules for the Conditional Operator, Up: Conditional Expression [Contents][Index]
8.4.2 Conditional Operator Branches
We call iftrue and iffalse the branches of the conditional.
The two branches should normally have the same type, but a few exceptions are allowed. If they are both numeric types, the conditional converts both to their common type (see Common Type).
With pointers (see Pointers), the two values can be pointers to nearly compatible types (see Compatible Types). In this case, the result type is a similar pointer whose target type combines all the type qualifiers (see Type Qualifiers) of both branches.
If one branch has type void *
and the other is a pointer to an
object (not to a function), the conditional converts the void *
branch to the type of the other.
If one branch is an integer constant with value zero and the other is a pointer, the conditional converts zero to the pointer’s type.
In GNU C, you can omit iftrue in a conditional expression. In that case, if condition is nonzero, its value becomes the value of the conditional expression, after conversion to the common type. Thus,
x ? : y
has the value of x
if that is nonzero; otherwise, the value of
y
.
Omitting iftrue is useful when condition has side effects.
In that case, writing that expression twice would carry out the side
effects twice, but writing it once does them just once. For example,
if we suppose that the function next_element
advances a pointer
variable to point to the next element in a list and returns the new
pointer,
next_element () ? : default_pointer
is a way to advance the pointer and use its new value if it isn’t
null, but use default_pointer
if that is null. We cannot do
it this way,
next_element () ? next_element () : default_pointer
because that would advance the pointer a second time.
Previous: Conditional Expression, Up: Execution Control Expressions [Contents][Index]
8.5 Comma Operator
The comma operator stands for sequential execution of expressions. The value of the comma expression comes from the last expression in the sequence; the previous expressions are computed only for their side effects. It looks like this:
exp1, exp2 …
You can bundle any number of expressions together this way, by putting commas between them.
Next: Clean Use of the Comma Operator, Up: Comma Operator [Contents][Index]
8.5.1 The Uses of the Comma Operator
With commas, you can put several expressions into a place that
requires just one expression—for example, in the header of a
for
statement. This statement
for (i = 0, j = 10, k = 20; i < n; i++)
contains three assignment expressions, to initialize i
, j
and k
. The syntax of for
requires just one expression
for initialization; to include three assignments, we use commas to
bundle them into a single larger expression, i = 0, j = 10, k =
20
. This technique is also useful in the loop-advance expression,
the last of the three inside the for
parentheses.
In the for
statement and the while
statement
(see Loop Statements), a comma provides a way to perform some side
effect before the loop-exit test. For example,
while (printf ("At the test, x = %d\n", x), x != 0)
Next: When Not to Use the Comma Operator, Previous: The Uses of the Comma Operator, Up: Comma Operator [Contents][Index]
8.5.2 Clean Use of the Comma Operator
Always write parentheses around a series of comma operators, except
when it is at top level in an expression statement, or within the
parentheses of an if
, for
, while
, or switch
statement (see Statements). For instance, in
for (i = 0, j = 10, k = 20; i < n; i++)
the commas between the assignments are clear because they are between a parenthesis and a semicolon.
The arguments in a function call are also separated by commas, but that is not an instance of the comma operator. Note the difference between
foo (4, 5, 6)
which passes three arguments to foo
and
foo ((4, 5, 6))
which uses the comma operator and passes just one argument (with value 6).
Warning: don’t use the comma operator around an argument of a function unless it makes the code more readable. When you do so, don’t put part of another argument on the same line. Instead, add a line break to make the parentheses around the comma operator easier to see, like this.
foo ((mumble (x, y), frob (z)), *p)
Previous: Clean Use of the Comma Operator, Up: Comma Operator [Contents][Index]
8.5.3 When Not to Use the Comma Operator
You can use a comma in any subexpression, but in most cases it only makes the code confusing, and it is clearer to raise all but the last of the comma-separated expressions to a higher level. Thus, instead of this:
x = (y += 4, 8);
it is much clearer to write this:
y += 4, x = 8;
or this:
y += 4; x = 8;
Use commas only in the cases where there is no clearer alternative involving multiple statements.
By contrast, don’t hesitate to use commas in the expansion in a macro definition. The trade-offs of code clarity are different in that case, because the use of the macro may improve overall clarity so much that the ugliness of the macro’s definition is a small price to pay. See Macros.
Next: Order of Execution, Previous: Execution Control Expressions, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
9 Binary Operator Grammar
Binary operators are those that take two operands, one on the left and one on the right.
All the binary operators in C are syntactically left-associative.
This means that a op b op c
means (a op b) op c
. However, the only operators you should
repeat in this way without parentheses are ‘+’, ‘-’,
‘*’ and ‘/’, because those cases are clear from algebra. So
it is OK to write a + b + c
or a - b - c
, but never
a == b == c
or a % b % c
. For those operators, use
explicit parentheses to show how the operations nest.
Each C operator has a precedence, which is its rank in the grammatical order of the various operators. The operators with the highest precedence grab adjoining operands first; these expressions then become operands for operators of lower precedence.
The precedence order of operators in C is fully specified, so any combination of operations leads to a well-defined nesting. We state only part of the full precedence ordering here because it is bad practice for C code to depend on the other cases. For cases not specified in this chapter, always use parentheses to make the nesting explicit.2
You can depend on this subsequence of the precedence ordering (stated from highest precedence to lowest):
- Postfix operations: access to a field or alternative (‘.’ and ‘->’), array subscripting, function calls, and unary postfix operators.
- Unary prefix operators.
- Multiplication, division, and remainder (they have the same precedence).
- Addition and subtraction (they have the same precedence).
- Comparisons—but watch out!
- Logical operators ‘&&’ and ‘||’—but watch out!
- Conditional expression with ‘?’ and ‘:’.
- Assignments.
- Sequential execution (the comma operator, ‘,’).
Two of the lines in the above list say “but watch out!” That means that the line covers operators with subtly different precedence. Never depend on the grammar of C to decide how two comparisons nest; instead, always use parentheses to specify their nesting.
You can let several ‘&&’ operators associate, or several ‘||’ operators, but always use parentheses to show how ‘&&’ and ‘||’ nest with each other. See Logical Operators.
There is one other precedence ordering that code can depend on:
- Unary postfix operators.
- Bitwise and shift operators—but watch out!
- Conditional expression with ‘?’ and ‘:’.
The caveat for bitwise and shift operators is like that for logical operators: you can let multiple uses of one bitwise operator associate, but always use parentheses to control nesting of dissimilar operators.
These lists do not specify any precedence ordering between the bitwise and shift operators of the second list and the binary operators above conditional expressions in the first list. When they come together, parenthesize them. See Bitwise Operations.
Next: Primitive Data Types, Previous: Binary Operator Grammar, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
10 Order of Execution
The order of execution of a C program is not always obvious, and not necessarily predictable. This chapter describes what you can count on.
- Reordering of Operands
- Associativity and Ordering
- Sequence Points
- Postincrement and Ordering
- Ordering of Operands
- Optimization and Ordering
Next: Associativity and Ordering, Up: Order of Execution [Contents][Index]
10.1 Reordering of Operands
The C language does not necessarily carry out operations within an expression in the order they appear in the code. For instance, in this expression,
foo () + bar ()
foo
might be called first or bar
might be called first.
If foo
updates a datum and bar
uses that datum, the
results can be unpredictable.
The unpredictable order of computation of subexpressions also makes a difference when one of them contains an assignment. We already saw this example of bad code,
x = 20; printf ("%d %d\n", x, x = 4);
in which the second argument, x
, has a different value
depending on whether it is computed before or after the assignment in
the third argument.
Next: Sequence Points, Previous: Reordering of Operands, Up: Order of Execution [Contents][Index]
10.2 Associativity and Ordering
An associative binary operator, such as +
, when used repeatedly
can combine any number of operands. The operands’ values may be
computed in any order.
If the values are integers and overflow can be ignored, they may be
combined in any order. Thus, given four functions that return
unsigned int
, calling them and adding their results as here
(foo () + bar ()) + (baz () + quux ())
may add up the results in any order.
By contrast, arithmetic on signed integers, in which overflow is significant,
is not always associative (see Integer Overflow). Thus, the
additions must be done in the order specified, obeying parentheses and
left-association. That means computing (foo () + bar ())
and
(baz () + quux ())
first (in either order), then adding the
two.
The same applies to arithmetic on floating-point values, since that too is not really associative. However, the GCC option -funsafe-math-optimizations allows the compiler to change the order of calculation when an associative operation (associative in exact mathematics) combines several operands. The option takes effect when compiling a module (see Compilation). Changing the order of association can enable the program to pipeline the floating point operations.
In all these cases, the four function calls can be done in any order. There is no right or wrong about that.
Next: Postincrement and Ordering, Previous: Associativity and Ordering, Up: Order of Execution [Contents][Index]
10.3 Sequence Points
There are some points in the code where C makes limited guarantees about the order of operations. These are called sequence points. Here is where they occur:
- At the end of a full expression; that is to say, an expression that is not part of a larger expression. All side effects specified by that expression are carried out before execution moves on to subsequent code.
- At the end of the first operand of certain operators: ‘,’,
‘&&’, ‘||’, and ‘?:’. All side effects specified by
that expression are carried out before any execution of the
next operand.
The commas that separate arguments in a function call are not comma operators, and they do not create sequence points. The rule for function arguments and the rule for operands are different (see Ordering of Operands).
- Just before calling a function. All side effects specified by the
argument expressions are carried out before calling the function.
If the function to be called is not constant—that is, if it is computed by an expression—all side effects in that expression are carried out before calling the function.
The ordering imposed by a sequence point applies locally to a limited range of code, as stated above in each case. For instance, the ordering imposed by the comma operator does not apply to code outside the operands of that comma operator. Thus, in this code,
(x = 5, foo (x)) + x * x
the sequence point of the comma operator orders x = 5
before
foo (x)
, but x * x
could be computed before or after
them.
Next: Ordering of Operands, Previous: Sequence Points, Up: Order of Execution [Contents][Index]
10.4 Postincrement and Ordering
The ordering requirements for the postincrement and postdecrement operations (see Postincrement and Postdecrement) are loose: those side effects must happen “a little later,” before the next sequence point. That still leaves room for various orders that give different results. In this expression,
z = x++ - foo ()
it’s unpredictable whether x
gets incremented before or after
calling the function foo
. If foo
refers to x
,
it might see the old value or it might see the incremented value.
In this perverse expression,
x = x++
x
will certainly be incremented but the incremented value may
be replaced with the old value. That’s because the incrementation and
the assignment may occur in either oder. If the incrementation of
x
occurs after the assignment to x
, the incremented
value will remain in place. But if the incrementation happens first,
the assignment will put the not-yet-incremented value back into
x
, so the expression as a whole will leave x
unchanged.
The conclusion: avoid such expressions. Take care, when you use postincrement and postdecrement, that the specific expression you use is not ambiguous as to order of execution.
Next: Optimization and Ordering, Previous: Postincrement and Ordering, Up: Order of Execution [Contents][Index]
10.5 Ordering of Operands
Operands and arguments can be computed in any order, but there are limits to this intermixing in GNU C:
- The operands of a binary arithmetic operator can be computed in either order, but they can’t be intermixed: one of them has to come first, followed by the other. Any side effects in the operand that’s computed first are executed before the other operand is computed.
- That applies to assignment operators too, except that, in simple assignment, the previous value of the left operand is unused.
- The arguments in a function call can be computed in any order, but they can’t be intermixed. Thus, one argument is fully computed, then another, and so on until they have all been done. Any side effects in one argument are executed before computation of another argument begins.
These rules don’t cover side effects caused by postincrement and postdecrement operators—those can be deferred up to the next sequence point.
If you want to get pedantic, the fact is that GCC can reorder the
computations in many other ways provided that it doesn’t alter the result
of running the program. However, because it doesn’t alter the result
of running the program, it is negligible, unless you are concerned
with the values in certain variables at various times as seen by other
processes. In those cases, you should use volatile
to prevent
optimizations that would make them behave strangely. See volatile
Variables and Fields.
Previous: Ordering of Operands, Up: Order of Execution [Contents][Index]
10.6 Optimization and Ordering
Sequence points limit the compiler’s freedom to reorder operations arbitrarily, but optimizations can still reorder them if the compiler concludes that this won’t alter the results. Thus, in this code,
x++; y = z; x++;
there is a sequence point after each statement, so the code is
supposed to increment x
once before the assignment to y
and once after. However, incrementing x
has no effect on
y
or z
, and setting y
can’t affect x
, so
the code could be optimized into this:
y = z; x += 2;
Normally that has no effect except to make the program faster. But
there are special situations where it can cause trouble due to things
that the compiler cannot know about, such as shared memory. To limit
optimization in those places, use the volatile
type qualifier
(see volatile
Variables and Fields).
Next: Constants, Previous: Order of Execution, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
11 Primitive Data Types
This chapter describes all the primitive data types of C—that is,
all the data types that aren’t built up from other types. They
include the types int
and double
that we’ve already covered.
These types are all made up of bytes (see Storage and Data).
- Integer Data Types
- Floating-Point Data Types
- Complex Data Types
- The Void Type
- Other Data Types
- Type Designators
Next: Floating-Point Data Types, Up: Primitive Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.1 Integer Data Types
Here we describe all the integer types and their basic characteristics. See Integers in Depth, for more information about the bit-level integer data representations and arithmetic.
- Basic Integers
- Signed and Unsigned Types
- Narrow Integers
- Conversion among Integer Types
- Boolean Type
- Integer Variations
Next: Signed and Unsigned Types, Up: Integer Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.1.1 Basic Integers
Integer data types in C can be signed or unsigned. An unsigned type can represent only positive numbers and zero. A signed type can represent both positive and negative numbers, in a range spread almost equally on both sides of zero.
Aside from signedness, the integer data types vary in size: how many bytes long they are. The size determines the range of integer values the type can hold.
Here’s a list of the signed integer data types, with the sizes they have on most computers. Each has a corresponding unsigned type; see Signed and Unsigned Types.
signed char
One byte (8 bits). This integer type is used mainly for integers that represent characters, usually as elements of arrays or fields of other data structures.
short
short int
Two bytes (16 bits).
int
Four bytes (32 bits).
long
long int
Four bytes (32 bits) or eight bytes (64 bits), depending on the platform. Typically it is 32 bits on 32-bit computers and 64 bits on 64-bit computers, but there are exceptions.
long long
long long int
Eight bytes (64 bits). Supported in GNU C in the 1980s, and incorporated into standard C as of ISO C99.
You can omit int
when you use long
or short
.
This is harmless and customary.
Next: Narrow Integers, Previous: Basic Integers, Up: Integer Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.1.2 Signed and Unsigned Types
An unsigned integer type can represent only positive numbers and zero.
A signed type can represent both positive and negative number, in a
range spread almost equally on both sides of zero. For instance,
unsigned char
holds numbers from 0 to 255 (on most computers),
while signed char
holds numbers from -128 to 127. Each of
these types holds 256 different possible values, since they are both 8
bits wide.
Write signed
or unsigned
before the type keyword to
specify a signed or an unsigned type. However, the integer types
other than char
are signed by default; with them, signed
is a no-op.
Plain char
may be signed or unsigned; this depends on the
compiler, the machine in use, and its operating system.
In many programs, it makes no difference whether char
is
signed. When it does matter, don’t leave it to chance; write
signed char
or unsigned char
.3
Next: Conversion among Integer Types, Previous: Signed and Unsigned Types, Up: Integer Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.1.3 Narrow Integers
The types that are narrower than int
are rarely used for
ordinary variables—we declare them int
instead. This is
because C converts those narrower types to int
for any
arithmetic. There is literally no reason to declare a local variable
char
, for instance.
In particular, if the value is really a character, you should declare
the variable int
. Not char
! Using that narrow type can
force the compiler to truncate values for conversion, which is a
waste. Furthermore, some functions return either a character value,
or -1 for “no character.” Using int
makes it possible
to distinguish -1 from a character by sign.
The narrow integer types are useful as parts of other objects, such as arrays and structures. Compare these array declarations, whose sizes on 32-bit processors are shown:
signed char ac[1000]; /* 1000 bytes */ short as[1000]; /* 2000 bytes */ int ai[1000]; /* 4000 bytes */ long long all[1000]; /* 8000 bytes */
In addition, character strings must be made up of char
s,
because that’s what all the standard library string functions expect.
Thus, array ac
could be used as a character string, but the
others could not be.
Next: Boolean Type, Previous: Narrow Integers, Up: Integer Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.1.4 Conversion among Integer Types
C converts between integer types implicitly in many situations. It
converts the narrow integer types, char
and short
, to
int
whenever they are used in arithmetic. Assigning a new
value to an integer variable (or other lvalue) converts the value to
the variable’s type.
You can also convert one integer type to another explicitly with a cast operator. See Explicit Type Conversion.
The process of conversion to a wider type is straightforward: the value is unchanged. The only exception is when converting a negative value (in a signed type, obviously) to a wider unsigned type. In that case, the result is a positive value with the same bits (see Integers in Depth).
Converting to a narrower type, also called truncation, involves discarding some of the value’s bits. This is not considered overflow (see Integer Overflow) because loss of significant bits is a normal consequence of truncation. Likewise for conversion between signed and unsigned types of the same width.
More information about conversion for assignment is in Assignment Type Conversions. For conversion for arithmetic, see Argument Promotions.
Next: Integer Variations, Previous: Conversion among Integer Types, Up: Integer Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.1.5 Boolean Type
The unsigned integer type bool
holds truth values: its possible
values are 0 and 1. Converting any nonzero value to bool
results in 1. For example:
bool a = 0;
bool b = 1;
bool c = 4; /* Stores the value 1 in c
. */
Unlike int
, bool
is not a keyword. It is defined in
the header file stdbool.h.
Previous: Boolean Type, Up: Integer Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.1.6 Integer Variations
The integer types of C have standard names, but what they mean varies depending on the kind of platform in use: which kind of computer, which operating system, and which compiler. It may even depend on the compiler options used.
Plain char
may be signed or unsigned; this depends on the
platform, too. Even for GNU C, there is no general rule.
In theory, all of the integer types’ sizes can vary. char
is
always considered one “byte” for C, but it is not necessarily an
8-bit byte; on some platforms it may be more than 8 bits. ISO C
specifies only that none of these types is narrower than the ones
above it in the list in Basic Integers, and that short
has at least 16 bits.
It is possible that in the future GNU C will support platforms where
int
is 64 bits long. In practice, however, on today’s real
computers, there is little variation; you can rely on the table
given previously (see Basic Integers).
To be completely sure of the size of an integer type,
use the types int16_t
, int32_t
and int64_t
.
Their corresponding unsigned types add ‘u’ at the front:
uint16_t
, uint32_t
and uint64_t
.
To define all these types, include the header file stdint.h.
The GNU C Compiler can compile for some embedded controllers that use two
bytes for int
. On some, int
is just one “byte,” and
so is short int
—but that “byte” may contain 16 bits or even
32 bits. These processors can’t support an ordinary operating system
(they may have their own specialized operating systems), and most C
programs do not try to support them.
Next: Complex Data Types, Previous: Integer Data Types, Up: Primitive Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.2 Floating-Point Data Types
Floating point is the binary analogue of scientific notation: internally it represents a number as a fraction and a binary exponent; the value is that fraction multiplied by the specified power of 2. (The C standard nominally permits other bases, but in GNU C the base is always 2.)
For instance, to represent 6, the fraction would be 0.75 and the exponent would be 3; together they stand for the value 0.75 * 23, meaning 0.75 * 8. The value 1.5 would use 0.75 as the fraction and 1 as the exponent. The value 0.75 would use 0.75 as the fraction and 0 as the exponent. The value 0.375 would use 0.75 as the fraction and -1 as the exponent.
These binary exponents are used by machine instructions. You can write a floating-point constant this way if you wish, using hexadecimal; but normally we write floating-point numbers in decimal (base 10). See Floating-Point Constants.
C has three floating-point data types:
double
“Double-precision” floating point, which uses 64 bits. This is the normal floating-point type, and modern computers normally do their floating-point computations in this type, or some wider type. Except when there is a special reason to do otherwise, this is the type to use for floating-point values.
float
“Single-precision” floating point, which uses 32 bits. It is useful for floating-point values stored in structures and arrays, to save space when the full precision of
double
is not needed. In addition, single-precision arithmetic is faster on some computers, and occasionally that is useful. But not often—most programs don’t use the typefloat
.C would be cleaner if
float
were the name of the type we use for most floating-point values; however, for historical reasons, that’s not so.long double
“Extended-precision” floating point is either 80-bit or 128-bit precision, depending on the machine in use. On some machines, which have no floating-point format wider than
double
, this is equivalent todouble
.
Floating-point arithmetic raises many subtle issues. See Floating Point in Depth, for more information.
Next: The Void Type, Previous: Floating-Point Data Types, Up: Primitive Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.3 Complex Data Types
Complex numbers can include both a real part and an imaginary part. The numeric constants covered above have real-numbered values. An imaginary-valued constant is an ordinary real-valued constant followed by ‘i’.
To declare numeric variables as complex, use the _Complex
keyword.4 The
standard C complex data types are floating point,
_Complex float foo; _Complex double bar; _Complex long double quux;
but GNU C supports integer complex types as well.
Since _Complex
is a keyword just like float
and
double
and long
, the keywords can appear in any order,
but the order shown above seems most logical.
GNU C supports constants for complex values; for instance, 4.0 +
3.0i
has the value 4 + 3i as type _Complex double
.
See Imaginary Constants.
To pull the real and imaginary parts of the number back out, GNU C
provides the keywords __real__
and __imag__
:
_Complex double foo = 4.0 + 3.0i; double a = __real__ foo; /*a
is now 4.0. */ double b = __imag__ foo; /*b
is now 3.0. */
Standard C does not include these keywords, and instead relies on
functions defined in complex.h
for accessing the real and
imaginary parts of a complex number: crealf
, creal
, and
creall
extract the real part of a float, double, or long double
complex number, respectively; cimagf
, cimag
, and
cimagl
extract the imaginary part.
GNU C also defines ‘~’ as an operator for complex conjugation, which means negating the imaginary part of a complex number:
_Complex double foo = 4.0 + 3.0i;
_Complex double bar = ~foo; /* bar
is now 4 - 3i. */
For standard C compatibility, you can use the appropriate library
function: conjf
, conj
, or confl
.
Next: Other Data Types, Previous: Complex Data Types, Up: Primitive Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.4 The Void Type
The data type void
is a dummy—it allows no operations. It
really means “no value at all.” When a function is meant to return
no value, we write void
for its return type. Then
return
statements in that function should not specify a value
(see return
Statement). Here’s an example:
void print_if_positive (double x, double y) { if (x <= 0) return; if (y <= 0) return; printf ("Next point is (%f,%f)\n", x, y); }
A void
-returning function is comparable to what some other
languages (for instance, Fortran and Pascal) call a “procedure”
instead of a “function.”
Next: Type Designators, Previous: The Void Type, Up: Primitive Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.5 Other Data Types
Beyond the primitive types, C provides several ways to construct new data types. For instance, you can define pointers, values that represent the addresses of other data (see Pointers). You can define structures, as in many other languages (see Structures), and unions, which define multiple ways to interpret the contents of the same memory space (see Unions). Enumerations are collections of named integer codes (see Enumeration Types).
Array types in C are used for allocating space for objects, but C does not permit operating on an array value as a whole. See Arrays.
Previous: Other Data Types, Up: Primitive Data Types [Contents][Index]
11.6 Type Designators
Some C constructs require a way to designate a specific data type
independent of any particular variable or expression which has that
type. The way to do this is with a type designator. The
constructs that need one include casts (see Explicit Type Conversion) and sizeof
(see Type Size).
We also use type designators to talk about the type of a value in C,
so you will see many type designators in this manual. When we say,
“The value has type int
,” int
is a type designator.
To make the designator for any type, imagine a variable declaration for a variable of that type and delete the variable name and the final semicolon.
For example, to designate the type of full-word integers, we start
with the declaration for a variable foo
with that type,
which is this:
int foo;
Then we delete the variable name foo
and the semicolon, leaving
int
—exactly the keyword used in such a declaration.
Therefore, the type designator for this type is int
.
What about long unsigned integers? From the declaration
unsigned long int foo;
we determine that the designator is unsigned long int
.
Following this procedure, the designator for any primitive type is simply the set of keywords which specifies that type in a declaration. The same is true for compound types such as structures, unions, and enumerations.
Designators for pointer types do follow the rule of deleting the variable name and semicolon, but the result is not so simple. See Pointer-Type Designators, as part of the chapter about pointers. See Array Type Designators), for designators for array types.
To understand what type a designator stands for, imagine a variable name inserted into the right place in the designator to make a valid declaration. What type would that variable be declared as? That is the type the designator designates.
Next: Type Size, Previous: Primitive Data Types, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
12 Constants
A constant is an expression that stands for a specific value by explicitly representing the desired value. C allows constants for numbers, characters, and strings. We have already seen numeric and string constants in the examples.
- Integer Constants
- Integer Constant Data Types
- Floating-Point Constants
- Imaginary Constants
- Invalid Numbers
- Character Constants
- String Constants
- UTF-8 String Constants
- Unicode Character Codes
- Wide Character Constants
- Wide String Constants
Next: Integer Constant Data Types, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.1 Integer Constants
An integer constant consists of a number to specify the value, followed optionally by suffix letters to specify the data type.
The simplest integer constants are numbers written in base 10
(decimal), such as 5
, 77
, and 403
. A decimal
constant cannot start with the character ‘0’ (zero) because
that makes the constant octal.
You can get the effect of a negative integer constant by putting a minus sign at the beginning. In grammatical terms, that is an arithmetic expression rather than a constant, but it behaves just like a true constant.
Integer constants can also be written in octal (base 8), hexadecimal (base 16), or binary (base 2). An octal constant starts with the character ‘0’ (zero), followed by any number of octal digits (‘0’ to ‘7’):
0 // zero 077 // 63 0403 // 259
Pedantically speaking, the constant 0
is an octal constant, but
we can think of it as decimal; it has the same value either way.
A hexadecimal constant starts with ‘0x’ (upper or lower case) followed by hex digits (‘0’ to ‘9’, as well as ‘a’ through ‘f’ in upper or lower case):
0xff // 255 0XA0 // 160 0xffFF // 65535
A binary constant starts with ‘0b’ (upper or lower case) followed by bits (each represented by the characters ‘0’ or ‘1’):
0b101 // 5
Binary constants are a GNU C extension, not part of the C standard.
Sometimes a space is needed after an integer constant to avoid lexical confusion with the following tokens. See Invalid Numbers.
Next: Floating-Point Constants, Previous: Integer Constants, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.2 Integer Constant Data Types
The type of an integer constant is normally int
, if the value
fits in that type, but here are the complete rules. The type
of an integer constant is the first one in this sequence that can
properly represent the value,
int
unsigned int
long int
unsigned long int
long long int
unsigned long long int
and that isn’t excluded by the following rules.
If the constant has ‘l’ or ‘L’ as a suffix, that excludes the
first two types (non-long
).
If the constant has ‘ll’ or ‘LL’ as a suffix, that excludes
first four types (non-long long
).
If the constant has ‘u’ or ‘U’ as a suffix, that excludes the signed types.
Otherwise, if the constant is decimal (not binary, octal, or hexadecimal), that excludes the unsigned types.
Here are some examples of the suffixes.
3000000000u // three billion asunsigned int
. 0LL // zero as along long int
. 0403l // 259 as along int
.
Suffixes in integer constants are rarely used. When the precise type is important, it is cleaner to convert explicitly (see Explicit Type Conversion).
See Integer Data Types.
Next: Imaginary Constants, Previous: Integer Constant Data Types, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.3 Floating-Point Constants
A floating-point constant must have either a decimal point, an exponent-of-ten, or both; they distinguish it from an integer constant.
To indicate an exponent, write ‘e’ or ‘E’. The exponent value follows. It is always written as a decimal number; it can optionally start with a sign. The exponent n means to multiply the constant’s value by ten to the nth power.
Thus, ‘1500.0’, ‘15e2’, ‘15e+2’, ‘15.0e2’, ‘1.5e+3’, ‘.15e4’, and ‘15000e-1’ are six ways of writing a floating-point number whose value is 1500. They are all equivalent in principle.
Here are more examples with decimal points:
1.0 1000. 3.14159 .05 .0005
For each of them, here are some equivalent constants written with exponents:
1e0, 1.0000e0 100e1, 100e+1, 100E+1, 1e3, 10000e-1 3.14159e0 5e-2, .0005e+2, 5E-2, .0005E2 .05e-2
A floating-point constant normally has type double
. You can
force it to type float
by adding ‘f’ or ‘F’
at the end. For example,
3.14159f 3.14159e0f 1000.f 100E1F .0005f .05e-2f
Likewise, ‘l’ or ‘L’ at the end forces the constant
to type long double
.
You can use exponents in hexadecimal floating constants, but since ‘e’ would be interpreted as a hexadecimal digit, the character ‘p’ or ‘P’ (for “power”) indicates an exponent.
The exponent in a hexadecimal floating constant is an optionally signed decimal integer that specifies a power of 2 (not 10 or 16) to multiply into the number.
Here are some examples:
0xAp2 // 40 in decimal 0xAp-1 // 5 in decimal 0x2.0Bp4 // 32.6875 decimal 0xE.2p3 // 113 decimal 0x123.ABCp0 // 291.6708984375 in decimal 0x123.ABCp4 // 4666.734375 in decimal 0x100p-8 // 1 0x10p-4 // 1 0x1p+4 // 16 0x1p+8 // 256
See Floating-Point Data Types.
Next: Invalid Numbers, Previous: Floating-Point Constants, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.4 Imaginary Constants
A complex number consists of a real part plus an imaginary part. (You may omit one part if it is zero.) This section explains how to write numeric constants with imaginary values. By adding these to ordinary real-valued numeric constants, we can make constants with complex values.
The simple way to write an imaginary-number constant is to attach the
suffix ‘i’ or ‘I’, or ‘j’ or ‘J’, to an integer or
floating-point constant. For example, 2.5fi
has type
_Complex float
and 3i
has type _Complex int
.
The four alternative suffix letters are all equivalent.
The other way to write an imaginary constant is to multiply a real
constant by _Complex_I
, which represents the imaginary number
i. Standard C doesn’t support suffixing with ‘i’ or ‘j’, so
this clunky method is needed.
To write a complex constant with a nonzero real part and a nonzero imaginary part, write the two separately and add them, like this:
4.0 + 3.0i
That gives the value 4 + 3i, with type _Complex double
.
Such a sum can include multiple real constants, or none. Likewise, it can include multiple imaginary constants, or none. For example:
_Complex double foo, bar, quux; foo = 2.0i + 4.0 + 3.0i; /* Imaginary part is 5.0. */ bar = 4.0 + 12.0; /* Imaginary part is 0.0. */ quux = 3.0i + 15.0i; /* Real part is 0.0. */
See Complex Data Types.
Next: Character Constants, Previous: Imaginary Constants, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.5 Invalid Numbers
Some number-like constructs which are not really valid as numeric constants are treated as numbers in preprocessing directives. If these constructs appear outside of preprocessing, they are erroneous. See Preprocessing Tokens.
Sometimes we need to insert spaces to separate tokens so that they
won’t be combined into a single number-like construct. For example,
0xE+12
is a preprocessing number that is not a valid numeric
constant, so it is a syntax error. If what we want is the three
tokens 0xE + 12
, we have to insert two spaces as separators.
Next: String Constants, Previous: Invalid Numbers, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.6 Character Constants
A character constant is written with single quotes, as in
'c'
. In the simplest case, c is a single ASCII
character that the constant should represent. The constant has type
int
, and its value is the character code of that character.
For instance, 'a'
represents the character code for the letter
‘a’: 97, that is.
To put the ‘'’ character (single quote) in the character
constant, escape it with a backslash (‘\’). This character
constant looks like '\''
. The backslash character here
functions as an escape character, and such a sequence,
starting with ‘\’, is called an escape sequence.
To put the ‘\’ character (backslash) in the character constant,
escape it with ‘\’ (another backslash). This character
constant looks like '\\'
.
Here are all the escape sequences that represent specific characters in a character constant. The numeric values shown are the corresponding ASCII character codes, as decimal numbers.
'\a' ⇒ 7 /* alarm, CTRL-g */ '\b' ⇒ 8 /* backspace, BS, CTRL-h */ '\t' ⇒ 9 /* tab, TAB, CTRL-i */ '\n' ⇒ 10 /* newline, CTRL-j */ '\v' ⇒ 11 /* vertical tab, CTRL-k */ '\f' ⇒ 12 /* formfeed, CTRL-l */ '\r' ⇒ 13 /* carriage return, RET, CTRL-m */ '\e' ⇒ 27 /* escape character, ESC, CTRL-[ */ '\\' ⇒ 92 /* backslash character, \ */ '\'' ⇒ 39 /* single quote character, ' */ '\"' ⇒ 34 /* double quote character, " */ '\?' ⇒ 63 /* question mark, ? */
‘\e’ is a GNU C extension; to stick to standard C, write
‘\33’. (The number after ‘backslash’ is octal.) To specify
a character constant using decimal, use a cast; for instance,
(unsigned char) 27
.
You can also write octal and hex character codes as ‘\octalcode’ or ‘\xhexcode’. Decimal is not an option here, so octal codes do not need to start with ‘0’.
The character constant’s value has type int
. However, the
character code is treated initially as a char
value, which is
then converted to int
. If the character code is greater than
127 (0177
in octal), the resulting int
may be negative
on a platform where the type char
is 8 bits long and signed.
Next: UTF-8 String Constants, Previous: Character Constants, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.7 String Constants
A string constant represents a series of characters. It starts with ‘"’ and ends with ‘"’; in between are the contents of the string. Quoting special characters such as ‘"’, ‘\’ and newline in the contents works in string constants as in character constants. In a string constant, ‘'’ does not need to be quoted.
A string constant defines an array of characters which contains the specified characters followed by the null character (code 0). Using the string constant is equivalent to using the name of an array with those contents. In simple cases, where there are no backslash escape sequences, the length in bytes of the string constant is one greater than the number of characters written in it.
As with any array in C, using the string constant in an expression
converts the array to a pointer (see Pointers) to the array’s
zeroth element (see Accessing Array Elements). This pointer will
have type char *
because it points to an element of type
char
. char *
is an example of a type designator for a
pointer type (see Pointer-Type Designators). That type is used
for strings generally, not just the strings expressed as constants
in a program.
Thus, the string constant "Foo!"
is almost
equivalent to declaring an array like this
char string_array_1[] = {'F', 'o', 'o', '!', '\0' };
and then using string_array_1
in the program. There
are two differences, however:
- The string constant doesn’t define a name for the array.
- The string constant is probably stored in a read-only area of memory.
Newlines are not allowed in the text of a string constant. The motive for this prohibition is to catch the error of omitting the closing ‘"’. To put a newline in a constant string, write it as ‘\n’ in the string constant.
A real null character in the source code inside a string constant causes a warning. To put a null character in the middle of a string constant, write ‘\0’ or ‘\000’.
Consecutive string constants are effectively concatenated. Thus,
"Fo" "o!" is equivalent to "Foo!"
This is useful for writing a string containing multiple lines, like this:
"This message is so long that it needs more than\n" "a single line of text. C does not allow a newline\n" "to represent itself in a string constant, so we have to\n" "write \\n to put it in the string. For readability of\n" "the source code, it is advisable to put line breaks in\n" "the source where they occur in the contents of the\n" "constant.\n"
The sequence of a backslash and a newline is ignored anywhere in a C program, and that includes inside a string constant. Thus, you can write multi-line string constants this way:
"This is another way to put newlines in a string constant\n\ and break the line after them in the source code."
However, concatenation is the recommended way to do this.
You can also write perverse string constants like this,
"Fo\ o!"
but don’t do that—write it like this instead:
"Foo!"
Be careful to avoid passing a string constant to a function that
modifies the string it receives. The memory where the string constant
is stored may be read-only, which would cause a fatal SIGSEGV
signal that normally terminates the function (see Signals. Even
worse, the memory may not be read-only. Then the function might
modify the string constant, thus spoiling the contents of other string
constants that are supposed to contain the same value and are unified
by the compiler.
Next: Unicode Character Codes, Previous: String Constants, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.8 UTF-8 String Constants
Writing ‘u8’ immediately before a string constant, with no intervening space, means to represent that string in UTF-8 encoding as a sequence of bytes. UTF-8 represents ASCII characters with a single byte, and represents non-ASCII Unicode characters (codes 128 and up) as multibyte sequences. Here is an example of a UTF-8 constant:
u8"A cónstàñt"
This constant occupies 13 bytes plus the terminating null, because each of the accented letters is a two-byte sequence.
Concatenating an ordinary string with a UTF-8 string conceptually produces another UTF-8 string. However, if the ordinary string contains character codes 128 and up, the results cannot be relied on.
Next: Wide Character Constants, Previous: UTF-8 String Constants, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.9 Unicode Character Codes
You can specify Unicode characters, for individual character constants or as part of string constants (see String Constants), using escape sequences; and even in C identifiers. Use the ‘\u’ escape sequence with a 16-bit hexadecimal Unicode character code. If the code value is too big for 16 bits, use the ‘\U’ escape sequence with a 32-bit hexadecimal Unicode character code. (These codes are called universal character names.) For example,
\u6C34 /* 16-bit code (UTF-16) */ \U0010ABCD /* 32-bit code (UTF-32) */
One way to use these is in UTF-8 string constants (see UTF-8 String Constants). For instance,
u8"fóó \u6C34 \U0010ABCD"
You can also use them in wide character constants (see Wide Character Constants), like this:
u'\u6C34' /* 16-bit code */ U'\U0010ABCD' /* 32-bit code */
and in wide string constants (see Wide String Constants), like this:
u"\u6C34\u6C33" /* 16-bit code */ U"\U0010ABCD" /* 32-bit code */
And in an identifier:
int foo\u6C34bar = 0;
Codes in the range of D800
through DFFF
are not valid
in Unicode. Codes less than 00A0
are also forbidden, except for
0024
, 0040
, and 0060
; these characters are
actually ASCII control characters, and you can specify them with other
escape sequences (see Character Constants).
Next: Wide String Constants, Previous: Unicode Character Codes, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.10 Wide Character Constants
A wide character constant represents characters with more than 8 bits of character code. This is an obscure feature that we need to document but that you probably won’t ever use. If you’re just learning C, you may as well skip this section.
The original C wide character constant looks like ‘L’ (upper
case!) followed immediately by an ordinary character constant (with no
intervening space). Its data type is wchar_t
, which is an
alias defined in stddef.h for one of the standard integer
types. Depending on the platform, it could be 16 bits or 32 bits. If
it is 16 bits, these character constants use the UTF-16 form of
Unicode; if 32 bits, UTF-32.
There are also Unicode wide character constants which explicitly
specify the width. These constants start with ‘u’ or ‘U’
instead of ‘L’. ‘u’ specifies a 16-bit Unicode wide
character constant, and ‘U’ a 32-bit Unicode wide character
constant. Their types are, respectively, char16_t
and
char32_t
; they are declared in the header file
uchar.h. These character constants are valid even if
uchar.h is not included, but some uses of them may be
inconvenient without including it to declare those type names.
The character represented in a wide character constant can be an
ordinary ASCII character. L'a'
, u'a'
and U'a'
are all valid, and they are all equal to 'a'
.
In all three kinds of wide character constants, you can write a non-ASCII Unicode character in the constant itself; the constant’s value is the character’s Unicode character code. Or you can specify the Unicode character with an escape sequence (see Unicode Character Codes).
Previous: Wide Character Constants, Up: Constants [Contents][Index]
12.11 Wide String Constants
A wide string constant stands for an array of 16-bit or 32-bit characters. They are rarely used; if you’re just learning C, you may as well skip this section.
There are three kinds of wide string constants, which differ in the data type used for each character in the string. Each wide string constant is equivalent to an array of integers, but the data type of those integers depends on the kind of wide string. Using the constant in an expression will convert the array to a pointer to its zeroth element, as usual for arrays in C (see Accessing Array Elements). For each kind of wide string constant, we state here what type that pointer will be.
char16_t
This is a 16-bit Unicode wide string constant: each element is a 16-bit Unicode character code with type
char16_t
, so the string has the pointer typechar16_t *
. (That is a type designator; see Pointer-Type Designators.) The constant is written as ‘u’ (which must be lower case) followed (with no intervening space) by a string constant with the usual syntax.char32_t
This is a 32-bit Unicode wide string constant: each element is a 32-bit Unicode character code, and the string has type
char32_t *
. It’s written as ‘U’ (which must be upper case) followed (with no intervening space) by a string constant with the usual syntax.wchar_t
This is the original kind of wide string constant. It’s written as ‘L’ (which must be upper case) followed (with no intervening space) by a string constant with the usual syntax, and the string has type
wchar_t *
.The width of the data type
wchar_t
depends on the target platform, which makes this kind of wide string somewhat less useful than the newer kinds.
char16_t
and char32_t
are declared in the header file
uchar.h. wchar_t
is declared in stddef.h.
Consecutive wide string constants of the same kind concatenate, just like ordinary string constants. A wide string constant concatenated with an ordinary string constant results in a wide string constant. You can’t concatenate two wide string constants of different kinds. In addition, you can’t concatenate a wide string constant (of any kind) with a UTF-8 string constant.
Next: Pointers, Previous: Constants, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
13 Type Size
Each data type has a size, which is the number of bytes
(see Storage and Data) that it occupies in memory. To refer to the size in
a C program, use sizeof
. There are two ways to use it:
sizeof expression
This gives the size of expression, based on its data type. It does not calculate the value of expression, only its size, so if expression includes side effects or function calls, they do not happen. Therefore,
sizeof
is always a compile-time operation that has zero run-time cost.A value that is a bit field (see Bit Fields) is not allowed as an operand of
sizeof
.For example,
double a; i = sizeof a + 10;
sets
i
to 18 on most computers becausea
occupies 8 bytes.Here’s how to determine the number of elements in an array
array
:(sizeof array / sizeof array[0])
The expression
sizeof array
gives the size of the array, not the size of a pointer to an element. However, if expression is a function parameter that was declared as an array, that variable really has a pointer type (see Array parameters are pointers), so the result is the size of that pointer.sizeof (type)
This gives the size of type. For example,
i = sizeof (double) + 10;
is equivalent to the previous example.
You can’t apply
sizeof
to an incomplete type (see Incomplete Types), norvoid
. Using it on a function type gives 1 in GNU C, which makes adding an integer to a function pointer work as desired (see Pointer Arithmetic).
Warning: When you use sizeof
with a type
instead of an expression, you must write parentheses around the type.
Warning: When applying sizeof
to the result of a cast
(see Explicit Type Conversion), you must write parentheses around
the cast expression to avoid an ambiguity in the grammar of C.
Specifically,
sizeof (int) -x
parses as
(sizeof (int)) - x
If what you want is
sizeof ((int) -x)
you must write it that way, with parentheses.
The data type of the value of the sizeof
operator is always one
of the unsigned integer types; which one of those types depends on the
machine. The header file stddef.h
defines the typedef name
size_t
as an alias for this type. See Defining Typedef Names.
Next: Structures, Previous: Type Size, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
14 Pointers
Among high-level languages, C is rather low-level, close to the machine. This is mainly because it has explicit pointers. A pointer value is the numeric address of data in memory. The type of data to be found at that address is specified by the data type of the pointer itself. Nothing in C can determine the “correct” data type of data in memory; it can only blindly follow the data type of the pointer you use to access the data.
The unary operator ‘*’ gets the data that a pointer points to—this is called dereferencing the pointer. Its value always has the type that the pointer points to.
C also allows pointers to functions, but since there are some differences in how they work, we treat them later. See Function Pointers.
- Address of Data
- Pointer Types
- Pointer-Variable Declarations
- Pointer-Type Designators
- Dereferencing Pointers
- Null Pointers
- Dereferencing Null or Invalid Pointers
- Void Pointers
- Pointer Comparison
- Pointer Arithmetic
- Pointers and Arrays
- Pointer Arithmetic at Low-Level
- Pointer Increment and Decrement
- Drawbacks of Pointer Arithmetic
- Pointer-Integer Conversion
- Printing Pointers
Next: Pointer Types, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.1 Address of Data
The most basic way to make a pointer is with the “address-of” operator, ‘&’. Let’s suppose we have these variables available:
int i; double a[5];
Now, &i
gives the address of the variable i
—a pointer
value that points to i
’s location—and &a[3]
gives the
address of the element 3 of a
. (By the usual 1-origin
numbering convention of ordinary English, it is actually the fourth
element in the array, since the element at the start has index 0.)
The address-of operator is unusual because it operates on a place to store a value (an lvalue, see Lvalues), not on the value currently stored there. (The left argument of a simple assignment is unusual in the same way.) You can use it on any lvalue except a bit field (see Bit Fields) or a constructor (see Structure Constructors).
Next: Pointer-Variable Declarations, Previous: Address of Data, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.2 Pointer Types
For each data type t, there is a type for pointers to type t. For these variables,
int i; double a[5];
i
has typeint
; we say&i
is a “pointer toint
.”a
has typedouble[5]
; we say&a
is a “pointer to arrays of fivedouble
s.”a[3]
has typedouble
; we say&a[3]
is a “pointer todouble
.”
Next: Pointer-Type Designators, Previous: Pointer Types, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.3 Pointer-Variable Declarations
The way to declare that a variable foo
points to type t is
t *foo;
To remember this syntax, think “if you dereference foo
, using
the ‘*’ operator, what you get is type t. Thus, foo
points to type t.”
Thus, we can declare variables that hold pointers to these three types, like this:
int *ptri; /* Pointer toint
. */ double *ptrd; /* Pointer todouble
. */ double (*ptrda)[5]; /* Pointer todouble[5]
. */
‘int *ptri;’ means, “if you dereference ptri
, you get an
int
.” ‘double (*ptrda)[5];’ means, “if you dereference
ptrda
, then subscript it by an integer less than 5, you get a
double
.” The parentheses express the point that you would
dereference it first, then subscript it.
Contrast the last one with this:
double *aptrd[5]; /* Array of five pointers to double
. */
Because ‘*’ has lower syntactic precedence than subscripting,
‘double *aptrd[5]’ means, “if you subscript aptrd
by an
integer less than 5, then dereference it, you get a double
.”
Therefore, *aptrd[5]
declares an array of pointers, not a
pointer to an array.
Next: Dereferencing Pointers, Previous: Pointer-Variable Declarations, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.4 Pointer-Type Designators
Every type in C has a designator; you make it by deleting the variable name and the semicolon from a declaration (see Type Designators). Here are the designators for the pointer types of the example declarations in the previous section:
int * /* Pointer toint
. */ double * /* Pointer todouble
. */ double (*)[5] /* Pointer todouble[5]
. */
Remember, to understand what type a designator stands for, imagine the
corresponding variable declaration with a variable name in it, and
figure out what type that variable would have. Thus, the type
designator double (*)[5]
corresponds to the variable declaration
double (*variable)[5]
. That deciares a pointer variable
which, when dereferenced, gives an array of 5 double
s.
So the type designator means, “pointer to an array of 5 double
s.”
Next: Null Pointers, Previous: Pointer-Type Designators, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.5 Dereferencing Pointers
The main use of a pointer value is to dereference it (access the
data it points at) with the unary ‘*’ operator. For instance,
*&i
is the value at i
’s address—which is just
i
. The two expressions are equivalent, provided &i
is
valid.
A pointer-dereference expression whose type is data (not a function) is an lvalue.
Pointers become really useful when we store them somewhere and use them later. Here’s a simple example to illustrate the practice:
{
int i;
int *ptr;
ptr = &i;
i = 5;
…
return *ptr; /* Returns 5, fetched from i
. */
}
This shows how to declare the variable ptr
as type
int *
(pointer to int
), store a pointer value into it
(pointing at i
), and use it later to get the value of the
object it points at (the value in i
).
If anyone can provide a useful example which is this basic, I would be grateful.
Next: Dereferencing Null or Invalid Pointers, Previous: Dereferencing Pointers, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.6 Null Pointers
A pointer value can be null, which means it does not point to
any object. The cleanest way to get a null pointer is by writing
NULL
, a standard macro defined in stddef.h. You can
also do it by casting 0 to the desired pointer type, as in
(char *) 0
. (The cast operator performs explicit type conversion;
See Explicit Type Conversion.)
You can store a null pointer in any lvalue whose data type is a pointer type:
char *foo; foo = NULL;
These two, if consecutive, can be combined into a declaration with initializer,
char *foo = NULL;
You can also explicitly cast NULL
to the specific pointer type
you want—it makes no difference.
char *foo; foo = (char *) NULL;
To test whether a pointer is null, compare it with zero or
NULL
, as shown here:
if (p != NULL)
/* p
is not null. */
operate (p);
Since testing a pointer for not being null is basic and frequent, all
but beginners in C will understand the conditional without need for
!= NULL
:
if (p)
/* p
is not null. */
operate (p);
Next: Void Pointers, Previous: Null Pointers, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.7 Dereferencing Null or Invalid Pointers
Trying to dereference a null pointer is an error. On most platforms,
it generally causes a signal, usually SIGSEGV
(see Signals).
char *foo = NULL;
c = *foo; /* This causes a signal and terminates. */
Likewise a pointer that has the wrong alignment for the target data type (on most types of computer), or points to a part of memory that has not been allocated in the process’s address space.
The signal terminates the program, unless the program has arranged to handle the signal (see The GNU C Library in The GNU C Library Reference Manual).
However, the signal might not happen if the dereference is optimized
away. In the example above, if you don’t subsequently use the value
of c
, GCC might optimize away the code for *foo
. You
can prevent such optimization using the volatile
qualifier, as
shown here:
volatile char *p; volatile char c; c = *p;
You can use this to test whether p
points to unallocated
memory. Set up a signal handler first, so the signal won’t terminate
the program.
Next: Pointer Comparison, Previous: Dereferencing Null or Invalid Pointers, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.8 Void Pointers
The peculiar type void *
, a pointer whose target type is
void
, is used often in C. It represents a pointer to
we-don’t-say-what. Thus,
void *numbered_slot_pointer (int);
declares a function numbered_slot_pointer
that takes an
integer parameter and returns a pointer, but we don’t say what type of
data it points to.
The functions for dynamic memory allocation (see Dynamic Memory Allocation) use type void *
to refer to blocks of memory,
regardless of what sort of data the program stores in those blocks.
With type void *
, you can pass the pointer around and test
whether it is null. However, dereferencing it gives a void
value that can’t be used (see The Void Type). To dereference the
pointer, first convert it to some other pointer type.
Assignments convert void *
automatically to any other pointer
type, if the left operand has a pointer type; for instance,
{
int *p;
/* Converts return value to int *
. */
p = numbered_slot_pointer (5);
…
}
Passing an argument of type void *
for a parameter that has a
pointer type also converts. For example, supposing the function
hack
is declared to require type float *
for its
argument, this will convert the null pointer to that type.
/* Declarehack
that way. We assume it is defined somewhere else. */ void hack (float *); … /* Now callhack
. */ { /* Converts return value ofnumbered_slot_pointer
tofloat *
to pass it tohack
. */ hack (numbered_slot_pointer (5)); … }
You can also convert to another pointer type with an explicit cast (see Explicit Type Conversion), like this:
(int *) numbered_slot_pointer (5)
Here is an example which decides at run time which pointer type to convert to:
void extract_int_or_double (void *ptr, bool its_an_int) { if (its_an_int) handle_an_int (*(int *)ptr); else handle_a_double (*(double *)ptr); }
The expression *(int *)ptr
means to convert ptr
to type int *
, then dereference it.
Next: Pointer Arithmetic, Previous: Void Pointers, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.9 Pointer Comparison
Two pointer values are equal if they point to the same location, or if
they are both null. You can test for this with ==
and
!=
. Here’s a trivial example:
{ int i; int *p, *q; p = &i; q = &i; if (p == q) printf ("This will be printed.\n"); if (p != q) printf ("This won't be printed.\n"); }
Ordering comparisons such as >
and >=
operate on
pointers by converting them to unsigned integers. The C standard says
the two pointers must point within the same object in memory, but on
GNU/Linux systems these operations simply compare the numeric values
of the pointers.
The pointer values to be compared should in principle have the same type, but they are allowed to differ in limited cases. First of all, if the two pointers’ target types are nearly compatible (see Compatible Types), the comparison is allowed.
If one of the operands is void *
(see Void Pointers) and
the other is another pointer type, the comparison operator converts
the void *
pointer to the other type so as to compare them.
(In standard C, this is not allowed if the other type is a function
pointer type, but it works in GNU C.)
Comparison operators also allow comparing the integer 0 with a pointer value. This works by converting 0 to a null pointer of the same type as the other operand.
Next: Pointers and Arrays, Previous: Pointer Comparison, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.10 Pointer Arithmetic
Adding an integer (positive or negative) to a pointer is valid in C. It assumes that the pointer points to an element in an array, and advances or retracts the pointer across as many array elements as the integer specifies. Here is an example, in which adding a positive integer advances the pointer to a later element in the same array.
void incrementing_pointers () { int array[5] = { 45, 29, 104, -3, 123456 }; int elt0, elt1, elt4; int *p = &array[0]; /* Nowp
points at element 0. Fetch it. */ elt0 = *p; ++p; /* Nowp
points at element 1. Fetch it. */ elt1 = *p; p += 3; /* Nowp
points at element 4 (the last). Fetch it. */ elt4 = *p; printf ("elt0 %d elt1 %d elt4 %d.\n", elt0, elt1, elt4); /* Prints elt0 45 elt1 29 elt4 123456. */ }
Here’s an example where adding a negative integer retracts the pointer to an earlier element in the same array.
void decrementing_pointers () { int array[5] = { 45, 29, 104, -3, 123456 }; int elt0, elt3, elt4; int *p = &array[4]; /* Nowp
points at element 4 (the last). Fetch it. */ elt4 = *p; --p; /* Nowp
points at element 3. Fetch it. */ elt3 = *p; p -= 3; /* Nowp
points at element 0. Fetch it. */ elt0 = *p; printf ("elt0 %d elt3 %d elt4 %d.\n", elt0, elt3, elt4); /* Prints elt0 45 elt3 -3 elt4 123456. */ }
If one pointer value was made by adding an integer to another pointer value, it should be possible to subtract the pointer values and recover that integer. That works too in C.
void subtract_pointers () { int array[5] = { 45, 29, 104, -3, 123456 }; int *p0, *p3, *p4; int *p = &array[4]; /* Nowp
points at element 4 (the last). Save the value. */ p4 = p; --p; /* Nowp
points at element 3. Save the value. */ p3 = p; p -= 3; /* Nowp
points at element 0. Save the value. */ p0 = p; printf ("%d, %d, %d, %d\n", p4 - p0, p0 - p0, p3 - p0, p0 - p3); /* Prints 4, 0, 3, -3. */ }
The addition operation does not know where arrays begin or end in memory. All it does is add the integer (multiplied by target object size) to the numeric value of the pointer. When the initial pointer and the result point into the same array, the result is well-defined.
Warning: Only experts should do pointer arithmetic involving pointers into different memory objects.
The difference between two pointers has type int
, or
long
if necessary (see Integer Data Types). The clean way to
declare it is to use the typedef name ptrdiff_t
defined in the
file stddef.h.
C defines pointer subtraction to be consistent with pointer-integer
addition, so that (p3 - p1) + p1
equals p3
, as in
ordinary algebra. Pointer subtraction works by subtracting
p1
’s numeric value from p3
’s, and dividing by target
object size. The two pointer arguments should point into the same
array.
In standard C, addition and subtraction are not allowed on void
*
, since the target type’s size is not defined in that case.
Likewise, they are not allowed on pointers to function types.
However, these operations work in GNU C, and the “size of the target
type” is taken as 1 byte.
Next: Pointer Arithmetic at Low-Level, Previous: Pointer Arithmetic, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.11 Pointers and Arrays
The clean way to refer to an array element is
array[index]
. Another, complicated way to do the
same job is to get the address of that element as a pointer, then
dereference it: * (&array[0] + index)
(or
equivalently * (array + index)
). This first gets a
pointer to element zero, then increments it with +
to point to
the desired element, then gets the value from there.
That pointer-arithmetic construct is the definition of square
brackets in C. a[b]
means, by definition,
*(a + b)
. This definition uses a and b
symmetrically, so one must be a pointer and the other an integer; it
does not matter which comes first.
Since indexing with square brackets is defined in terms of addition
and dereferencing, that too is symmetrical. Thus, you can write
3[array]
and it is equivalent to array[3]
. However, it
would be foolish to write 3[array]
, since it has no advantage
and could confuse people who read the code.
It may seem like a discrepancy that the definition *(a +
b)
requires a pointer, while array[3]
uses an array value
instead. Why is this valid? The name of the array, when used by
itself as an expression (other than in sizeof
), stands for a
pointer to the array’s zeroth element. Thus, array + 3
converts array
implicitly to &array[0]
, and the result
is a pointer to element 3, equivalent to &array[3]
.
Since square brackets are defined in terms of such an addition,
array[3]
first converts array
to a pointer. That’s why
it works to use an array directly in that construct.
Next: Pointer Increment and Decrement, Previous: Pointers and Arrays, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.12 Pointer Arithmetic at Low-Level
The behavior of pointer arithmetic is theoretically defined only when the pointer values all point within one object allocated in memory. But the addition and subtraction operators can’t tell whether the pointer values are all within one object. They don’t know where objects start and end. So what do they really do?
Adding pointer p to integer i treats p as a memory
address, which is in fact an integer—call it pint. It treats
i as a number of elements of the type that p points to.
These elements’ sizes add up to i * sizeof (*p)
.
So the sum, as an integer, is pint + i * sizeof
(*p)
. This value is reinterpreted as a pointer of the same
type as p.
If the starting pointer value p and the result do not point at parts of the same object, the operation is not officially legitimate, and C code is not “supposed” to do it. But you can do it anyway, and it gives precisely the results described by the procedure above. In some special situations it can do something useful, but non-wizards should avoid it.
Here’s a function to offset a pointer value as if it pointed to an object of any given size, by explicitly performing that calculation:
#include <stdint.h> void * ptr_add (void *p, int i, int objsize) { intptr_t p_address = (long) p; intptr_t totalsize = i * objsize; intptr_t new_address = p_address + totalsize; return (void *) new_address; }
This does the same job as p + i
with the proper
pointer type for p. It uses the type intptr_t
, which is
defined in the header file stdint.h. (In practice, long
long
would always work, but it is cleaner to use intptr_t
.)
Next: Drawbacks of Pointer Arithmetic, Previous: Pointer Arithmetic at Low-Level, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.13 Pointer Increment and Decrement
The ‘++’ operator adds 1 to a variable. We have seen it for integers (see Increment and Decrement Operators), but it works for pointers too. For instance, suppose we have a series of positive integers, terminated by a zero, and we want to add them up. Here is a simple way to step forward through the array by advancing a pointer.
int sum_array_till_0 (int *p) { int sum = 0; for (;;) { /* Fetch the next integer. */ int next = *p++; /* Exit the loop if it’s 0. */ if (next == 0) break; /* Add it into running total. */ sum += next; } return sum; }
The statement ‘break;’ will be explained further on (see break
Statement). Used in this way, it immediately exits the surrounding
for
statement.
*p++
uses postincrement (++
;
see Postincrement and Postdecrement) on the pointer p
. that
expression parses as *(p++)
, because a postfix operator always
takes precedence over a prefix operator. Therefore, it dereferences
the entering value of p
, then increments p
afterwards.
Incrementing a variable means adding 1 to it, as in p = p + 1
.
Since p
is a pointer, adding 1 to it advances it by the width
of the datum it points to—in this case, sizeof (int)
.
Therefore, each iteration of the loop picks up the next integer from
the series and puts it into next
.
This for
-loop has no initialization expression since p
and sum
are already initialized, has no end-test since the
‘break;’ statement will exit it, and needs no expression to
advance it since that’s done within the loop by incrementing p
and sum
. Thus, those three expressions after for
are
left empty.
Another way to write this function is by keeping the parameter value unchanged and using indexing to access the integers in the table.
int sum_array_till_0_indexing (int *p) { int i; int sum = 0; for (i = 0; ; i++) { /* Fetch the next integer. */ int next = p[i]; /* Exit the loop if it’s 0. */ if (next == 0) break; /* Add it into running total. */ sum += next; } return sum; }
In this program, instead of advancing p
, we advance i
and add it to p
. (Recall that p[i]
means *(p +
i)
.) Either way, it uses the same address to get the next integer.
It makes no difference in this program whether we write i++
or
++i
, because the value of that expression is not used.
We use it for its effect, to increment i
.
The ‘--’ operator also works on pointers; it can be used to step backwards through an array, like this:
int after_last_nonzero (int *p, int len) { /* Set upq
to point just after the last array element. */ int *q = p + len; while (q != p) /* Stepq
back until it reaches a nonzero element. */ if (*--q != 0) /* Return the index of the element after that nonzero. */ return q - p + 1; return 0; }
That function returns the length of the nonzero part of the array specified by its arguments; that is, the index of the first zero of the run of zeros at the end.
Next: Pointer-Integer Conversion, Previous: Pointer Increment and Decrement, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.14 Drawbacks of Pointer Arithmetic
Pointer arithmetic is clean and elegant, but it is also the cause of a major security flaw in the C language. Theoretically, it is only valid to adjust a pointer within one object allocated as a unit in memory. However, if you unintentionally adjust a pointer across the bounds of the object and into some other object, the system has no way to detect this error.
A bug which does that can easily result in clobbering (overwriting)
part of another object. For example, with array[-1]
you can
read or write the nonexistent element before the beginning of an
array—probably part of some other data.
Combining pointer arithmetic with casts between pointer types, you can create a pointer that fails to be properly aligned for its type. For example,
int a[2]; char *pa = (char *)a; int *p = (int *)(pa + 1);
gives p
a value pointing to an “integer” that includes part
of a[0]
and part of a[1]
. Dereferencing that with
*p
can cause a fatal SIGSEGV
signal or it can return the
contents of that badly aligned int
(see Signals. If it
“works,” it may be quite slow. It can also cause aliasing
confusions (see Aliasing).
Warning: Using improperly aligned pointers is risky—don’t do it unless it is really necessary.
Next: Printing Pointers, Previous: Drawbacks of Pointer Arithmetic, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.15 Pointer-Integer Conversion
On modern computers, an address is simply a number. It occupies the
same space as some size of integer. In C, you can convert a pointer
to the appropriate integer types and vice versa, without losing
information. The appropriate integer types are uintptr_t
(an
unsigned type) and intptr_t
(a signed type). Both are defined
in stdint.h.
For instance,
#include <stdint.h> #include <stdio.h> void print_pointer (void *ptr) { uintptr_t converted = (uintptr_t) ptr; printf ("Pointer value is 0x%x\n", (unsigned int) converted); }
The specification ‘%x’ in the template (the first argument) for
printf
means to represent this argument using hexadecimal
notation. It’s cleaner to use uintptr_t
, since hexadecimal
printing treats the number as unsigned, but it won’t actually matter:
all printf
gets to see is the series of bits in the number.
Warning: Converting pointers to integers is risky—don’t do it unless it is really necessary.
Previous: Pointer-Integer Conversion, Up: Pointers [Contents][Index]
14.16 Printing Pointers
To print the numeric value of a pointer, use the ‘%p’ specifier. For example:
void print_pointer (void *ptr) { printf ("Pointer value is %p\n", ptr); }
The specification ‘%p’ works with any pointer type. It prints ‘0x’ followed by the address in hexadecimal, printed as the appropriate unsigned integer type.
Next: Arrays, Previous: Pointers, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
15 Structures
A structure is a user-defined data type that holds various fields of data. Each field has a name and a data type specified in the structure’s definition.
Here we define a structure suitable for storing a linked list of integers. Each list item will hold one integer, plus a pointer to the next item.
struct intlistlink { int datum; struct intlistlink *next; };
The structure definition has a type tag so that the code can
refer to this structure. The type tag here is intlistlink
.
The definition refers recursively to the same structure through that
tag.
You can define a structure without a type tag, but then you can’t
refer to it again. That is useful only in some special contexts, such
as inside a typedef
or a union
.
The contents of the structure are specified by the field declarations inside the braces. Each field in the structure needs a declaration there. The fields in one structure definition must have distinct names, but these names do not conflict with any other names in the program.
A field declaration looks just like a variable declaration. You can combine field declarations with the same beginning, just as you can combine variable declarations.
This structure has two fields. One, named datum
, has type
int
and will hold one integer in the list. The other, named
next
, is a pointer to another struct intlistlink
which would be the rest of the list. In the last list item, it would
be NULL
.
This structure definition is recursive, since the type of the
next
field refers to the structure type. Such recursion is not
a problem; in fact, you can use the type struct intlistlink *
before the definition of the type struct intlistlink
itself.
That works because pointers to all kinds of structures really look the
same at the machine level.
After defining the structure, you can declare a variable of type
struct intlistlink
like this:
struct intlistlink foo;
The structure definition itself can serve as the beginning of a variable declaration, so you can declare variables immediately after, like this:
struct intlistlink { int datum; struct intlistlink *next; } foo;
But that is ugly. It is almost always clearer to separate the definition of the structure from its uses.
Declaring a structure type inside a block (see Blocks) limits the scope of the structure type name to that block. That means the structure type is recognized only within that block. Declaring it in a function parameter list, as here,
int f (struct foo {int a, b} parm);
(assuming that struct foo
is not already defined) limits the
scope of the structure type struct foo
to that parameter list;
that is basically useless, so it triggers a warning.
Standard C requires at least one field in a structure. GNU C does not require this.
- Referencing Structure Fields
- Arrays as Fields
- Dynamic Memory Allocation
- Field Offset
- Structure Layout
- Packed Structures
- Bit Fields
- Bit Field Packing
const
Fields- Arrays of Length Zero
- Flexible Array Fields
- Overlaying Different Structures
- Structure Assignment
- Unions
- Packing With Unions
- Cast to a Union Type
- Structure Constructors
- Unnamed Types as Fields
- Incomplete Types
- Intertwined Incomplete Types
- Type Tags
Next: Arrays as Fields, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.1 Referencing Structure Fields
To make a structure useful, there has to be a way to examine and store
its fields. The ‘.’ (period) operator does that; its use looks
like object.field
.
Given this structure and variable,
struct intlistlink { int datum; struct intlistlink *next; }; struct intlistlink foo;
you can write foo.datum
and foo.next
to refer to the two
fields in the value of foo
. These fields are lvalues, so you
can store values into them, and read the values out again.
Most often, structures are dynamically allocated (see the next
section), and we refer to the objects via pointers.
(*p).field
is somewhat cumbersome, so there is an
abbreviation: p->field
. For instance, assume the program
contains this declaration:
struct intlistlink *ptr;
You can write ptr->datum
and ptr->next
to refer
to the two fields in the object that ptr
points to.
If a unary operator precedes an expression using ‘->’, the ‘->’ nests inside:
-ptr->datum is equivalent to -(ptr->datum)
You can intermix ‘->’ and ‘.’ without parentheses, as shown here:
struct { double d; struct intlistlink l; } foo; …foo.l.next->next->datum…
Next: Dynamic Memory Allocation, Previous: Referencing Structure Fields, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.2 Arrays as Fields
When you declare field in a structure as an array, as here:
struct record { char *name; int data[4]; };
Each struct record
object holds one string (a pointer, of
course) and four integers, all part of a field called data
. If
recptr
is a pointer of type struct record *
, then it
points to a struct record
which contains those things; you can
access the second integer in that record with recptr->data[1]
.
If you have two objects of type struct record
, each one contains
an array. With this declaration,
struct record r1, r2;
r1.data
holds space for 4 int
s, and r2.data
holds
space for another 4 int
s,
Next: Field Offset, Previous: Arrays as Fields, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.3 Dynamic Memory Allocation
To allocate an object dynamically, call the library function
malloc
(see The GNU C Library in The GNU C Library
Reference Manual). Here is how to allocate an object of type
struct intlistlink
. To make this code work, include the file
stdlib.h, like this:
#include <stddef.h> /* DefinesNULL
. */ #include <stdlib.h> /* Declaresmalloc
. */ … struct intlistlink * alloc_intlistlink () { struct intlistlink *p; p = malloc (sizeof (struct intlistlink)); if (p == NULL) fatal ("Ran out of storage"); /* Initialize the contents. */ p->datum = 0; p->next = NULL; return p; }
malloc
returns void *
, so the assignment to p
will automatically convert it to type struct intlistlink *
.
The return value of malloc
is always sufficiently aligned
(see Type Alignment) that it is valid for any data type.
The test for p == NULL
is necessary because malloc
returns a null pointer if it cannot get any storage. We assume that
the program defines the function fatal
to report a fatal error
to the user.
Here’s how to add one more integer to the front of such a list:
struct intlistlink *my_list = NULL; void add_to_mylist (int my_int) { struct intlistlink *p = alloc_intlistlink (); p->datum = my_int; p->next = mylist; mylist = p; }
The way to free the objects is by calling free
. Here’s
a function to free all the links in one of these lists:
void free_intlist (struct intlistlink *p) { while (p) { struct intlistlink *q = p; p = p->next; free (q); } }
We must extract the next
pointer from the object before freeing
it, because free
can clobber the data that was in the object.
For the same reason, the program must not use the list any more after
freeing its elements. To make sure it won’t, it is best to clear out
the variable where the list was stored, like this:
free_intlist (mylist); mylist = NULL;
Next: Structure Layout, Previous: Dynamic Memory Allocation, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.4 Field Offset
To determine the offset of a given field field in a structure
type type, use the macro offsetof
, which is defined in
the file stddef.h. It is used like this:
offsetof (type, field)
Here is an example:
struct foo
{
int element;
struct foo *next;
};
offsetof (struct foo, next)
/* On most machines that is 4. It may be 8. */
Next: Packed Structures, Previous: Field Offset, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.5 Structure Layout
The rest of this chapter covers advanced topics about structures. If you are just learning C, you can skip it.
The precise layout of a struct
type is crucial when using it to
overlay hardware registers, to access data structures in shared
memory, or to assemble and disassemble packets for network
communication. It is also important for avoiding memory waste when
the program makes many objects of that type. However, the layout
depends on the target platform. Each platform has conventions for
structure layout, which compilers need to follow.
Here are the conventions used on most platforms.
The structure’s fields appear in the structure layout in the order they are declared. When possible, consecutive fields occupy consecutive bytes within the structure. However, if a field’s type demands more alignment than it would get that way, C gives it the alignment it requires by leaving a gap after the previous field.
Once all the fields have been laid out, it is possible to determine the structure’s alignment and size. The structure’s alignment is the maximum alignment of any of the fields in it. Then the structure’s size is rounded up to a multiple of its alignment. That may require leaving a gap at the end of the structure.
Here are some examples, where we assume that char
has size and
alignment 1 (always true), and int
has size and alignment 4
(true on most kinds of computers):
struct foo { char a, b; int c; };
This structure occupies 8 bytes, with an alignment of 4. a
is
at offset 0, b
is at offset 1, and c
is at offset 4.
There is a gap of 2 bytes before c
.
Contrast that with this structure:
struct foo { char a; int c; char b; };
This structure has size 12 and alignment 4. a
is at offset 0,
c
is at offset 4, and b
is at offset 8. There are two
gaps: three bytes before c
, and three bytes at the end.
These two structures have the same contents at the C level, but one takes 8 bytes and the other takes 12 bytes due to the ordering of the fields. A reliable way to avoid this sort of wastage is to order the fields by size, biggest fields first.
Next: Bit Fields, Previous: Structure Layout, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.6 Packed Structures
In GNU C you can force a structure to be laid out with no gaps by
adding __attribute__((packed))
after struct
(or at the
end of the structure type declaration). Here’s an example:
struct __attribute__((packed)) foo { char a; int c; char b; };
Without __attribute__((packed))
, this structure occupies 12
bytes (as described in the previous section), assuming 4-byte
alignment for int
. With __attribute__((packed))
, it is
only 6 bytes long—the sum of the lengths of its fields.
Use of __attribute__((packed))
often results in fields that
don’t have the normal alignment for their types. Taking the address
of such a field can result in an invalid pointer because of its
improper alignment. Dereferencing such a pointer can cause a
SIGSEGV
signal on a machine that doesn’t, in general, allow
unaligned pointers.
See Attributes in Declarations.
Next: Bit Field Packing, Previous: Packed Structures, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.7 Bit Fields
A structure field declaration with an integer type can specify the number of bits the field should occupy. We call that a bit field. These are useful because consecutive bit fields are packed into a larger storage unit. For instance,
unsigned char opcode: 4;
specifies that this field takes just 4 bits. Since it is unsigned, its possible values range from 0 to 15. A signed field with 4 bits, such as this,
signed char small: 4;
can hold values from -8 to 7.
You can subdivide a single byte into those two parts by writing
unsigned char opcode: 4; signed char small: 4;
in the structure. With bit fields, these two numbers fit into
a single char
.
Here’s how to declare a one-bit field that can hold either 0 or 1:
unsigned char special_flag: 1;
You can also use the bool
type for bit fields:
bool special_flag: 1;
Except when using bool
(which is always unsigned,
see Boolean Type), always specify signed
or unsigned
for a bit field. There is a default, if that’s not specified: the bit
field is signed if plain char
is signed, except that the option
-funsigned-bitfields forces unsigned as the default. But it
is cleaner not to depend on this default.
Bit fields are special in that you cannot take their address with ‘&’. They are not stored with the size and alignment appropriate for the specified type, so they cannot be addressed through pointers to that type.
Next: const
Fields, Previous: Bit Fields, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.8 Bit Field Packing
Programs to communicate with low-level hardware interfaces need to define bit fields laid out to match the hardware data. This section explains how to do that.
Consecutive bit fields are packed together, but each bit field must fit within a single object of its specified type. In this example,
unsigned short a : 3, b : 3, c : 3, d : 3, e : 3;
all five fields fit consecutively into one two-byte short
.
They need 15 bits, and one short
provides 16. By contrast,
unsigned char a : 3, b : 3, c : 3, d : 3, e : 3;
needs three bytes. It fits a
and b
into one
char
, but c
won’t fit in that char
(they would
add up to 9 bits). So c
and d
go into a second
char
, leaving a gap of two bits between b
and c
.
Then e
needs a third char
. By contrast,
unsigned char a : 3, b : 3; unsigned int c : 3; unsigned char d : 3, e : 3;
needs only two bytes: the type unsigned int
allows c
to straddle bytes that are in the same word.
You can leave a gap of a specified number of bits by defining a
nameless bit field. This looks like type : nbits;
.
It is allocated space in the structure just as a named bit field would
be allocated.
You can force the following bit field to advance to the following
aligned memory object with type : 0;
.
Both of these constructs can syntactically share type with ordinary bit fields. This example illustrates both:
unsigned int a : 5, : 3, b : 5, : 0, c : 5, : 3, d : 5;
It puts a
and b
into one int
, with a 3-bit gap
between them. Then : 0
advances to the next int
,
so c
and d
fit into that one.
These rules for packing bit fields apply to most target platforms, including all the usual real computers. A few embedded controllers have special layout rules.
Next: Arrays of Length Zero, Previous: Bit Field Packing, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.9 const
Fields
A structure field declared const
cannot be assigned to
(see const
Variables and Fields). For instance, let’s define this modified version of
struct intlistlink
:
struct intlistlink_ro /* “ro” for read-only. */
{
const int datum;
struct intlistlink *next;
};
This structure can be used to prevent part of the code from modifying
the datum
field:
/*p
has typestruct intlistlink *
. Convert it tostruct intlistlink_ro *
. */ struct intlistlink_ro *q = (struct intlistlink_ro *) p; q->datum = 5; /* Error! */ p->datum = 5; /* Valid since*p
is not astruct intlistlink_ro
. */
A const
field can get a value in two ways: by initialization of
the whole structure, and by making a pointer-to-structure point to an object
in which that field already has a value.
Any const
field in a structure type makes assignment impossible
for structures of that type (see Structure Assignment). That is
because structure assignment works by assigning the structure’s
fields, one by one.
Next: Flexible Array Fields, Previous: const
Fields, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.10 Arrays of Length Zero
GNU C allows zero-length arrays. They are useful as the last field
of a structure that is really a header for a variable-length object.
Here’s an example, where we construct a variable-size structure
to hold a line which is this_length
characters long:
struct line { int length; char contents[0]; }; struct line *thisline = ((struct line *) malloc (sizeof (struct line) + this_length)); thisline->length = this_length;
In ISO C90, we would have to give contents
a length of 1, which
means either wasting space or complicating the argument to malloc
.
Next: Overlaying Different Structures, Previous: Arrays of Length Zero, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.11 Flexible Array Fields
The C99 standard adopted a more complex equivalent of zero-length array fields. It’s called a flexible array, and it’s indicated by omitting the length, like this:
struct line { int length; char contents[]; };
The flexible array has to be the last field in the structure, and there must be other fields before it.
Under the C standard, a structure with a flexible array can’t be part of another structure, and can’t be an element of an array.
GNU C allows static initialization of flexible array fields. The effect is to “make the array long enough” for the initializer.
struct f1 { int x; int y[]; } f1 = { 1, { 2, 3, 4 } };
This defines a structure variable named f1
whose type is struct f1
. In C, a variable name or function name
never conflicts with a structure type tag.
Omitting the flexible array field’s size lets the initializer determine it. This is allowed only when the flexible array is defined in the outermost structure and you declare a variable of that structure type. For example:
struct foo { int x; int y[]; }; struct bar { struct foo z; }; struct foo a = { 1, { 2, 3, 4 } }; // Valid. struct bar b = { { 1, { 2, 3, 4 } } }; // Invalid. struct bar c = { { 1, { } } }; // Valid. struct foo d[1] = { { 1 { 2, 3, 4 } } }; // Invalid.
Next: Structure Assignment, Previous: Flexible Array Fields, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.12 Overlaying Different Structures
Be careful about using different structure types to refer to the same memory within one function, because GNU C can optimize code assuming it never does that. See Aliasing. Here’s an example of the kind of aliasing that can cause the problem:
struct a { int size; char *data; }; struct b { int size; char *data; }; struct a foo; struct a *p = &foo; struct b *q = (struct b *) &foo;
Here q
points to the same memory that the variable foo
occupies, but they have two different types. The two types
struct a
and struct b
are defined alike, but they are
not the same type. Interspersing references using the two types,
like this,
p->size = 0; q->size = 1; x = p->size;
allows GNU C to assume that p->size
is still zero when it is
copied into x
. The GNU C compiler “knows” that q
points to a struct b
and this is not supposed to overlap with a
struct a
. Other compilers might also do this optimization.
The ISO C standard considers such code erroneous, precisely so that this optimization will not be incorrect.
Next: Unions, Previous: Overlaying Different Structures, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.13 Structure Assignment
Assignment operating on a structure type copies the structure. The left and right operands must have the same type. Here is an example:
#include <stddef.h> /* DefinesNULL
. */ #include <stdlib.h> /* Declaresmalloc
. */ … struct point { double x, y; }; struct point * copy_point (struct point point) { struct point *p = (struct point *) malloc (sizeof (struct point)); if (p == NULL) fatal ("Out of memory"); *p = point; return p; }
Notionally, assignment on a structure type works by copying each of
the fields. Thus, if any of the fields has the const
qualifier, that structure type does not allow assignment:
struct point { const double x, y; };
struct point a, b;
a = b; /* Error! */
When a structure type has a field which is an array, as here,
struct record { char *name; int data[4]; }; struct record r1, r2;
structure assigment such as r1 = r2
copies array fields’
contents just as it copies all the other fields.
This is the only way in C that you can operate on the whole contents
of a array with one operation: when the array is contained in a
struct
. You can’t copy the contents of the data
field
as an array, because
r1.data = r2.data;
would convert the array objects (as always) to pointers to the zeroth
elements of the arrays (of type struct record *
), and the
assignment would be invalid because the left operand is not an lvalue.
Next: Packing With Unions, Previous: Structure Assignment, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.14 Unions
A union type defines alternative ways of looking at the same piece of memory. Each alternative view is defined with a data type, and identified by a name. A union definition looks like this:
union name
{
alternative declarations…
};
Each alternative declaration looks like a structure field declaration, except that it can’t be a bit field. For instance,
union number { long int integer; double float; }
lets you store either an integer (type long int
) or a floating
point number (type double
) in the same place in memory. The
length and alignment of the union type are the maximum of all the
alternatives—they do not have to be the same. In this union
example, double
probably takes more space than long int
,
but that doesn’t cause a problem in programs that use the union in the
normal way.
The members don’t have to be different in data type. Sometimes each member pertains to a way the data will be used. For instance,
union datum { double latitude; double longitude; double height; double weight; int continent; }
This union holds one of several kinds of data; most kinds are floating
points, but the value can also be a code for a continent which is an
integer. You could use one member of type double
to
access all the values which have that type, but the different member
names will make the program clearer.
The alignment of a union type is the maximum of the alignments of the alternatives. The size of the union type is the maximum of the sizes of the alternatives, rounded up to a multiple of the alignment (because every type’s size must be a multiple of its alignment).
All the union alternatives start at the address of the union itself. If an alternative is shorter than the union as a whole, it occupies the first part of the union’s storage, leaving the last part unused for that alternative.
Warning: if the code stores data using one union alternative and accesses it with another, the results depend on the kind of computer in use. Only wizards should try to do this. However, when you need to do this, a union is a clean way to do it.
Assignment works on any union type by copying the entire value.
Next: Cast to a Union Type, Previous: Unions, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.15 Packing With Unions
Sometimes we design a union with the intention of packing various kinds of objects into a certain amount of memory space. For example.
union bytes8 { long long big_int_elt; double double_elt; struct { int first, second; } two_ints; struct { void *first, *second; } two_ptrs; }; union bytes8 *p;
This union makes it possible to look at 8 bytes of data that p
points to as a single 8-byte integer (p->big_int_elt
), as a
single floating-point number (p->double_elt
), as a pair of
integers (p->two_ints.first
and p->two_ints.second
), or
as a pair of pointers (p->two_ptrs.first
and
p->two_ptrs.second
).
To pack storage with such a union makes assumptions about the sizes of
all the types involved. This particular union was written expecting a
pointer to have the same size as int
. On a machine where one
pointer takes 8 bytes, the code using this union probably won’t work
as expected. The union, as such, will function correctly—if you
store two values through two_ints
and extract them through
two_ints
, you will get the same integers back—but the part of
the program that expects the union to be 8 bytes long could
malfunction, or at least use too much space.
The above example shows one case where a struct
type with no
tag can be useful. Another way to get effectively the same result
is with arrays as members of the union:
union eight_bytes { long long big_int_elt; double double_elt; int two_ints[2]; void *two_ptrs[2]; };
Next: Structure Constructors, Previous: Packing With Unions, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.16 Cast to a Union Type
In GNU C, you can explicitly cast any of the alternative types to the union type; for instance,
(union eight_bytes) (long long) 5
makes a value of type union eight_bytes
which gets its contents
through the alternative named big_int_elt
.
The value being cast must exactly match the type of the alternative, so this is not valid:
(union eight_bytes) 5 /* Error! 5 is int
. */
A cast to union type looks like any other cast, except that the type
specified is a union type. You can specify the type either with
union tag
or with a typedef name (see Defining Typedef Names).
Using the cast as the right-hand side of an assignment to a variable of union type is equivalent to storing in an alternative of the union:
union foo u; u = (union foo) x means u.i = x u = (union foo) y means u.d = y
You can also use the union cast as a function argument:
void hack (union foo);
…
hack ((union foo) x);
Next: Unnamed Types as Fields, Previous: Cast to a Union Type, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.17 Structure Constructors
You can construct a structure value by writing its type in parentheses, followed by an initializer that would be valid in a declaration for that type. For instance, given this declaration,
struct foo {int a; char b[2];} structure;
you can create a struct foo
value as follows:
((struct foo) {x + y, 'a', 0})
This specifies x + y
for field a
,
the character ‘a’ for field b
’s element 0,
and the null character for field b
’s element 1.
The parentheses around that constructor are to necessary, but we recommend writing them to make the nesting of the containing expression clearer.
You can also show the nesting of the two by writing it like this:
((struct foo) {x + y, {'a', 0} })
Each of those is equivalent to writing the following statement expression (see Statements and Declarations in Expressions):
({ struct foo temp = {x + y, 'a', 0}; temp; })
You can also use field labels in the structure constructor to indicate which fields you’re specifying values for, instead of using the order of the fields to specify that:
(struct foo) {.a = x + y, .b = {'a', 0}}
You can also create a union value this way, but it is not especially useful since that is equivalent to doing a cast:
((union whosis) {value})
is equivalent to
((union whosis) (value))
Next: Incomplete Types, Previous: Structure Constructors, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.18 Unnamed Types as Fields
A structure or a union can contain, as fields, unnamed structures and unions. Here’s an example:
struct { int a; union { int b; float c; }; int d; } foo;
You can access the fields of the unnamed union within foo
as if they
were individual fields at the same level as the union definition:
foo.a = 42;
foo.b = 47;
foo.c = 5.25; // Overwrites the value in foo.b
.
foo.d = 314;
Avoid using field names that could cause ambiguity. For example, with this definition:
struct { int a; struct { int a; float b; }; } foo;
it is impossible to tell what foo.a
refers to. GNU C reports
an error when a definition is ambiguous in this way.
Next: Intertwined Incomplete Types, Previous: Unnamed Types as Fields, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.19 Incomplete Types
A type that has not been fully defined is called an incomplete
type. Structure and union types are incomplete when the code makes a
forward reference, such as struct foo
, before defining the
type. An array type is incomplete when its length is unspecified.
You can’t use an incomplete type to declare a variable or field, or
use it for a function parameter or return type. The operators
sizeof
and _Alignof
give errors when used on an
incomplete type.
However, you can define a pointer to an incomplete type, and declare a variable or field with such a pointer type. In general, you can do everything with such pointers except dereference them. For example:
extern void bar (struct mysterious_value *);
void
foo (struct mysterious_value *arg)
{
bar (arg);
}
…
{
struct mysterious_value *p, **q;
p = *q;
foo (p);
}
These examples are valid because the code doesn’t try to understand
what p
points to; it just passes the pointer around.
(Presumably bar
is defined in some other file that really does
have a definition for struct mysterious_value
.) However,
dereferencing the pointer would get an error; that requires a
definition for the structure type.
Next: Type Tags, Previous: Incomplete Types, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.20 Intertwined Incomplete Types
When several structure types contain pointers to each other, you can define the types in any order because pointers to types that come later are incomplete types. Thus, Here is an example.
/* An employee record points to a group. */ struct employee { char *name; … struct group *group; /* incomplete type. */ … }; /* An employee list points to employees. */ struct employee_list { struct employee *this_one; struct employee_list *next; /* incomplete type. */ … }; /* A group points to one employee_list. */ struct group { char *name; … struct employee_list *employees; … };
Previous: Intertwined Incomplete Types, Up: Structures [Contents][Index]
15.21 Type Tags
The name that follows struct
(see Structures), union
(see Unions, or enum
(see Enumeration Types) is called
a type tag. In C, a type tag never conflicts with a variable
name or function name; the type tags have a separate name space.
Thus, there is no name conflict in this code:
struct pair { int a, b; }; int pair = 1;
nor in this one:
struct pair { int a, b; } pair;
where pair
is both a structure type tag and a variable name.
However, struct
, union
, and enum
share the same
name space of tags, so this is a conflict:
struct pair { int a, b; }; enum pair { c, d };
and so is this:
struct pair { int a, b; }; struct pair { int c, d; };
When the code defines a type tag inside a block, the tag’s scope is limited to that block (as for local variables). Two definitions for one type tag do not conflict if they are in different scopes; rather, each is valid in its scope. For example,
struct pair { int a, b; };
void
pair_up_doubles (int len, double array[])
{
struct pair { double a, b; };
…
}
has two definitions for struct pair
which do not conflict. The
one inside the function applies only within the definition of
pair_up_doubles
. Within its scope, that definition
shadows the outer definition.
If struct pair
appears inside the function body, before the
inner definition, it refers to the outer definition—the only one
that has been seen at that point. Thus, in this code,
struct pair { int a, b; };
void
pair_up_doubles (int len, double array[])
{
struct two_pairs { struct pair *p, *q; };
struct pair { double a, b; };
…
}
the structure two_pairs
has pointers to the outer definition of
struct pair
, which is probably not desirable.
To prevent that, you can write struct pair;
inside the function
body as a variable declaration with no variables. This is a
forward declaration of the type tag pair
: it makes the
type tag local to the current block, with the details of the type to
come later. Here’s an example:
void
pair_up_doubles (int len, double array[])
{
/* Forward declaration for pair
. */
struct pair;
struct two_pairs { struct pair *p, *q; };
/* Give the details. */
struct pair { double a, b; };
…
}
However, the cleanest practice is to avoid shadowing type tags.
Next: Enumeration Types, Previous: Structures, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
16 Arrays
An array is a data object that holds a series of elements, all of the same data type. Each element is identified by its numeric index within the array.
We presented arrays of numbers in the sample programs early in this manual (see An Example with Arrays). However, arrays can have elements of any data type, including pointers, structures, unions, and other arrays.
If you know another programming language, you may suppose that you know all about arrays, but C arrays have special quirks, so in this chapter we collect all the information about arrays in C.
The elements of a C array are allocated consecutively in memory, with no gaps between them. Each element is aligned as required for its data type (see Type Alignment).
- Accessing Array Elements
- Declaring an Array
- Strings
- Array Type Designators
- Incomplete Array Types
- Limitations of C Arrays
- Multidimensional Arrays
- Constructing Array Values
- Arrays of Variable Length
Next: Declaring an Array, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.1 Accessing Array Elements
If the variable a
is an array, the nth element of
a
is a[n]
. You can use that expression to access
an element’s value or to assign to it:
x = a[5]; a[6] = 1;
Since the variable a
is an lvalue, a[n]
is also an
lvalue.
The lowest valid index in an array is 0, not 1, and the highest valid index is one less than the number of elements.
The C language does not check whether array indices are in bounds, so if the code uses an out-of-range index, it will access memory outside the array.
Warning: Using only valid index values in C is the programmer’s responsibility.
Array indexing in C is not a primitive operation: it is defined in
terms of pointer arithmetic and dereferencing. Now that we know
what a[i]
does, we can ask how a[i]
does
its job.
In C, x[y]
is an abbreviation for
*(x+y)
. Thus, a[i]
really means
*(a+i)
. See Pointers and Arrays.
When an expression with array type (such as a
) appears as part
of a larger C expression, it is converted automatically to a pointer
to element zero of that array. For instance, a
in an
expression is equivalent to &a[0]
. Thus, *(a+i)
is
computed as *(&a[0]+i)
.
Now we can analyze how that expression gives us the desired element of
the array. It makes a pointer to element 0 of a
, advances it
by the value of i
, and dereferences that pointer.
Another equivalent way to write the expression is (&a[0])[i]
.
Next: Strings, Previous: Accessing Array Elements, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.2 Declaring an Array
To make an array declaration, write [length]
after the
name being declared. This construct is valid in the declaration of a
variable, a function parameter, a function value type (the value can’t
be an array, but it can be a pointer to one), a structure field, or a
union alternative.
The surrounding declaration specifies the element type of the array;
that can be any type of data, but not void
or a function type.
For instance,
double a[5];
declares a
as an array of 5 double
s.
struct foo bstruct[length];
declares bstruct
as an array of length
objects of type
struct foo
. A variable array size like this is allowed when
the array is not file-scope.
Other declaration constructs can nest within the array declaration construct. For instance:
struct foo *b[length];
declares b
as an array of length
pointers to
struct foo
. This shows that the length need not be a constant
(see Arrays of Variable Length).
double (*c)[5];
declares c
as a pointer to an array of 5 double
s, and
char *(*f (int))[5];
declares f
as a function taking an int
argument and
returning a pointer to an array of 5 strings (pointers to
char
s).
double aa[5][10];
declares aa
as an array of 5 elements, each of which is an
array of 10 double
s. This shows how to declare a
multidimensional array in C (see Multidimensional Arrays).
All these declarations specify the array’s length, which is needed in these cases in order to allocate storage for the array.
Next: Array Type Designators, Previous: Declaring an Array, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.3 Strings
A string in C is a sequence of elements of type char
,
terminated with the null character, the character with code zero.
Programs often need to use strings with specific, fixed contents. To
write one in a C program, use a string constant such as
"Take me to your leader!"
. The data type of a string constant
is char *
. For the full syntactic details of writing string
constants, String Constants.
To declare a place to store a non-constant string, declare an array of
char
. Keep in mind that it must include one extra char
for the terminating null. For instance,
char text[] = { 'H', 'e', 'l', 'l', 'o', 0 };
declares an array named ‘text’ with six elements—five letters and the terminating null character. An equivalent way to get the same result is this,
char text[] = "Hello";
which copies the elements of the string constant, including its terminating null character.
char message[200];
declares an array long enough to hold a string of 199 ASCII characters plus the terminating null character.
When you store a string into message
be sure to check or prove
that the length does not exceed its size. For example,
void set_message (char *text) { int i; for (i = 0; i < sizeof (message); i++) { message[i] = text[i]; if (text[i] == 0) return; } fatal_error ("Message is too long for `message'); }
It’s easy to do this with the standard library function
strncpy
, which fills out the whole destination array (up to a
specified length) with null characters. Thus, if the last character
of the destination is not null, the string did not fit. Many system
libraries, including the GNU C library, hand-optimize strncpy
to run faster than an explicit for
-loop.
Here’s what the code looks like:
void set_message (char *text) { strncpy (message, text, sizeof (message)); if (message[sizeof (message) - 1] != 0) fatal_error ("Message is too long for `message'); }
See The GNU C Library in The GNU C Library Reference Manual, for more information about the standard library functions for operating on strings.
You can avoid putting a fixed length limit on strings you construct or operate on by allocating the space for them dynamically. See Dynamic Memory Allocation.
Next: Incomplete Array Types, Previous: Strings, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.4 Array Type Designators
Every C type has a type designator, which you make by deleting the variable name and the semicolon from a declaration (see Type Designators). The designators for array types follow this rule, but they may appear surprising.
type int a[5]; designator int [5] type double a[5][3]; designator double [5][3] type struct foo *a[5]; designator struct foo *[5]
Next: Limitations of C Arrays, Previous: Array Type Designators, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.5 Incomplete Array Types
An array is equivalent, for most purposes, to a pointer to its zeroth
element. When that is true, the length of the array is irrelevant.
The length needs to be known only for allocating space for the array, or
for sizeof
and typeof
(see Referring to a Type with __auto_type
). Thus, in some
contexts C allows
- An
extern
declaration says how to refer to a variable allocated elsewhere. It does not need to allocate space for the variable, so if it is an array, you can omit the length. For example,extern int foo[];
- When declaring a function parameter as an array, the argument value
passed to the function is really a pointer to the array’s zeroth
element. This value does not say how long the array really is, there
is no need to declare it. For example,
int func (int foo[])
These declarations are examples of incomplete array types, types
that are not fully specified. The incompleteness makes no difference
for accessing elements of the array, but it matters for some other
things. For instance, sizeof
is not allowed on an incomplete
type.
With multidimensional arrays, only the first dimension can be omitted:
extern struct chesspiece *funnyboard foo[][8];
In other words, the code doesn’t have to say how many rows there are, but it must state how big each row is.
Next: Multidimensional Arrays, Previous: Incomplete Array Types, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.6 Limitations of C Arrays
Arrays have quirks in C because they are not “first-class objects”: there is no way in C to operate on an array as a unit.
The other composite objects in C, structures and unions, are first-class objects: a C program can copy a structure or union value in an assignment, or pass one as an argument to a function, or make a function return one. You can’t do those things with an array in C. That is because a value you can operate on never has an array type.
An expression in C can have an array type, but that doesn’t produce the array as a value. Instead it is converted automatically to a pointer to the array’s element at index zero. The code can operate on the pointer, and through that on individual elements of the array, but it can’t get and operate on the array as a unit.
There are three exceptions to this conversion rule, but none of them offers a way to operate on the array as a whole.
First, ‘&’ applied to an expression with array type gives you the address of the array, as an array type. However, you can’t operate on the whole array that way—if you apply ‘*’ to get the array back, that expression converts, as usual, to a pointer to its zeroth element.
Second, the operators sizeof
, _Alignof
, and
typeof
do not convert the array to a pointer; they leave it as
an array. But they don’t operate on the array’s data—they only give
information about its type.
Third, a string constant used as an initializer for an array is not converted to a pointer—rather, the declaration copies the contents of that string in that one special case.
You can copy the contents of an array, just not with an
assignment operator. You can do it by calling the library function
memcpy
or memmove
(see The
GNU C Library in The GNU C Library Reference Manual). Also,
when a structure contains just an array, you can copy that structure.
An array itself is an lvalue if it is a declared variable, or part of a structure or union that is an lvalue. When you construct an array from elements (see Constructing Array Values), that array is not an lvalue.
Next: Constructing Array Values, Previous: Limitations of C Arrays, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.7 Multidimensional Arrays
Strictly speaking, all arrays in C are unidimensional. However, you can create an array of arrays, which is more or less equivalent to a multidimensional array. For example,
struct chesspiece *board[8][8];
declares an array of 8 arrays of 8 pointers to struct
chesspiece
. This data type could represent the state of a chess
game. To access one square’s contents requires two array index
operations, one for each dimension. For instance, you can write
board[row][column]
, assuming row
and column
are variables with integer values in the proper range.
How does C understand board[row][column]
? First of all,
board
is converted automatically to a pointer to the zeroth
element (at index zero) of board
. Adding row
to that
makes it point to the desired element. Thus, board[row]
’s
value is an element of board
—an array of 8 pointers.
However, as an expression with array type, it is converted
automatically to a pointer to the array’s zeroth element. The second
array index operation, [column]
, accesses the chosen element
from that array.
As this shows, pointer-to-array types are meaningful in C. You can declare a variable that points to a row in a chess board like this:
struct chesspiece *(*rowptr)[8];
This points to an array of 8 pointers to struct chesspiece
.
You can assign to it as follows:
rowptr = &board[5];
The dimensions don’t have to be equal in length. Here we declare
statepop
as an array to hold the population of each state in
the United States for each year since 1900:
#define NSTATES 50
{
int nyears = current_year - 1900 + 1;
int statepop[NSTATES][nyears];
…
}
The variable statepop
is an array of NSTATES
subarrays,
each indexed by the year (counting from 1900). Thus, to get the
element for a particular state and year, we must subscript it first
by the number that indicates the state, and second by the index for
the year:
statepop[state][year - 1900]
The subarrays within the multidimensional array are allocated consecutively in memory, and within each subarray, its elements are allocated consecutively in memory. The most efficient way to process all the elements in the array is to scan the last subscript in the innermost loop. This means consecutive accesses go to consecutive memory locations, which optimizes use of the processor’s memory cache. For example:
int total = 0; float average; for (int state = 0; state < NSTATES, ++state) { for (int year = 0; year < nyears; ++year) { total += statepop[state][year]; } } average = total / nyears;
C’s layout for multidimensional arrays is different from Fortran’s layout. In Fortran, a multidimensional array is not an array of arrays; rather, multidimensional arrays are a primitive feature, and it is the first index that varies most rapidly between consecutive memory locations. Thus, the memory layout of a 50x114 array in C matches that of a 114x50 array in Fortran.
Next: Arrays of Variable Length, Previous: Multidimensional Arrays, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.8 Constructing Array Values
You can construct an array from elements by writing them inside braces, and preceding all that with the array type’s designator in parentheses. There is no need to specify the array length, since the number of elements determines that. The constructor looks like this:
(elttype[]) { elements };
Here is an example, which constructs an array of string pointers:
(char *[]) { "x", "y", "z" };
That’s equivalent in effect to declaring an array with the same initializer, like this:
char *array[] = { "x", "y", "z" };
and then using the array.
If all the elements are simple constant expressions, or made up of such, then the compound literal can be coerced to a pointer to its zeroth element and used to initialize a file-scope variable (see File-Scope Variables), as shown here:
char **foo = (char *[]) { "x", "y", "z" };
The data type of foo
is char **
, which is a pointer
type, not an array type. The declaration is equivalent to defining
and then using an array-type variable:
char *nameless_array[] = { "x", "y", "z" }; char **foo = &nameless_array[0];
Previous: Constructing Array Values, Up: Arrays [Contents][Index]
16.9 Arrays of Variable Length
In GNU C, you can declare variable-length arrays like any other arrays, but with a length that is not a constant expression. The storage is allocated at the point of declaration and deallocated when the block scope containing the declaration exits. For example:
#include <stdio.h> /* DefinesFILE
. */ #include <string.h> /* Declaresstr
. */ FILE * concat_fopen (char *s1, char *s2, char *mode) { char str[strlen (s1) + strlen (s2) + 1]; strcpy (str, s1); strcat (str, s2); return fopen (str, mode); }
(This uses some standard library functions; see String and Array Utilities in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.)
The length of an array is computed once when the storage is allocated
and is remembered for the scope of the array in case it is used in
sizeof
.
Warning: don’t allocate a variable-length array if the size might be very large (more than 100,000), or in a recursive function, because that is likely to cause stack overflow. Allocate the array dynamically instead (see Dynamic Memory Allocation).
Jumping or breaking out of the scope of the array name deallocates the storage. Jumping into the scope is not allowed; that gives an error message.
You can also use variable-length arrays as arguments to functions:
struct entry
tester (int len, char data[len][len])
{
…
}
As usual, a function argument declared with an array type is really a pointer to an array that already exists. Calling the function does not allocate the array, so there’s no particular danger of stack overflow in using this construct.
To pass the array first and the length afterward, use a forward declaration in the function’s parameter list (another GNU extension). For example,
struct entry
tester (int len; char data[len][len], int len)
{
…
}
The int len
before the semicolon is a parameter forward
declaration, and it serves the purpose of making the name len
known when the declaration of data
is parsed.
You can write any number of such parameter forward declarations in the parameter list. They can be separated by commas or semicolons, but the last one must end with a semicolon, which is followed by the “real” parameter declarations. Each forward declaration must match a “real” declaration in parameter name and data type. ISO C11 does not support parameter forward declarations.
Next: Defining Typedef Names, Previous: Arrays, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
17 Enumeration Types
An enumeration type represents a limited set of integer values, each with a name. It is effectively equivalent to a primitive integer type.
Suppose we have a list of possible emotional states to store in an integer variable. We can give names to these alternative values with an enumeration:
enum emotion_state { neutral, happy, sad, worried, calm, nervous };
(Never mind that this is a simplistic way to classify emotional states; it’s just a code example.)
The names inside the enumeration are called enumerators. The
enumeration type defines them as constants, and their values are
consecutive integers; neutral
is 0, happy
is 1,
sad
is 2, and so on. Alternatively, you can specify values for
the enumerators explicitly like this:
enum emotion_state { neutral = 2, happy = 5, sad = 20, worried = 10, calm = -5, nervous = -300 };
Each enumerator which does not specify a value gets value zero (if it is at the beginning) or the next consecutive integer.
/*neutral
is 0 by default, andworried
is 21 by default. */ enum emotion_state { neutral, happy = 5, sad = 20, worried, calm = -5, nervous = -300 };
If an enumerator is obsolete, you can specify that using it should
cause a warning, by including an attribute in the enumerator’s
declaration. Here is how happy
would look with this
attribute:
happy __attribute__ ((deprecated ("impossible under plutocratic rule"))) = 5,
See Attributes in Declarations.
You can declare variables with the enumeration type:
enum emotion_state feelings_now;
In the C code itself, this is equivalent to declaring the variable
int
. (If all the enumeration values are positive, it is
equivalent to unsigned int
.) However, declaring it with the
enumeration type has an advantage in debugging, because GDB knows it
should display the current value of the variable using the
corresponding name. If the variable’s type is int
, GDB can
only show the value as a number.
The identifier that follows enum
is called a type tag
since it distinguishes different enumeration types. Type tags are in
a separate name space and belong to scopes like most other names in C.
See Type Tags, for explanation.
You can predeclare an enum
type tag like a structure or union
type tag, like this:
enum foo;
The enum
type is incomplete until you finish defining it.
You can optionally include a trailing comma at the end of a list of enumeration values:
enum emotion_state { neutral, happy, sad, worried, calm, nervous, };
This is useful in some macro definitions, since it enables you to assemble the list of enumerators without knowing which one is last. The extra comma does not change the meaning of the enumeration in any way.
Next: Statements, Previous: Enumeration Types, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
18 Defining Typedef Names
You can define a data type keyword as an alias for any type, and then
use the alias syntactically like a built-in type keyword such as
int
. You do this using typedef
, so these aliases are
also called typedef names.
typedef
is followed by text that looks just like a variable
declaration, but instead of declaring variables it defines data type
keywords.
Here’s how to define fooptr
as a typedef alias for the type
struct foo *
, then declare x
and y
as variables
with that type:
typedef struct foo *fooptr; fooptr x, y;
That declaration is equivalent to the following one:
struct foo *x, *y;
You can define a typedef alias for any type. For instance, this makes
frobcount
an alias for type int
:
typedef int frobcount;
This doesn’t define a new type distinct from int
. Rather,
frobcount
is another name for the type int
. Once the
variable is declared, it makes no difference which name the
declaration used.
There is a syntactic difference, however, between frobcount
and
int
: A typedef name cannot be used with
signed
, unsigned
, long
or short
. It has
to specify the type all by itself. So you can’t write this:
unsigned frobcount f1; /* Error! */
But you can write this:
typedef unsigned int unsigned_frobcount; unsigned_frobcount f1;
In other words, a typedef name is not an alias for a keyword
such as int
. It stands for a type, and that could be
the type int
.
Typedef names are in the same namespace as functions and variables, so you can’t use the same name for a typedef and a function, or a typedef and a variable. When a typedef is declared inside a code block, it is in scope only in that block.
Warning: Avoid defining typedef names that end in ‘_t’, because many of these have standard meanings.
You can redefine a typedef name to the exact same type as its first definition, but you cannot redefine a typedef name to a different type, even if the two types are compatible. For example, this is valid:
typedef int frobcount; typedef int frotzcount; typedef frotzcount frobcount; typedef frobcount frotzcount;
because each typedef name is always defined with the same type
(int
), but this is not valid:
enum foo {f1, f2, f3}; typedef enum foo frobcount; typedef int frobcount;
Even though the type enum foo
is compatible with int
,
they are not the same type.
Next: Variables, Previous: Defining Typedef Names, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
19 Statements
A statement specifies computations to be done for effect; it does not produce a value, as an expression would. In general a statement ends with a semicolon (‘;’), but blocks (which are statements, more or less) are an exception to that rule. See Blocks.
The places to use statements are inside a block, and inside a complex statement. A complex statement contains one or two components that are nested statements. Each such component must consist of one and only one statement. The way to put multiple statements in such a component is to group them into a block (see Blocks), which counts as one statement.
The following sections describe the various kinds of statement.
- Expression Statement
if
Statementif-else
Statement- Blocks
return
Statement- Loop Statements
switch
Statement- Example of
switch
- Duff’s Device
- Case Ranges
- Null Statement
goto
Statement and Labels- Locally Declared Labels
- Labels as Values
- Statements and Declarations in Expressions
Next: if
Statement, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.1 Expression Statement
The most common kind of statement in C is an expression statement. It consists of an expression followed by a semicolon. The expression’s value is discarded, so the expressions that are useful are those that have side effects: assignment expressions, increment and decrement expressions, and function calls. Here are examples of expression statements:
x = 5; /* Assignment expression. */ p++; /* Increment expression. */ printf ("Done\n"); /* Function call expression. */ *p; /* CauseSIGSEGV
signal ifp
is null. */ x + y; /* Useless statement without effect. */
In very unusual circumstances we use an expression statement whose purpose is to get a fault if an address is invalid:
volatile char *p;
…
*p; /* Cause signal if p
is null. */
If the target of p
is not declared volatile
, the
compiler might optimize away the memory access, since it knows that
the value isn’t really used. See volatile
Variables and Fields.
Next: if-else
Statement, Previous: Expression Statement, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.2 if
Statement
An if
statement computes an expression to decide
whether to execute the following statement or not.
It looks like this:
if (condition) execute-if-true
The first thing this does is compute the value of condition. If that is true (nonzero), then it executes the statement execute-if-true. If the value of condition is false (zero), it doesn’t execute execute-if-true; instead, it does nothing.
This is a complex statement because it contains a component if-true-substatement that is a nested statement. It must be one and only one statement. The way to put multiple statements there is to group them into a block (see Blocks).
Next: Blocks, Previous: if
Statement, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.3 if-else
Statement
An if
-else
statement computes an expression to decide
which of two nested statements to execute.
It looks like this:
if (condition) if-true-substatement else if-false-substatement
The first thing this does is compute the value of condition. If that is true (nonzero), then it executes the statement if-true-substatement. If the value of condition is false (zero), then it executes the statement if-false-substatement instead.
This is a complex statement because it contains components if-true-substatement and if-else-substatement that are nested statements. Each must be one and only one statement. The way to put multiple statements in such a component is to group them into a block (see Blocks).
Next: return
Statement, Previous: if-else
Statement, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.4 Blocks
A block is a construct that contains multiple statements of any kind. It begins with ‘{’ and ends with ‘}’, and has a series of statements and declarations in between. Another name for blocks is compound statements.
Is a block a statement? Yes and no. It doesn’t look like a normal statement—it does not end with a semicolon. But you can use it like a statement; anywhere that a statement is required or allowed, you can write a block and consider that block a statement.
So far it seems that a block is a kind of statement with an unusual syntax. But that is not entirely true: a function body is also a block, and that block is definitely not a statement. The text after a function header is not treated as a statement; only a function body is allowed there, and nothing else would be meaningful there.
In a formal grammar we would have to choose—either a block is a kind of statement or it is not. But this manual is meant for humans, not for parser generators. The clearest answer for humans is, “a block is a statement, in some ways.”
A block that isn’t a function body is called an internal block
or a nested block. You can put a nested block directly inside
another block, but more often the nested block is inside some complex
statement, such as a for
statement or an if
statement.
There are two uses for nested blocks in C:
- To specify the scope for local declarations. For instance, a local variable’s scope is the rest of the innermost containing block.
- To write a series of statements where, syntactically, one statement is
called for. For instance, the execute-if-true of an
if
statement is one statement. To put multiple statements there, they have to be wrapped in a block, like this:if (x < 0) { printf ("x was negative\n"); x = -x; }
This example (repeated from above) shows a nested block which serves
both purposes: it includes two statements (plus a declaration) in the
body of a while
statement, and it provides the scope for the
declaration of q
.
void free_intlist (struct intlistlink *p) { while (p) { struct intlistlink *q = p; p = p->next; free (q); } }
Next: Loop Statements, Previous: Blocks, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.5 return
Statement
The return
statement makes the containing function return
immediately. It has two forms. This one specifies no value to
return:
return;
That form is meant for functions whose return type is void
(see The Void Type). You can also use it in a function that
returns nonvoid data, but that’s a bad idea, since it makes the
function return garbage.
The form that specifies a value looks like this:
return value;
which computes the expression value and makes the function return that. If necessary, the value undergoes type conversion to the function’s declared return value type, which works like assigning the value to a variable of that type.
Next: switch
Statement, Previous: return
Statement, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6 Loop Statements
You can use a loop statement when you need to execute a series of statements repeatedly, making an iteration. C provides several different kinds of loop statements, described in the following subsections.
Every kind of loop statement is a complex statement because contains a component, here called body, which is a nested statement. Most often the body is a block.
while
Statementdo-while
Statementbreak
Statementfor
Statement- Example of
for
- Omitted
for
-Expressions for
-Index Declarationscontinue
Statement
Next: do-while
Statement, Up: Loop Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6.1 while
Statement
The while
statement is the simplest loop construct.
It looks like this:
while (test) body
Here, body is a statement (often a nested block) to repeat, and test is the test expression that controls whether to repeat it again. Each iteration of the loop starts by computing test and, if it is true (nonzero), that means the loop should execute body again and then start over.
Here’s an example of advancing to the last structure in a chain of
structures chained through the next
field:
#include <stddef.h> /* Defines NULL
. */
…
while (chain->next != NULL)
chain = chain->next;
This code assumes the chain isn’t empty to start with; if the chain is
empty (that is, if chain
is a null pointer), the code gets a
SIGSEGV
signal trying to dereference that null pointer (see Signals).
Next: break
Statement, Previous: while
Statement, Up: Loop Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6.2 do-while
Statement
The do
–while
statement is a simple loop construct that
performs the test at the end of the iteration.
do body while (test);
Here, body is a statement (possibly a block) to repeat, and test is an expression that controls whether to repeat it again.
Each iteration of the loop starts by executing body. Then it computes test and, if it is true (nonzero), that means to go back and start over with body. If test is false (zero), then the loop stops repeating and execution moves on past it.
Next: for
Statement, Previous: do-while
Statement, Up: Loop Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6.3 break
Statement
The break
statement looks like ‘break;’. Its effect is to
exit immediately from the innermost loop construct or switch
statement (see switch
Statement).
For example, this loop advances p
until the next null
character or newline.
while (*p)
{
/* End loop if we have reached a newline. */
if (*p == '\n')
break;
p++
}
When there are nested loops, the break
statement exits from the
innermost loop containing it.
struct list_if_tuples
{
struct list_if_tuples next;
int length;
data *contents;
};
void
process_all_elements (struct list_if_tuples *list)
{
while (list)
{
/* Process all the elements in this node’s vector,
stopping when we reach one that is null. */
for (i = 0; i < list->length; i++
{
/* Null element terminates this node’s vector. */
if (list->contents[i] == NULL)
/* Exit the for
loop. */
break;
/* Operate on the next element. */
process_element (list->contents[i]);
}
list = list->next;
}
}
The only way in C to exit from an outer loop is with
goto
(see goto
Statement and Labels).
Next: Example of for
, Previous: break
Statement, Up: Loop Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6.4 for
Statement
A for
statement uses three expressions written inside a
parenthetical group to define the repetition of the loop. The first
expression says how to prepare to start the loop. The second says how
to test, before each iteration, whether to continue looping. The
third says how to advance, at the end of an iteration, for the next
iteration. All together, it looks like this:
for (start; continue-test; advance) body
The first thing the for
statement does is compute start.
The next thing it does is compute the expression continue-test.
If that expression is false (zero), the for
statement finishes
immediately, so body is executed zero times.
However, if continue-test is true (nonzero), the for
statement executes body, then advance. Then it loops back
to the not-quite-top to test continue-test again. But it does
not compute start again.
Next: Omitted for
-Expressions, Previous: for
Statement, Up: Loop Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6.5 Example of for
Here is the for
statement from the iterative Fibonacci
function:
int i; for (i = 1; i < n; ++i) /* Ifn
is 1 or less, the loop runs zero times, */ /* sincei < n
is false the first time. */ { /* Now last isfib (i)
and prev isfib (i - 1)
. */ /* Computefib (i + 1)
. */ int next = prev + last; /* Shift the values down. */ prev = last; last = next; /* Now last isfib (i + 1)
and prev isfib (i)
. But that won’t stay true for long, because we are about to increment i. */ }
In this example, start is i = 1
, meaning set i
to
1. continue-test is i < n
, meaning keep repeating the
loop as long as i
is less than n
. advance is
i++
, meaning increment i
by 1. The body is a block
that contains a declaration and two statements.
Next: for
-Index Declarations, Previous: Example of for
, Up: Loop Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6.6 Omitted for
-Expressions
A fully-fleshed for
statement contains all these parts,
for (start; continue-test; advance) body
but you can omit any of the three expressions inside the parentheses.
The parentheses and the two semicolons are required syntactically, but
the expressions between them may be missing. A missing expression
means this loop doesn’t use that particular feature of the for
statement.
Instead of using start, you can do the loop preparation
before the for
statement: the effect is the same. So we
could have written the beginning of the previous example this way:
int i = 0; for (; i < n; ++i)
instead of this way:
int i; for (i = 0; i < n; ++i)
Omitting continue-test means the loop runs forever (or until something else causes exit from it). Statements inside the loop can test conditions for termination and use ‘break;’ to exit. This is more flexible since you can put those tests anywhere in the loop, not solely at the beginning.
Putting an expression in advance is almost equivalent to writing
it at the end of the loop body; it does almost the same thing. The
only difference is for the continue
statement (see continue
Statement). So we could have written this:
for (i = 0; i < n;)
{
…
++i;
}
instead of this:
for (i = 0; i < n; ++i)
{
…
}
The choice is mainly a matter of what is more readable for programmers. However, there is also a syntactic difference: advance is an expression, not a statement. It can’t include loops, blocks, declarations, etc.
Next: continue
Statement, Previous: Omitted for
-Expressions, Up: Loop Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6.7 for
-Index Declarations
You can declare loop-index variables directly in the start
portion of the for
-loop, like this:
for (int i = 0; i < n; ++i)
{
…
}
This kind of start is limited to a single declaration; it can
declare one or more variables, separated by commas, all of which are
the same basetype (int
, in this example):
for (int i = 0, j = 1, *p = NULL; i < n; ++i, ++j, ++p)
{
…
}
The scope of these variables is the for
statement as a whole.
See Variable Declarations for a explanation of basetype.
Variables declared in for
statements should have initializers.
Omitting the initialization gives the variables unpredictable initial
values, so this code is erroneous.
for (int i; i < n; ++i)
{
…
}
Previous: for
-Index Declarations, Up: Loop Statements [Contents][Index]
19.6.8 continue
Statement
The continue
statement looks like ‘continue;’, and its
effect is to jump immediately to the end of the innermost loop
construct. If it is a for
-loop, the next thing that happens
is to execute the loop’s advance expression.
For example, this loop increments p
until the next null character
or newline, and operates (in some way not shown) on all the characters
in the line except for spaces. All it does with spaces is skip them.
for (;*p; ++p) { /* End loop if we have reached a newline. */ if (*p == '\n') break; /* Pay no attention to spaces. */ if (*p == ' ') continue; /* Operate on the next character. */ … }
Executing ‘continue;’ skips the loop body but it does not
skip the advance expression, p++
.
We could also write it like this:
for (;*p; ++p) { /* Exit if we have reached a newline. */ if (*p == '\n') break; /* Pay no attention to spaces. */ if (*p != ' ') { /* Operate on the next character. */ … } }
The advantage of using continue
is that it reduces the
depth of nesting.
Contrast continue
with the break
statement. See break
Statement.
Next: Example of switch
, Previous: Loop Statements, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.7 switch
Statement
The switch
statement selects code to run according to the value
of an expression. The expression, in parentheses, follows the keyword
switch
. After that come all the cases to select among,
inside braces. It looks like this:
switch (selector)
{
cases…
}
A case can look like this:
case value: statements break;
which means “come here if selector happens to have the value value,” or like this (a GNU C extension):
case rangestart ... rangeend: statements break;
which means “come here if selector happens to have a value between rangestart and rangeend (inclusive).” See Case Ranges.
The values in case
labels must reduce to integer constants.
They can use arithmetic, and enum
constants, but they cannot
refer to data in memory, because they have to be computed at compile
time. It is an error if two case
labels specify the same
value, or ranges that overlap, or if one is a range and the other is a
value in that range.
You can also define a default case to handle “any other value,” like this:
default: statements break;
If the switch
statement has no default:
label, then it
does nothing when the value matches none of the cases.
The brace-group inside the switch
statement is a block, and you
can declare variables with that scope just as in any other block
(see Blocks). However, initializers in these declarations won’t
necessarily be executed every time the switch
statement runs,
so it is best to avoid giving them initializers.
break;
inside a switch
statement exits immediately from
the switch
statement. See break
Statement.
If there is no break;
at the end of the code for a case,
execution continues into the code for the following case. This
happens more often by mistake than intentionally, but since this
feature is used in real code, we cannot eliminate it.
Warning: When one case is intended to fall through to the next, write a comment like ‘falls through’ to say it’s intentional. That way, other programmers won’t assume it was an error and “fix” it erroneously.
Consecutive case
statements could, pedantically, be considered
an instance of falling through, but we don’t consider or treat them that
way because they won’t confuse anyone.
Next: Duff’s Device, Previous: switch
Statement, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.8 Example of switch
Here’s an example of using the switch
statement
to distinguish among characters:
struct vp { int vowels, punct; };
struct vp
count_vowels_and_punct (char *string)
{
int c;
int vowels = 0;
int punct = 0;
/* Don’t change the parameter itself. */
/* That helps in debugging. */
char *p = string;
struct vp value;
while (c = *p++)
switch (c)
{
case 'y':
case 'Y':
/* We assume y_is_consonant
will check surrounding
letters to determine whether this y is a vowel. */
if (y_is_consonant (p - 1))
break;
/* Falls through */
case 'a':
case 'e':
case 'i':
case 'o':
case 'u':
case 'A':
case 'E':
case 'I':
case 'O':
case 'U':
vowels++;
break;
case '.':
case ',':
case ':':
case ';':
case '?':
case '!':
case '\"':
case '\'':
punct++;
break;
}
value.vowels = vowels;
value.punct = punct;
return value;
}
Next: Case Ranges, Previous: Example of switch
, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.9 Duff’s Device
The cases in a switch
statement can be inside other control
constructs. For instance, we can use a technique known as Duff’s
device to optimize this simple function,
void copy (char *to, char *from, int count) { while (count > 0) *to++ = *from++, count--; }
which copies memory starting at from to memory starting at to.
Duff’s device involves unrolling the loop so that it copies
several characters each time around, and using a switch
statement
to enter the loop body at the proper point:
void copy (char *to, char *from, int count) { if (count <= 0) return; int n = (count + 7) / 8; switch (count % 8) { do { case 0: *to++ = *from++; case 7: *to++ = *from++; case 6: *to++ = *from++; case 5: *to++ = *from++; case 4: *to++ = *from++; case 3: *to++ = *from++; case 2: *to++ = *from++; case 1: *to++ = *from++; } while (--n > 0); } }
Next: Null Statement, Previous: Duff’s Device, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.10 Case Ranges
You can specify a range of consecutive values in a single case
label,
like this:
case low ... high:
This has the same effect as the proper number of individual case
labels, one for each integer value from low to high, inclusive.
This feature is especially useful for ranges of ASCII character codes:
case 'A' ... 'Z':
Be careful: with integers, write spaces around the ...
to prevent it from being parsed wrong. For example, write this:
case 1 ... 5:
rather than this:
case 1...5:
Next: goto
Statement and Labels, Previous: Case Ranges, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.11 Null Statement
A null statement is just a semicolon. It does nothing.
A null statement is a placeholder for use where a statement is
grammatically required, but there is nothing to be done. For
instance, sometimes all the work of a for
-loop is done in the
for
-header itself, leaving no work for the body. Here is an
example that searches for the first newline in array
:
for (p = array; *p != '\n'; p++) ;
Next: Locally Declared Labels, Previous: Null Statement, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.12 goto
Statement and Labels
The goto
statement looks like this:
goto label;
Its effect is to transfer control immediately to another part of the current function—where the label named label is defined.
An ordinary label definition looks like this:
label:
and it can appear before any statement. You can’t use default
as a label, since that has a special meaning for switch
statements.
An ordinary label doesn’t need a separate declaration; defining it is enough.
Here’s an example of using goto
to implement a loop
equivalent to do
–while
:
{ loop_restart: body if (condition) goto loop_restart; }
The name space of labels is separate from that of variables and functions. Thus, there is no error in using a single name in both ways:
{ int foo; // Variablefoo
. foo: // Labelfoo
. body if (foo > 0) // Variablefoo
. goto foo; // Labelfoo
. }
Blocks have no effect on ordinary labels; each label name is defined
throughout the whole of the function it appears in. It looks strange to
jump into a block with goto
, but it works. For example,
if (x < 0) goto negative; if (y < 0) { negative: printf ("Negative\n"); return; }
If the goto jumps into the scope of a variable, it does not
initialize the variable. For example, if x
is negative,
if (x < 0) goto negative; if (y < 0) { int i = 5; negative: printf ("Negative, and i is %d\n", i); return; }
prints junk because i
was not initialized.
If the block declares a variable-length automatic array, jumping into it gives a compilation error. However, jumping out of the scope of a variable-length array works fine, and deallocates its storage.
A label can’t come directly before a declaration, so the code can’t jump directly to one. For example, this is not allowed:
{ goto foo; foo: int x = 5; bar(&x); }
The workaround is to add a statement, even an empty statement, directly after the label. For example:
{ goto foo; foo: ; int x = 5; bar(&x); }
Likewise, a label can’t be the last thing in a block. The workaround solution is the same: add a semicolon after the label.
These unnecessary restrictions on labels make no sense, and ought in
principle to be removed; but they do only a little harm since labels
and goto
are rarely the best way to write a program.
These examples are all artificial; it would be more natural to
write them in other ways, without goto
. For instance,
the clean way to write the example that prints ‘Negative’ is this:
if (x < 0 || y < 0) { printf ("Negative\n"); return; }
It is hard to construct simple examples where goto
is actually
the best way to write a program. Its rare good uses tend to be in
complex code, thus not apt for the purpose of explaining the meaning
of goto
.
The only good time to use goto
is when it makes the code
simpler than any alternative. Jumping backward is rarely desirable,
because usually the other looping and control constructs give simpler
code. Using goto
to jump forward is more often desirable, for
instance when a function needs to do some processing in an error case
and errors can occur at various different places within the function.
Next: Labels as Values, Previous: goto
Statement and Labels, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.13 Locally Declared Labels
In GNU C you can declare local labels in any nested block
scope. A local label is used in a goto
statement just like an
ordinary label, but you can only reference it within the block in
which it was declared.
A local label declaration looks like this:
__label__ label;
or
__label__ label1, label2, …;
Local label declarations must come at the beginning of the block, before any ordinary declarations or statements.
The label declaration declares the label name, but does not define
the label itself. That’s done in the usual way, with
label:
, before one of the statements in the block.
The local label feature is useful for complex macros. If a macro
contains nested loops, a goto
can be useful for breaking out of
them. However, an ordinary label whose scope is the whole function
cannot be used: if the macro can be expanded several times in one
function, the label will be multiply defined in that function. A
local label avoids this problem. For example:
#define SEARCH(value, array, target) \ do { \ __label__ found; \ __auto_type _SEARCH_target = (target); \ __auto_type _SEARCH_array = (array); \ int i, j; \ int value; \ for (i = 0; i < max; i++) \ for (j = 0; j < max; j++) \ if (_SEARCH_array[i][j] == _SEARCH_target) \ { (value) = i; goto found; } \ (value) = -1; \ found:; \ } while (0)
This could also be written using a statement expression (see Statements and Declarations in Expressions):
#define SEARCH(array, target) \ ({ \ __label__ found; \ __auto_type _SEARCH_target = (target); \ __auto_type _SEARCH_array = (array); \ int i, j; \ int value; \ for (i = 0; i < max; i++) \ for (j = 0; j < max; j++) \ if (_SEARCH_array[i][j] == _SEARCH_target) \ { value = i; goto found; } \ value = -1; \ found: \ value; \ })
Ordinary labels are visible throughout the function where they are defined, and only in that function. However, explicitly declared local labels of a block are visible in nested function definitions inside that block. See Nested Functions, for details.
See goto
Statement and Labels.
Next: Statements and Declarations in Expressions, Previous: Locally Declared Labels, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.14 Labels as Values
In GNU C, you can get the address of a label defined in the current
function (or a local label defined in the containing function) with
the unary operator ‘&&’. The value has type void *
. This
value is a constant and can be used wherever a constant of that type
is valid. For example:
void *ptr;
…
ptr = &&foo;
To use these values requires a way to jump to one. This is done
with the computed goto statement5, goto *exp;
. For example,
goto *ptr;
Any expression of type void *
is allowed.
See goto
Statement and Labels.
Next: Label Value Caveats, Up: Labels as Values [Contents][Index]
19.14.1 Label Value Uses
One use for label-valued constants is to initialize a static array to serve as a jump table:
static void *array[] = { &&foo, &&bar, &&hack };
Then you can select a label with indexing, like this:
goto *array[i];
Note that this does not check whether the subscript is in bounds—array indexing in C never checks that.
You can make the table entries offsets instead of addresses by subtracting one label from the others. Here is an example:
static const int array[] = { &&foo - &&foo, &&bar - &&foo, &&hack - &&foo }; goto *(&&foo + array[i]);
Using offsets is preferable in shared libraries, as it avoids the need for dynamic relocation of the array elements; therefore, the array can be read-only.
An array of label values or offsets serves a purpose much like that of
the switch
statement. The switch
statement is cleaner,
so use switch
by preference when feasible.
Another use of label values is in an interpreter for threaded code. The labels within the interpreter function can be stored in the threaded code for super-fast dispatching.
Previous: Label Value Uses, Up: Labels as Values [Contents][Index]
19.14.2 Label Value Caveats
Jumping to a label defined in another function does not work. It can cause unpredictable results.
The best way to avoid this is to store label values only in automatic variables, or static variables whose names are declared within the function. Never pass them as arguments.
An optimization known as cloning generates multiple simplified variants of a function’s code, for use with specific fixed arguments. Using label values in certain ways, such as saving the address in one call to the function and using it again in another call, would make cloning give incorrect results. These functions must disable cloning.
Inlining calls to the function would also result in multiple copies of the code, each with its own value of the same label. Using the label in a computed goto is no problem, because the computed goto inhibits inlining. However, using the label value in some other way, such as an indication of where an error occurred, would be optimized wrong. These functions must disable inlining.
To prevent inlining or cloning of a function, specify
__attribute__((__noinline__,__noclone__))
in its definition.
See Attributes in Declarations.
When a function uses a label value in a static variable initializer, that automatically prevents inlining or cloning the function.
Previous: Labels as Values, Up: Statements [Contents][Index]
19.15 Statements and Declarations in Expressions
A block enclosed in parentheses can be used as an expression in GNU C. This provides a way to use local variables, loops and switches within an expression. We call it a statement expression.
Recall that a block is a sequence of statements surrounded by braces. In this construct, parentheses go around the braces. For example:
({ int y = foo (); int z; if (y > 0) z = y; else z = - y; z; })
is a valid (though slightly more complex than necessary) expression
for the absolute value of foo ()
.
The last statement in the block should be an expression statement; an
expression followed by a semicolon, that is. The value of this
expression serves as the value of statement expression. If the last
statement is anything else, the statement expression’s value is
void
.
This feature is mainly useful in making macro definitions compute each
operand exactly once. See Using __auto_type
for Local Variables.
Statement expressions are not allowed in expressions that must be constant, such as the value for an enumerator, the width of a bit-field, or the initial value of a static variable.
Jumping into a statement expression—with goto
, or using a
switch
statement outside the statement expression—is an
error. With a computed goto
(see Labels as Values), the
compiler can’t detect the error, but it still won’t work.
Jumping out of a statement expression is permitted, but since subexpressions in C are not computed in a strict order, it is unpredictable which other subexpressions will have been computed by then. For example,
foo (), (({ bar1 (); goto a; 0; }) + bar2 ()), baz();
calls foo
and bar1
before it jumps, and never
calls baz
, but may or may not call bar2
. If bar2
does get called, that occurs after foo
and before bar1
.
Next: Type Qualifiers, Previous: Statements, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
20 Variables
Every variable used in a C program needs to be made known by a
declaration. It can be used only after it has been declared.
It is an error to declare a variable name more than once in the same
scope; an exception is that extern
declarations and tentative
definitions can coexist with another declaration of the same
variable.
Variables can be declared anywhere within a block or file. (Older versions of C required that all variable declarations within a block occur before any statements.)
Variables declared within a function or block are local to it. This means that the variable name is visible only until the end of that function or block, and the memory space is allocated only while control is within it.
Variables declared at the top level in a file are called file-scope. They are assigned fixed, distinct memory locations, so they retain their values for the whole execution of the program.
- Variable Declarations
- Initializers
- Designated Initializers
- Referring to a Type with
__auto_type
- Local Variables
- File-Scope Variables
- Static Local Variables
extern
Declarations- Allocating File-Scope Variables
auto
andregister
- Omitting Types in Declarations
Next: Initializers, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.1 Variable Declarations
Here’s what a variable declaration looks like:
keywords basetype decorated-variable [= init];
The keywords specify how to handle the scope of the variable name and the allocation of its storage. Most declarations have no keywords because the defaults are right for them.
C allows these keywords to come before or after basetype, or
even in the middle of it as in unsigned static int
, but don’t
do that—it would surprise other programmers. Always write the
keywords first.
The basetype can be any of the predefined types of C, or a type
keyword defined with typedef
. It can also be struct
tag
, union tag
, or enum tag
. In
addition, it can include type qualifiers such as const
and
volatile
(see Type Qualifiers).
In the simplest case, decorated-variable is just the variable name. That declares the variable with the type specified by basetype. For instance,
int foo;
uses int
as the basetype and foo
as the
decorated-variable. It declares foo
with type
int
.
struct tree_node foo;
declares foo
with type struct tree_node
.
Next: Combining Variable Declarations, Up: Variable Declarations [Contents][Index]
20.1.1 Declaring Arrays and Pointers
To declare a variable that is an array, write
variable[length]
for decorated-variable:
int foo[5];
To declare a variable that has a pointer type, write
*variable
for decorated-variable:
struct list_elt *foo;
These constructs nest. For instance,
int foo[3][5];
declares foo
as an array of 3 arrays of 5 integers each,
struct list_elt *foo[5];
declares foo
as an array of 5 pointers to structures, and
struct list_elt **foo;
declares foo
as a pointer to a pointer to a structure.
int **(*foo[30])(int, double);
declares foo
as an array of 30 pointers to functions
(see Function Pointers), each of which must accept two arguments
(one int
and one double
) and return type int **
.
void
bar (int size)
{
int foo[size];
…
}
declares foo
as an array of integers with a size specified at
run time when the function bar
is called.
Previous: Declaring Arrays and Pointers, Up: Variable Declarations [Contents][Index]
20.1.2 Combining Variable Declarations
When multiple declarations have the same keywords and basetype, you can combine them using commas. Thus,
keywords basetype decorated-variable-1 [= init1], decorated-variable-2 [= init2];
is equivalent to
keywords basetype decorated-variable-1 [= init1]; keywords basetype decorated-variable-2 [= init2];
Here are some simple examples:
int a, b; int a = 1, b = 2; int a, *p, array[5]; int a = 0, *p = &a, array[5] = {1, 2};
In the last two examples, a
is an int
, p
is a
pointer to int
, and array
is an array of 5 int
s.
Since the initializer for array
specifies only two elements,
the other three elements are initialized to zero.
Next: Designated Initializers, Previous: Variable Declarations, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.2 Initializers
A variable’s declaration, unless it is extern
, should also
specify its initial value. For numeric and pointer-type variables,
the initializer is an expression for the value. If necessary, it is
converted to the variable’s type, just as in an assignment.
You can also initialize a local structure-type (see Structures) or local union-type (see Unions) variable this way, from an expression whose value has the same type. But you can’t initialize an array this way (see Arrays), since arrays are not first-class objects in C (see Limitations of C Arrays) and there is no array assignment.
You can initialize arrays and structures componentwise, with a list of the elements or components. You can initialize a union with any one of its alternatives.
- A component-wise initializer for an array consists of element values
surrounded by ‘{…}’. If the values in the initializer
don’t cover all the elements in the array, the remaining elements are
initialized to zero.
You can omit the size of the array when you declare it, and let the initializer specify the size:
int array[] = { 3, 9, 12 };
- A component-wise initializer for a structure consists of field values surrounded by ‘{…}’. Write the field values in the same order as the fields are declared in the structure. If the values in the initializer don’t cover all the fields in the structure, the remaining fields are initialized to zero.
- The initializer for a union-type variable has the form
{ value }
, where value initializes the first alternative in the union definition.
For an array of arrays, a structure containing arrays, an array of structures, etc., you can nest these constructs. For example,
struct point { double x, y; }; struct point series[] = { {0, 0}, {1.5, 2.8}, {99, 100.0004} };
You can omit a pair of inner braces if they contain the right number of elements for the sub-value they initialize, so that no elements or fields need to be filled in with zeros. But don’t do that very much, as it gets confusing.
An array of char
can be initialized using a string constant.
Recall that the string constant includes an implicit null character at
the end (see String Constants). Using a string constant as
initializer means to use its contents as the initial values of the
array elements. Here are examples:
char text[6] = "text!"; /* Includes the null. */ char text[5] = "text!"; /* Excludes the null. */ char text[] = "text!"; /* Gets length 6. */ char text[] = { 't', 'e', 'x', 't', '!', 0 }; /* same as above. */ char text[] = { "text!" }; /* Braces are optional. */
and this kind of initializer can be nested inside braces to initialize
structures or arrays that contain a char
-array.
In like manner, you can use a wide string constant to initialize
an array of wchar_t
.
Next: Referring to a Type with __auto_type
, Previous: Initializers, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.3 Designated Initializers
In a complex structure or long array, it’s useful to indicate which field or element we are initializing.
To designate specific array elements during initialization, include the array index in brackets, and an assignment operator, for each element:
int foo[10] = { [3] = 42, [7] = 58 };
This does the same thing as:
int foo[10] = { 0, 0, 0, 42, 0, 0, 0, 58, 0, 0 };
The array initialization can include non-designated element values alongside designated indices; these follow the expected ordering of the array initialization, so that
int foo[10] = { [3] = 42, 43, 44, [7] = 58 };
does the same thing as:
int foo[10] = { 0, 0, 0, 42, 43, 44, 0, 58, 0, 0 };
Note that you can only use constant expressions as array index values, not variables.
If you need to initialize a subsequence of sequential array elements to the same value, you can specify a range:
int foo[100] = { [0 ... 19] = 42, [20 ... 99] = 43 };
Using a range this way is a GNU C extension.
When subsequence ranges overlap, each element is initialized by the last specification that applies to it. Thus, this initialization is equivalent to the previous one.
int foo[100] = { [0 ... 99] = 43, [0 ... 19] = 42 };
as the second overrides the first for elements 0 through 19.
The value used to initialize a range of elements is evaluated only once, for the first element in the range. So for example, this code
int random_values[100] = { [0 ... 99] = get_random_number() };
would initialize all 100 elements of the array random_values
to
the same value—probably not what is intended.
Similarly, you can initialize specific fields of a structure variable by specifying the field name prefixed with a dot:
struct point { int x; int y; }; struct point foo = { .y = 42; };
The same syntax works for union variables as well:
union int_double { int i; double d; }; union int_double foo = { .d = 34 };
This casts the integer value 34 to a double and stores it
in the union variable foo
.
You can designate both array elements and structure elements in the same initialization; for example, here’s an array of point structures:
struct point point_array[10] = { [4].y = 32, [6].y = 39 };
Along with the capability to specify particular array and structure elements to initialize comes the possibility of initializing the same element more than once:
int foo[10] = { [4] = 42, [4] = 98 };
In such a case, the last initialization value is retained.
Next: Local Variables, Previous: Designated Initializers, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.4 Referring to a Type with __auto_type
You can declare a variable copying the type from
the initializer by using __auto_type
instead of a particular type.
Here’s an example:
#define max(a,b) \ ({ __auto_type _a = (a); \ __auto_type _b = (b); \ _a > _b ? _a : _b })
This defines _a
to be of the same type as a
, and
_b
to be of the same type as b
. This is a useful thing
to do in a macro that ought to be able to handle any type of data
(see Using __auto_type
for Local Variables).
The original GNU C method for obtaining the type of a value is to use
typeof
, which takes as an argument either a value or the name of
a type. The previous example could also be written as:
#define max(a,b) \ ({ typeof(a) _a = (a); \ typeof(b) _b = (b); \ _a > _b ? _a : _b })
typeof
is more flexible than __auto_type
; however, the
principal use case for typeof
is in variable declarations with
initialization, which is exactly what __auto_type
handles.
Next: File-Scope Variables, Previous: Referring to a Type with __auto_type
, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.5 Local Variables
Declaring a variable inside a function definition (see Function Definitions) makes the variable name local to the containing block—that is, the containing pair of braces. More precisely, the variable’s name is visible starting just after where it appears in the declaration, and its visibility continues until the end of the block.
Local variables in C are generally automatic variables: each variable’s storage exists only from the declaration to the end of the block. Execution of the declaration allocates the storage, computes the initial value, and stores it in the variable. The end of the block deallocates the storage.6
Warning: Two declarations for the same local variable in the same scope are an error.
Warning: Automatic variables are stored in the run-time stack. The total space for the program’s stack may be limited; therefore, in using very large arrays, it may be necessary to allocate them in some other way to stop the program from crashing.
Warning: If the declaration of an automatic variable does not specify an initial value, the variable starts out containing garbage. In this example, the value printed could be anything at all:
{ int i; printf ("Print junk %d\n", i); }
In a simple test program, that statement is likely to print 0, simply because every process starts with memory zeroed. But don’t rely on it to be zero—that is erroneous.
Note: Make sure to store a value into each local variable (by assignment, or by initialization) before referring to its value.
Next: Static Local Variables, Previous: Local Variables, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.6 File-Scope Variables
A variable declaration at the top level in a file (not inside a function definition) declares a file-scope variable. Loading a program allocates the storage for all the file-scope variables in it, and initializes them too.
Each file-scope variable is either static (limited to one
compilation module) or global (shared with all compilation
modules in the program). To make the variable static, write the
keyword static
at the start of the declaration. Omitting
static
makes the variable global.
The initial value for a file-scope variable can’t depend on the contents of storage, and can’t call any functions.
int foo = 5; /* Valid. */ int bar = foo; /* Invalid! */ int bar = sin (1.0); /* Invalid! */
But it can use the address of another file-scope variable:
int foo; int *bar = &foo; /* Valid. */ int arr[5]; int *bar3 = &arr[3]; /* Valid. */ int *bar4 = arr + 4; /* Valid. */
It is valid for a module to have multiple declarations for a file-scope variable, as long as they are all global or all static, but at most one declaration can specify an initial value for it.
Next: extern
Declarations, Previous: File-Scope Variables, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.7 Static Local Variables
The keyword static
in a local variable declaration says to
allocate the storage for the variable permanently, just like a
file-scope variable, even if the declaration is within a function.
Here’s an example:
int increment_counter () { static int counter = 0; return ++counter; }
The scope of the name counter
runs from the declaration to the
end of the containing block, just like an automatic local variable,
but its storage is permanent, so the value persists from one call to
the next. As a result, each call to increment_counter
returns a different, unique value.
The initial value of a static local variable has the same limitations as for file-scope variables: it can’t depend on the contents of storage or call any functions. It can use the address of a file-scope variable or a static local variable, because those addresses are determined before the program runs.
Next: Allocating File-Scope Variables, Previous: Static Local Variables, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.8 extern
Declarations
An extern
declaration is used to refer to a global variable
whose principal declaration comes elsewhere—in the same module, or in
another compilation module. It looks like this:
extern basetype decorated-variable;
Its meaning is that, in the current scope, the variable name refers to
the file-scope variable of that name—which needs to be declared in a
non-extern
, non-static
way somewhere else.
For instance, if one compilation module has this global variable declaration
int error_count = 0;
then other compilation modules can specify this
extern int error_count;
to allow reference to the same variable.
The usual place to write an extern
declaration is at top level
in a source file, but you can write an extern
declaration
inside a block to make a global or static file-scope variable
accessible in that block.
Since an extern
declaration does not allocate space for the
variable, it can omit the size of an array:
extern int array[];
You can use array
normally in all contexts where it is
converted automatically to a pointer. However, to use it as the
operand of sizeof
is an error, since the size is unknown.
It is valid to have multiple extern
declarations for the same
variable, even in the same scope, if they give the same type. They do
not conflict—they agree. For an array, it is legitimate for some
extern
declarations can specify the size while others omit it.
However, if two declarations give different sizes, that is an error.
Likewise, you can use extern
declarations at file scope
(see File-Scope Variables) followed by an ordinary global
(non-static) declaration of the same variable. They do not conflict,
because they say compatible things about the same meaning of the variable.
Next: auto
and register
, Previous: extern
Declarations, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.9 Allocating File-Scope Variables
Some file-scope declarations allocate space for the variable, and some don’t.
A file-scope declaration with an initial value must allocate space for the variable; if there are two of such declarations for the same variable, even in different compilation modules, they conflict.
An extern
declaration never allocates space for the variable.
If all the top-level declarations of a certain variable are
extern
, the variable never gets memory space. If that variable
is used anywhere in the program, the use will be reported as an error,
saying that the variable is not defined.
A file-scope declaration without an initial value is called a tentative definition. This is a strange hybrid: it can allocate space for the variable, but does not insist. So it causes no conflict, no error, if the variable has another declaration that allocates space for it, perhaps in another compilation module. But if nothing else allocates space for the variable, the tentative definition will do it. Any number of compilation modules can declare the same variable in this way, and that is sufficient for all of them to use the variable.
In programs that are very large or have many contributors, it may be wise to adopt the convention of never using tentative definitions. You can use the compilation option -fno-common to make them an error, or --warn-common to warn about them.
If a file-scope variable gets its space through a tentative definition, it starts out containing all zeros.
Next: Omitting Types in Declarations, Previous: Allocating File-Scope Variables, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.10 auto
and register
For historical reasons, you can write auto
or register
before a local variable declaration. auto
merely emphasizes
that the variable isn’t static; it changes nothing.
register
suggests to the compiler storing this variable in a
register. However, GNU C ignores this suggestion, since it can
choose the best variables to store in registers without any hints.
It is an error to take the address of a variable declared
register
, so you cannot use the unary ‘&’ operator on it.
If the variable is an array, you can’t use it at all (other than as
the operand of sizeof
), which makes it rather useless.
Previous: auto
and register
, Up: Variables [Contents][Index]
20.11 Omitting Types in Declarations
The syntax of C traditionally allows omitting the data type in a
declaration if it specifies a storage class, a type qualifier (see the
next chapter), or auto
or register
. Then the type
defaults to int
. For example:
auto foo = 42;
This is bad practice; if you see it, fix it.
Next: Functions, Previous: Variables, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
21 Type Qualifiers
A declaration can include type qualifiers to advise the compiler
about how the variable will be used. There are three different
qualifiers, const
, volatile
and restrict
. They
pertain to different issues, so you can use more than one together.
For instance, const volatile
describes a value that the
program is not allowed to change, but might have a different value
each time the program examines it. (This might perhaps be a special
hardware register, or part of shared memory.)
If you are just learning C, you can skip this chapter.
const
Variables and Fieldsvolatile
Variables and Fieldsrestrict
-Qualified Pointersrestrict
Pointer Example
Next: volatile
Variables and Fields, Up: Type Qualifiers [Contents][Index]
21.1 const
Variables and Fields
You can mark a variable as “constant” by writing const
in
front of the declaration. This says to treat any assignment to that
variable as an error. It may also permit some compiler
optimizations—for instance, to fetch the value only once to satisfy
multiple references to it. The construct looks like this:
const double pi = 3.14159;
After this definition, the code can use the variable pi
but cannot assign a different value to it.
pi = 3.0; /* Error! */
Simple variables that are constant can be used for the same purposes as enumeration constants, and they are not limited to integers. The constantness of the variable propagates into pointers, too.
A pointer type can specify that the target is constant. For
example, the pointer type const double *
stands for a pointer
to a constant double
. That’s the type that results from taking
the address of pi
. Such a pointer can’t be dereferenced in the
left side of an assignment.
*(&pi) = 3.0; /* Error! */
Nonconstant pointers can be converted automatically to constant pointers, but not vice versa. For instance,
const double *cptr; double *ptr; cptr = π /* Valid. */ cptr = ptr; /* Valid. */ ptr = cptr; /* Error! */ ptr = π /* Error! */
This is not an ironclad protection against modifying the value. You can always cast the constant pointer to a nonconstant pointer type:
ptr = (double *)cptr; /* Valid. */ ptr = (double *)π /* Valid. */
However, const
provides a way to show that a certain function
won’t modify the data structure whose address is passed to it. Here’s
an example:
int string_length (const char *string) { int count = 0; while (*string++) count++; return count; }
Using const char *
for the parameter is a way of saying this
function never modifies the memory of the string itself.
In calling string_length
, you can specify an ordinary
char *
since that can be converted automatically to const
char *
.
Next: restrict
-Qualified Pointers, Previous: const
Variables and Fields, Up: Type Qualifiers [Contents][Index]
21.2 volatile
Variables and Fields
The GNU C compiler often performs optimizations that eliminate the need to write or read a variable. For instance,
int foo; foo = 1; foo++;
might simply store the value 2 into foo
, without ever storing 1.
These optimizations can also apply to structure fields in some cases.
If the memory containing foo
is shared with another program,
or if it is examined asynchronously by hardware, such optimizations
could confuse the communication. Using volatile
is one way
to prevent them.
Writing volatile
with the type in a variable or field declaration
says that the value may be examined or changed for reasons outside the
control of the program at any moment. Therefore, the program must
execute in a careful way to assure correct interaction with those
accesses, whenever they may occur.
The simplest use looks like this:
volatile int lock;
This directs the compiler not to do certain common optimizations on
use of the variable lock
. All the reads and writes for a volatile
variable or field are really done, and done in the order specified
by the source code. Thus, this code:
lock = 1; list = list->next; if (lock) lock_broken (&lock); lock = 0;
really stores the value 1 in lock
, even though there is no
sign it is really used, and the if
statement reads and
checks the value of lock
, rather than assuming it is still 1.
A limited amount of optimization can be done, in principle, on
volatile
variables and fields: multiple references between two
sequence points (see Sequence Points) can be simplified together.
Use of volatile
does not eliminate the flexibility in ordering
the computation of the operands of most operators. For instance, in
lock + foo ()
, the order of accessing lock
and calling
foo
is not specified, so they may be done in either order; the
fact that lock
is volatile
has no effect on that.
Next: restrict
Pointer Example, Previous: volatile
Variables and Fields, Up: Type Qualifiers [Contents][Index]
21.3 restrict
-Qualified Pointers
You can declare a pointer as “restricted” using the restrict
type qualifier, like this:
int *restrict p = x;
This enables better optimization of code that uses the pointer.
If p
is declared with restrict
, and then the code
references the object that p
points to (using *p
or
p[i]
), the restrict
declaration promises that the
code will not access that object in any other way—only through
p
.
For instance, it means the code must not use another pointer to access the same space, as shown here:
int *restrict p = whatever; int *q = p; foo (*p, *q);
That contradicts the restrict
promise by accessing the object
that p
points to using q
, which bypasses p
.
Likewise, it must not do this:
int *restrict p = whatever; struct { int *a, *b; } s; s.a = p; foo (*p, *s.a);
This example uses a structure field instead of the variable q
to hold the other pointer, and that contradicts the promise just the
same.
The keyword restrict
also promises that p
won’t point to
the allocated space of any automatic or static variable. So the code
must not do this:
int a; int *restrict p = &a; foo (*p, a);
because that does direct access to the object (a
) that p
points to, which bypasses p
.
If the code makes such promises with restrict
then breaks them,
execution is unpredictable.
Previous: restrict
-Qualified Pointers, Up: Type Qualifiers [Contents][Index]
21.4 restrict
Pointer Example
Here are examples where restrict
enables real optimization.
In this example, restrict
assures GCC that the array out
points to does not overlap with the array in
points to.
void process_data (const char *in, char * restrict out, size_t size) { for (i = 0; i < size; i++) out[i] = in[i] + in[i + 1]; }
Here’s a simple tree structure, where each tree node holds data of
type PAYLOAD
plus two subtrees.
struct foo { PAYLOAD payload; struct foo *left; struct foo *right; };
Now here’s a function to null out both pointers in the left
subtree.
void null_left (struct foo *a) { a->left->left = NULL; a->left->right = NULL; }
Since *a
and *a->left
have the same data type,
they could legitimately alias (see Aliasing). Therefore,
the compiled code for null_left
must read a->left
again from memory when executing the second assignment statement.
We can enable optimization, so that it does not need to read
a->left
again, by writing null_left
in a less
obvious way.
void null_left (struct foo *a) { struct foo *b = a->left; b->left = NULL; b->right = NULL; }
A more elegant way to fix this is with restrict
.
void null_left (struct foo *restrict a) { a->left->left = NULL; a->left->right = NULL; }
Declaring a
as restrict
asserts that other pointers such
as a->left
will not point to the same memory space as a
.
Therefore, the memory location a->left->left
cannot be the same
memory as a->left
. Knowing this, the compiled code may avoid
reloading a->left
for the second statement.
Next: Compatible Types, Previous: Type Qualifiers, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
22 Functions
We have already presented many examples of functions, so if you’ve read this far, you basically understand the concept of a function. It is vital, nonetheless, to have a chapter in the manual that collects all the information about functions.
- Function Definitions
- Function Declarations
- Function Calls
- Function Call Semantics
- Function Pointers
- The
main
Function - Advanced Function Features
- Obsolete Function Features
Next: Function Declarations, Up: Functions [Contents][Index]
22.1 Function Definitions
We have already presented many examples of function definitions. To summarize the rules, a function definition looks like this:
returntype
functionname (parm_declarations…)
{
body
}
The part before the open-brace is called the function header.
Write void
as the returntype if the function does
not return a value.
- Function Parameter Variables
- Forward Function Declarations
- Static Functions
- Arrays as Parameters
- Functions That Accept Structure Arguments
Next: Forward Function Declarations, Up: Function Definitions [Contents][Index]
22.1.1 Function Parameter Variables
A function parameter variable is a local variable (see Local Variables) used within the function to store the value passed as an argument in a call to the function. Usually we say “function parameter” or “parameter” for short, not mentioning the fact that it’s a variable.
We declare these variables in the beginning of the function definition, in the parameter list. For example,
fib (int n)
has a parameter list with one function parameter n
, which has
type int
.
Function parameter declarations differ from ordinary variable declarations in several ways:
- Inside the function definition header, commas separate parameter
declarations, and each parameter needs a complete declaration
including the type. For instance, if a function
foo
has twoint
parameters, write this:foo (int a, int b)
You can’t share the common
int
between the two declarations:foo (int a, b) /* Invalid! */
- A function parameter variable is initialized to whatever value is passed in the function call, so its declaration cannot specify an initial value.
- Writing an array type in a function parameter declaration has the
effect of declaring it as a pointer. The size specified for the array
has no effect at all, and we normally omit the size. Thus,
foo (int a[5]) foo (int a[]) foo (int *a)
are equivalent.
- The scope of the parameter variables is the entire function body, notwithstanding the fact that they are written in the function header, which is just outside the function body.
If a function has no parameters, it would be most natural for the list of parameters in its definition to be empty. But that, in C, has a special meaning for historical reasons: “Do not check that calls to this function have the right number of arguments.” Thus,
int foo () { return 5; } int bar (int x) { return foo (x); }
would not report a compilation error in passing x
as an
argument to foo
. By contrast,
int foo (void) { return 5; } int bar (int x) { return foo (x); }
would report an error because foo
is supposed to receive
no arguments.
Next: Static Functions, Previous: Function Parameter Variables, Up: Function Definitions [Contents][Index]
22.1.2 Forward Function Declarations
The order of the function definitions in the source code makes no difference, except that each function needs to be defined or declared before code uses it.
The definition of a function also declares its name for the rest of the containing scope. But what if you want to call the function before its definition? To permit that, write a compatible declaration of the same function, before the first call. A declaration that prefigures a subsequent definition in this way is called a forward declaration. The function declaration can be at top level or within a block, and it applies until the end of the containing scope.
See Function Declarations, for more information about these declarations.
Next: Arrays as Parameters, Previous: Forward Function Declarations, Up: Function Definitions [Contents][Index]
22.1.3 Static Functions
The keyword static
in a function definition limits the
visibility of the name to the current compilation module. (That’s the
same thing static
does in variable declarations;
see File-Scope Variables.) For instance, if one compilation module
contains this code:
static int
foo (void)
{
…
}
then the code of that compilation module can call foo
anywhere
after the definition, but other compilation modules cannot refer to it
at all.
To call foo
before its definition, it needs a forward
declaration, which should use static
since the function
definition does. For this function, it looks like this:
static int foo (void);
It is generally wise to use static
on the definitions of
functions that won’t be called from outside the same compilation
module. This makes sure that calls are not added in other modules.
If programmers decide to change the function’s calling convention, or
understand all the consequences of its use, they will only have to
check for calls in the same compilation module.
Next: Functions That Accept Structure Arguments, Previous: Static Functions, Up: Function Definitions [Contents][Index]
22.1.4 Arrays as Parameters
Arrays in C are not first-class objects: it is impossible to copy them. So they cannot be passed as arguments like other values. See Limitations of C Arrays. Rather, array parameters work in a special way.
Next: Passing array arguments, Up: Arrays as Parameters [Contents][Index]
22.1.4.1 Array parameters are pointers
Declaring a function parameter variable as an array really gives it a pointer type. C does this because an expression with array type, if used as an argument in a function call, is converted automatically to a pointer (to the zeroth element of the array). If you declare the corresponding parameter as an “array”, it will work correctly with the pointer value that really gets passed.
This relates to the fact that C does not check array bounds in access to elements of the array (see Accessing Array Elements).
For example, in this function,
void clobber4 (int array[20]) { array[4] = 0; }
the parameter array
’s real type is int *
; the specified
length, 20, has no effect on the program. You can leave out the length
and write this:
void clobber4 (int array[]) { array[4] = 0; }
or write the parameter declaration explicitly as a pointer:
void clobber4 (int *array) { array[4] = 0; }
They are all equivalent.
Next: Type qualifiers on array parameters, Previous: Array parameters are pointers, Up: Arrays as Parameters [Contents][Index]
22.1.4.2 Passing array arguments
The function call passes this pointer by
value, like all argument values in C. However, the result is
paradoxical in that the array itself is passed by reference: its
contents are treated as shared memory—shared between the caller and
the called function, that is. When clobber4
assigns to element
4 of array
, the effect is to alter element 4 of the array
specified in the call.
#include <stddef.h> /* DefinesNULL
. */ #include <stdlib.h> /* Declaresmalloc
, */ /* DefinesEXIT_SUCCESS
. */ int main (void) { int data[] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}; int i; /* Show the initial value of element 4. */ for (i = 0; i < 6; i++) printf ("data[%d] = %d\n", i, data[i]); printf ("\n"); clobber4 (data); /* Show that element 4 has been changed. */ for (i = 0; i < 6; i++) printf ("data[%d] = %d\n", i, data[i]); printf ("\n"); return EXIT_SUCCESS; }
shows that data[4]
has become zero after the call to
clobber4
.
The array data
has 6 elements, but passing it to a function
whose argument type is written as int [20]
is not an error,
because that really stands for int *
. The pointer that is the
real argument carries no indication of the length of the array it
points into. It is not required to point to the beginning of the
array, either. For instance,
clobber4 (data+1);
passes an “array” that starts at element 1 of data
, and the
effect is to zero data[5]
instead of data[4]
.
If all calls to the function will provide an array of a particular
size, you can specify the size of the array to be static
:
void
clobber4 (int array[static 20])
…
This is a promise to the compiler that the function will always be called with an array of 20 elements, so that the compiler can optimize code accordingly. If the code breaks this promise and calls the function with, for example, a shorter array, unpredictable things may happen.
Previous: Passing array arguments, Up: Arrays as Parameters [Contents][Index]
22.1.4.3 Type qualifiers on array parameters
You can use the type qualifiers const
, restrict
, and
volatile
with array parameters; for example:
void
clobber4 (volatile int array[20])
…
denotes that array
is equivalent to a pointer to a volatile
int
. Alternatively:
void
clobber4 (int array[const 20])
…
makes the array parameter equivalent to a constant pointer to an
int
. If we want the clobber4
function to succeed, it
would not make sense to write
void
clobber4 (const int array[20])
…
as this would tell the compiler that the parameter should point to an
array of constant int
values, and then we would not be able to
store zeros in them.
In a function with multiple array parameters, you can use restrict
to tell the compiler that each array parameter passed in will be distinct:
void
foo (int array1[restrict 10], int array2[restrict 10])
…
Using restrict
promises the compiler that callers will
not pass in the same array for more than one restrict
array
parameter. Knowing this enables the compiler to perform better code
optimization. This is the same effect as using restrict
pointers (see restrict
-Qualified Pointers), but makes it clear when reading
the code that an array of a specific size is expected.
Previous: Arrays as Parameters, Up: Function Definitions [Contents][Index]
22.1.5 Functions That Accept Structure Arguments
Structures in GNU C are first-class objects, so using them as function
parameters and arguments works in the natural way. This function
swapfoo
takes a struct foo
with two fields as argument,
and returns a structure of the same type but with the fields
exchanged.
struct foo { int a, b; }; struct foo x; struct foo swapfoo (struct foo inval) { struct foo outval; outval.a = inval.b; outval.b = inval.a; return outval; }
This simpler definition of swapfoo
avoids using a local
variable to hold the result about to be return, by using a structure
constructor (see Structure Constructors), like this:
struct foo swapfoo (struct foo inval) { return (struct foo) { inval.b, inval.a }; }
It is valid to define a structure type in a function’s parameter list, as in
int frob_bar (struct bar { int a, b; } inval) { body }
and body can access the fields of inval since the
structure type struct bar
is defined for the whole function
body. However, there is no way to create a struct bar
argument
to pass to frob_bar
, except with kludges. As a result,
defining a structure type in a parameter list is useless in practice.
Next: Function Calls, Previous: Function Definitions, Up: Functions [Contents][Index]
22.2 Function Declarations
To call a function, or use its name as a pointer, a function declaration for the function name must be in effect at that point in the code. The function’s definition serves as a declaration of that function for the rest of the containing scope, but to use the function in code before the definition, or from another compilation module, a separate function declaration must precede the use.
A function declaration looks like the start of a function definition.
It begins with the return value type (void
if none) and the
function name, followed by argument declarations in parentheses
(though these can sometimes be omitted). But that’s as far as the
similarity goes: instead of the function body, the declaration uses a
semicolon.
A declaration that specifies argument types is called a function prototype. You can include the argument names or omit them. The names, if included in the declaration, have no effect, but they may serve as documentation.
This form of prototype specifies fixed argument types:
rettype function (argtypes…);
This form says the function takes no arguments:
rettype function (void);
This form declares types for some arguments, and allows additional arguments whose types are not specified:
rettype function (argtypes…, ...);
For a parameter that’s an array of variable length, you can write its declaration with ‘*’ where the “length” of the array would normally go; for example, these are all equivalent.
double maximum (int n, int m, double a[n][m]); double maximum (int n, int m, double a[*][*]); double maximum (int n, int m, double a[ ][*]); double maximum (int n, int m, double a[ ][m]);
The old-fashioned form of declaration, which is not a prototype, says nothing about the types of arguments or how many they should be:
rettype function ();
Warning: Arguments passed to a function declared without a prototype are converted with the default argument promotions (see Argument Promotions. Likewise for additional arguments whose types are unspecified.
Function declarations are usually written at the top level in a source file, but you can also put them inside code blocks. Then the function name is visible for the rest of the containing scope. For example:
void foo (char *file_name) { void save_file (char *); save_file (file_name); }
If another part of the code tries to call the function
save_file
, this declaration won’t be in effect there. So the
function will get an implicit declaration of the form extern int
save_file ();
. That conflicts with the explicit declaration
here, and the discrepancy generates a warning.
The syntax of C traditionally allows omitting the data type in a
function declaration if it specifies a storage class or a qualifier.
Then the type defaults to int
. For example:
static foo (double x);
defaults the return type to int
.
This is bad practice; if you see it, fix it.
Calling a function that is undeclared has the effect of an creating implicit declaration in the innermost containing scope, equivalent to this:
extern int function ();
This declaration says that the function returns int
but leaves
its argument types unspecified. If that does not accurately fit the
function, then the program needs an explicit declaration of
the function with argument types in order to call it correctly.
Implicit declarations are deprecated, and a function call that creates one causes a warning.
Next: Function Call Semantics, Previous: Function Declarations, Up: Functions [Contents][Index]
22.3 Function Calls
Starting a program automatically calls the function named main
(see The main
Function). Aside from that, a function does nothing
except when it is called. That occurs during the execution of a
function-call expression specifying that function.
A function-call expression looks like this:
function (arguments…)
Most of the time, function is a function name. However, it can also be an expression with a function pointer value; that way, the program can determine at run time which function to call.
The arguments are a series of expressions separated by commas. Each expression specifies one argument to pass to the function.
The list of arguments in a function call looks just like use of the comma operator (see Comma Operator), but the fact that it fills the parentheses of a function call gives it a different meaning.
Here’s an example of a function call, taken from an example near the beginning (see A Complete Program).
printf ("Fibonacci series item %d is %d\n", 19, fib (19));
The three arguments given to printf
are a constant string, the
integer 19, and the integer returned by fib (19)
.
Next: Function Pointers, Previous: Function Calls, Up: Functions [Contents][Index]
22.4 Function Call Semantics
The meaning of a function call is to compute the specified argument expressions, convert their values according to the function’s declaration, then run the function giving it copies of the converted values. (This method of argument passing is known as call-by-value.) When the function finishes, the value it returns becomes the value of the function-call expression.
Call-by-value implies that an assignment to the function argument variable has no direct effect on the caller. For instance,
#include <stdlib.h> /* DefinesEXIT_SUCCESS
. */ #include <stdio.h> /* Declaresprintf
. */ void subroutine (int x) { x = 5; } void main (void) { int y = 20; subroutine (y); printf ("y is %d\n", y); return EXIT_SUCCESS; }
prints ‘y is 20’. Calling subroutine
initializes x
from the value of y
, but this does not establish any other
relationship between the two variables. Thus, the assignment to
x
, inside subroutine
, changes only that x
.
If an argument’s type is specified by the function’s declaration, the function call converts the argument expression to that type if possible. If the conversion is impossible, that is an error.
If the function’s declaration doesn’t specify the type of that argument, then the default argument promotions apply. See Argument Promotions.
Next: The main
Function, Previous: Function Call Semantics, Up: Functions [Contents][Index]
22.5 Function Pointers
A function name refers to a fixed function. Sometimes it is useful to call a function to be determined at run time; to do this, you can use a function pointer value that points to the chosen function (see Pointers).
Pointer-to-function types can be used to declare variables and other
data, including array elements, structure fields, and union
alternatives. They can also be used for function arguments and return
values. These types have the peculiarity that they are never
converted automatically to void *
or vice versa. However, you
can do that conversion with a cast.
Next: Assigning Function Pointers, Up: Function Pointers [Contents][Index]
22.5.1 Declaring Function Pointers
The declaration of a function pointer variable (or structure field)
looks almost like a function declaration, except it has an additional
‘*’ just before the variable name. Proper nesting requires a
pair of parentheses around the two of them. For instance, int
(*a) ();
says, “Declare a
as a pointer such that *a
is
an int
-returning function.”
Contrast these three declarations:
/* Declare a function returningchar *
. */ char *a (char *); /* Declare a pointer to a function returningchar
. */ char (*a) (char *); /* Declare a pointer to a function returningchar *
. */ char *(*a) (char *);
The possible argument types of the function pointed to are the same as in a function declaration. You can write a prototype that specifies all the argument types:
rettype (*function) (arguments…);
or one that specifies some and leaves the rest unspecified:
rettype (*function) (arguments…, ...);
or one that says there are no arguments:
rettype (*function) (void);
You can also write a non-prototype declaration that says nothing about the argument types:
rettype (*function) ();
For example, here’s a declaration for a variable that should
point to some arithmetic function that operates on two double
s:
double (*binary_op) (double, double);
Structure fields, union alternatives, and array elements can be function pointers; so can parameter variables. The function pointer declaration construct can also be combined with other operators allowed in declarations. For instance,
int **(*foo)();
declares foo
as a pointer to a function that returns
type int **
, and
int **(*foo[30])();
declares foo
as an array of 30 pointers to functions that
return type int **
.
int **(**foo)();
declares foo
as a pointer to a pointer to a function that
returns type int **
.
Next: Calling Function Pointers, Previous: Declaring Function Pointers, Up: Function Pointers [Contents][Index]
22.5.2 Assigning Function Pointers
Assuming we have declared the variable binary_op
as in the
previous section, giving it a value requires a suitable function to
use. So let’s define a function suitable for the variable to point
to. Here’s one:
double double_add (double a, double b) { return a+b; }
Now we can give it a value:
binary_op = double_add;
The target type of the function pointer must be upward compatible with the type of the function (see Compatible Types).
There is no need for ‘&’ in front of double_add
.
Using a function name such as double_add
as an expression
automatically converts it to the function’s address, with the
appropriate function pointer type. However, it is ok to use
‘&’ if you feel that is clearer:
binary_op = &double_add;
Previous: Assigning Function Pointers, Up: Function Pointers [Contents][Index]
22.5.3 Calling Function Pointers
To call the function specified by a function pointer, just write the
function pointer value in a function call. For instance, here’s a
call to the function binary_op
points to:
binary_op (x, 5)
Since the data type of binary_op
explicitly specifies type
double
for the arguments, the call converts x
and 5 to
double
.
The call conceptually dereferences the pointer binary_op
to
“get” the function it points to, and calls that function. If you
wish, you can explicitly represent the dereference by writing the
*
operator:
(*binary_op) (x, 5)
The ‘*’ reminds people reading the code that binary_op
is
a function pointer rather than the name of a specific function.
Next: Advanced Function Features, Previous: Function Pointers, Up: Functions [Contents][Index]
22.6 The main
Function
Every complete executable program requires at least one function,
called main
, which is where execution begins. You do not have
to explicitly declare main
, though GNU C permits you to do so.
Conventionally, main
should be defined to follow one of these
calling conventions:
int main (void) {…} int main (int argc, char *argv[]) {…} int main (int argc, char *argv[], char *envp[]) {…}
Using void
as the parameter list means that main
does
not use the arguments. You can write char **argv
instead of
char *argv[]
, and likewise for envp
, as the two
constructs are equivalent.
You can call main
from C code, as you can call any other
function, though that is an unusual thing to do. When you do that,
you must write the call to pass arguments that match the parameters in
the definition of main
.
The main
function is not actually the first code that runs when
a program starts. In fact, the first code that runs is system code
from the file crt0.o. In Unix, this was hand-written assembler
code, but in GNU we replaced it with C code. Its job is to find
the arguments for main
and call that.
Next: Accessing Command-line Parameters, Up: The main
Function [Contents][Index]
22.6.1 Returning Values from main
When main
returns, the process terminates. Whatever value
main
returns becomes the exit status which is reported to the
parent process. While nominally the return value is of type
int
, in fact the exit status gets truncated to eight bits; if
main
returns the value 256, the exit status is 0.
Normally, programs return only one of two values: 0 for success,
and 1 for failure. For maximum portability, use the macro
values EXIT_SUCCESS
and EXIT_FAILURE
defined in
stdlib.h
. Here’s an example:
#include <stdlib.h> /* DefinesEXIT_SUCCESS
*/ /* andEXIT_FAILURE
. */ int main (void) { … if (foo) return EXIT_SUCCESS; else return EXIT_FAILURE; }
Some types of programs maintain special conventions for various return
values; for example, comparison programs including cmp
and
diff
return 1 to indicate a mismatch, and 2 to indicate that
the comparison couldn’t be performed.
Next: Accessing Environment Variables, Previous: Returning Values from main
, Up: The main
Function [Contents][Index]
22.6.2 Accessing Command-line Parameters
If the program was invoked with any command-line arguments, it can
access them through the arguments of main
, argc
and
argv
. (You can give these arguments any names, but the names
argc
and argv
are customary.)
The value of argv
is an array containing all of the
command-line arguments as strings, with the name of the command
invoked as the first string. argc
is an integer that says how
many strings argv
contains. Here is an example of accessing
the command-line parameters, retrieving the program’s name and
checking for the standard --version and --help options:
#include <string.h> /* Declare strcmp
. */
int
main (int argc, char *argv[])
{
char *program_name = argv[0];
for (int i = 1; i < argc; i++)
{
if (!strcmp (argv[i], "--version"))
{
/* Print version information and exit. */
…
}
else if (!strcmp (argv[i], "--help"))
{
/* Print help information and exit. */
…
}
}
…
}
Previous: Accessing Command-line Parameters, Up: The main
Function [Contents][Index]
22.6.3 Accessing Environment Variables
You can optionally include a third parameter to main
, another
array of strings, to capture the environment variables available to
the program. Unlike what happens with argv
, there is no
additional parameter for the count of environment variables; rather,
the array of environment variables concludes with a null pointer.
#include <stdio.h> /* Declares printf
. */
int
main (int argc, char *argv[], char *envp[])
{
/* Print out all environment variables. */
int i = 0;
while (envp[i])
{
printf ("%s\n", envp[i]);
i++;
}
}
Another method of retrieving environment variables is to use the
library function getenv
, which is defined in stdlib.h
.
Using getenv
does not require defining main
to accept the
envp
pointer. For example, here is a program that fetches and prints
the user’s home directory (if defined):
#include <stdlib.h> /* Declaresgetenv
. */ #include <stdio.h> /* Declaresprintf
. */ int main (void) { char *home_directory = getenv ("HOME"); if (home_directory) printf ("My home directory is: %s\n", home_directory); else printf ("My home directory is not defined!\n"); }
Next: Obsolete Function Features, Previous: The main
Function, Up: Functions [Contents][Index]
22.7 Advanced Function Features
This section describes some advanced or obscure features for GNU C function definitions. If you are just learning C, you can skip the rest of this chapter.
- Variable-Length Array Parameters
- Variable-Length Parameter Lists
- Nested Functions
- Inline Function Definitions
22.7.1 Variable-Length Array Parameters
An array parameter can have variable length: simply declare the array type with a size that isn’t constant. In a nested function, the length can refer to a variable defined in a containing scope. In any function, it can refer to a previous parameter, like this:
struct entry
tester (int len, char data[len][len])
{
…
}
Alternatively, in function declarations (but not in function
definitions), you can use [*]
to denote that the array
parameter is of a variable length, such that these two declarations
mean the same thing:
struct entry tester (int len, char data[len][len]);
struct entry tester (int len, char data[*][*]);
The two forms of input are equivalent in GNU C, but emphasizing that the array parameter is variable-length may be helpful to those studying the code.
You can also omit the length parameter, and instead use some other in-scope variable for the length in the function definition:
struct entry tester (char data[*][*]); … int dataLength = 20; … struct entry tester (char data[dataLength][dataLength]) { … }
In GNU C, to pass the array first and the length afterward, you can use a parameter forward declaration, like this:
struct entry
tester (int len; char data[len][len], int len)
{
…
}
The ‘int len’ before the semicolon is the parameter forward
declaration; it serves the purpose of making the name len
known
when the declaration of data
is parsed.
You can write any number of such parameter forward declarations in the parameter list. They can be separated by commas or semicolons, but the last one must end with a semicolon, which is followed by the “real” parameter declarations. Each forward declaration must match a subsequent “real” declaration in parameter name and data type.
Standard C does not support parameter forward declarations.
Next: Nested Functions, Previous: Variable-Length Array Parameters, Up: Advanced Function Features [Contents][Index]
22.7.2 Variable-Length Parameter Lists
A function that takes a variable number of arguments is called a variadic function. In C, a variadic function must specify at least one fixed argument with an explicitly declared data type. Additional arguments can follow, and can vary in both quantity and data type.
In the function header, declare the fixed parameters in the normal way, then write a comma and an ellipsis: ‘, ...’. Here is an example of a variadic function header:
int add_multiple_values (int number, ...)
The function body can refer to fixed arguments by their parameter
names, but the additional arguments have no names. Accessing them in
the function body uses certain standard macros. They are defined in
the library header file stdarg.h, so the code must
#include
that file.
In the body, write
va_list ap; va_start (ap, last_fixed_parameter);
This declares the variable ap
(you can use any name for it)
and then sets it up to point before the first additional argument.
Then, to fetch the next consecutive additional argument, write this:
va_arg (ap, type)
After fetching all the additional arguments (or as many as need to be used), write this:
va_end (ap);
Here’s an example of a variadic function definition that adds any
number of int
arguments. The first (fixed) argument says how
many more arguments follow.
#include <stdarg.h> /* Definesva
… macros. */ … int add_multiple_values (int argcount, ...) { int counter, total = 0; /* Declare a variable of typeva_list
. */ va_list argptr; /* Initialize that variable.. */ va_start (argptr, argcount); for (counter = 0; counter < argcount; counter++) { /* Get the next additional argument. */ total += va_arg (argptr, int); } /* End use of theargptr
variable. */ va_end (argptr); return total; }
With GNU C, va_end
is superfluous, but some other compilers
might make va_start
allocate memory so that calling
va_end
is necessary to avoid a memory leak. Before doing
va_start
again with the same variable, do va_end
first.
Because of this possible memory allocation, it is risky (in principle)
to copy one va_list
variable to another with assignment.
Instead, use va_copy
, which copies the substance but allocates
separate memory in the variable you copy to. The call looks like
va_copy (to, from)
, where both to and
from should be variables of type va_list
. In principle,
do va_end
on each of these variables before its scope ends.
Since the additional arguments’ types are not specified in the
function’s definition, the default argument promotions
(see Argument Promotions) apply to them in function calls. The
function definition must take account of this; thus, if an argument
was passed as short
, the function should get it as int
.
If an argument was passed as float
, the function should get it
as double
.
C has no mechanism to tell the variadic function how many arguments
were passed to it, so its calling convention must give it a way to
determine this. That’s why add_multiple_values
takes a fixed
argument that says how many more arguments follow. Thus, you can
call the function like this:
sum = add_multiple_values (3, 12, 34, 190);
/* Value is 12+34+190. */
In GNU C, there is no actual need to use the va_end
function.
In fact, it does nothing. It’s used for compatibility with other
compilers, when that matters.
It is a mistake to access variables declared as va_list
except
in the specific ways described here. Just what that type consists of
is an implementation detail, which could vary from one platform to
another.
Next: Inline Function Definitions, Previous: Variable-Length Parameter Lists, Up: Advanced Function Features [Contents][Index]
22.7.3 Nested Functions
A nested function is a function defined inside another function.
(The ability to do this indispensable for automatic translation of
certain programming languages into C.) The nested function’s name is
local to the block where it is defined. For example, here we define a
nested function named square
, then call it twice:
foo (double a, double b) { double square (double z) { return z * z; } return square (a) + square (b); }
The nested function definition can access all the variables of the containing
function that are visible at the point of its definition. This is
called lexical scoping. For example, here we show a nested
function that uses an inherited variable named offset
:
bar (int *array, int offset, int size) { int access (int *array, int index) { return array[index + offset]; } int i; … for (i = 0; i < size; i++) … access (array, i) … }
Nested function definitions can appear wherever automatic variable declarations are allowed; that is, in any block, interspersed with the other declarations and statements in the block.
The nested function’s name is visible only within the parent block; the name’s scope starts from its definition and continues to the end of the containing block. If the nested function’s name is the same as the parent function’s name, there will be no way to refer to the parent function inside the scope of the name of the nested function.
Using extern
or static
on a nested function definition
is an error.
It is possible to call the nested function from outside the scope of its name by storing its address or passing the address to another function. You can do this safely, but you must be careful:
hack (int *array, int size, int addition) { void store (int index, int value) { array[index] = value + addition; } intermediate (store, size); }
Here, the function intermediate
receives the address of
store
as an argument. If intermediate
calls store
,
the arguments given to store
are used to store into array
.
store
also accesses hack
’s local variable addition
.
It is safe for intermediate
to call store
because
hack
’s stack frame, with its arguments and local variables,
continues to exist during the call to intermediate
.
Calling the nested function through its address after the containing function has exited is asking for trouble. If it is called after a containing scope level has exited, and if it refers to some of the variables that are no longer in scope, it will refer to memory containing junk or other data. It’s not wise to take the risk.
The GNU C Compiler implements taking the address of a nested function using a technique called trampolines. This technique was described in Lexical Closures for C++ (Thomas M. Breuel, USENIX C++ Conference Proceedings, October 17–21, 1988).
A nested function can jump to a label inherited from a containing
function, provided the label was explicitly declared in the containing
function (see Locally Declared Labels). Such a jump returns instantly to the
containing function, exiting the nested function that did the
goto
and any intermediate function invocations as well. Here
is an example:
bar (int *array, int offset, int size) { /* Explicitly declare the labelfailure
. */ __label__ failure; int access (int *array, int index) { if (index > size) /* Exit this function, and return tobar
. */ goto failure; return array[index + offset]; }
int i; … for (i = 0; i < size; i++) … access (array, i) … … return 0; /* Control comes here fromaccess
if it does thegoto
. */ failure: return -1; }
To declare the nested function before its definition, use
auto
(which is otherwise meaningless for function declarations;
see auto
and register
). For example,
bar (int *array, int offset, int size) { auto int access (int *, int); … … access (array, i) … … int access (int *array, int index) { … } … }
Previous: Nested Functions, Up: Advanced Function Features [Contents][Index]
22.7.4 Inline Function Definitions
To declare a function inline, use the inline
keyword in its
definition. Here’s a simple function that takes a pointer-to-int
and increments the integer stored there—declared inline.
struct list { struct list *first, *second; }; inline struct list * list_first (struct list *p) { return p->first; } inline struct list * list_second (struct list *p) { return p->second; }
optimized compilation can substitute the inline function’s body for any call to it. This is called inlining the function. It makes the code that contains the call run faster, significantly so if the inline function is small.
Here’s a function that uses list_second
:
int pairlist_length (struct list *l) { int length = 0; while (l) { length++; l = list_second (l); } return length; }
Substituting the code of list_second
into the definition of
pairlist_length
results in this code, in effect:
int pairlist_length (struct list *l) { int length = 0; while (l) { length++; l = l->second; } return length; }
Since the definition of list_second
does not say extern
or static
, that definition is used only for inlining. It
doesn’t generate code that can be called at run time. If not all the
calls to the function are inlined, there must be a definition of the
same function name in another module for them to call.
Adding static
to an inline function definition means the
function definition is limited to this compilation module. Also, it
generates run-time code if necessary for the sake of any calls that
were not inlined. If all calls are inlined then the function
definition does not generate run-time code, but you can force
generation of run-time code with the option
-fkeep-inline-functions.
Specifying extern
along with inline
means the function is
external and generates run-time code to be called from other
separately compiled modules, as well as inlined. You can define the
function as inline
without extern
in other modules so as
to inline calls to the same function in those modules.
Why are some calls not inlined? First of all, inlining is an optimization, so non-optimized compilation does not inline.
Some calls cannot be inlined for technical reasons. Also, certain
usages in a function definition can make it unsuitable for inline
substitution. Among these usages are: variadic functions, use of
alloca
, use of computed goto (see Labels as Values), and
use of nonlocal goto. The option -Winline requests a warning
when a function marked inline
is unsuitable to be inlined. The
warning explains what obstacle makes it unsuitable.
Just because a call can be inlined does not mean it should be inlined. The GNU C compiler weighs costs and benefits to decide whether inlining a particular call is advantageous.
You can force inlining of all calls to a given function that can be inlined, even in a non-optimized compilation. by specifying the ‘always_inline’ attribute for the function, like this:
/* Prototype. */
inline void foo (const char) __attribute__((always_inline));
This is a GNU C extension. See Attributes in Declarations.
A function call may be inlined even if not declared inline
in
special cases where the compiler can determine this is correct and
desirable. For instance, when a static function is called only once,
it will very likely be inlined. With -flto, link-time
optimization, any function might be inlined. To absolutely prevent
inlining of a specific function, specify
__attribute__((__noinline__))
in the function’s definition.
Previous: Advanced Function Features, Up: Functions [Contents][Index]
22.8 Obsolete Function Features
These features of function definitions are still used in old programs, but you shouldn’t write code this way today. If you are just learning C, you can skip this section.
22.8.1 Older GNU C Inlining
The GNU C spec for inline functions, before GCC version 5, defined
extern inline
on a function definition to mean to inline calls
to it but not generate code for the function that could be
called at run time. By contrast, inline
without extern
specified to generate run-time code for the function. In effect, ISO
incompatibly flipped the meanings of these two cases. We changed GCC
in version 5 to adopt the ISO specification.
Many programs still use these cases with the previous GNU C meanings.
You can specify use of those meanings with the option
-fgnu89-inline. You can also specify this for a single
function with __attribute__ ((gnu_inline))
. Here’s an example:
inline __attribute__ ((gnu_inline)) int inc (int *a) { (*a)++; }
Previous: Older GNU C Inlining, Up: Obsolete Function Features [Contents][Index]
22.8.2 Old-Style Function Definitions
The syntax of C traditionally allows omitting the data type in a
function declaration if it specifies a storage class or a qualifier.
Then the type defaults to int
. For example:
static foo (double x);
defaults the return type to int
. This is bad practice; if you
see it, fix it.
An old-style (or “K&R”) function definition is the way function definitions were written in the 1980s. It looks like this:
rettype function (parmnames) parm_declarations { body }
In parmnames, only the parameter names are listed, separated by
commas. Then parm_declarations declares their data types; these
declarations look just like variable declarations. If a parameter is
listed in parmnames but has no declaration, it is implicitly
declared int
.
There is no reason to write a definition this way nowadays, but they can still be seen in older GNU programs.
An old-style variadic function definition looks like this:
#include <varargs.h> int add_multiple_values (va_alist) va_dcl { int argcount; int counter, total = 0; /* Declare a variable of typeva_list
. */ va_list argptr; /* Initialize that variable. */ va_start (argptr); /* Get the first argument (fixed). */ argcount = va_arg (int); for (counter = 0; counter < argcount; counter++) { /* Get the next additional argument. */ total += va_arg (argptr, int); } /* End use of theargptr
variable. */ va_end (argptr); return total; }
Note that the old-style variadic function definition has no fixed
parameter variables; all arguments must be obtained with
va_arg
.
Next: Type Conversions, Previous: Functions, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
23 Compatible Types
Declaring a function or variable twice is valid in C only if the two declarations specify compatible types. In addition, some operations on pointers require operands to have compatible target types.
In C, two different primitive types are never compatible. Likewise for
the defined types struct
, union
and enum
: two
separately defined types are incompatible unless they are defined
exactly the same way.
However, there are a few cases where different types can be compatible:
- Every enumeration type is compatible with some integer type. In GNU C, the choice of integer type depends on the largest enumeration value.
- Array types are compatible if the element types are compatible and the sizes (when specified) match.
- Pointer types are compatible if the pointer target types are compatible.
- Function types that specify argument types are compatible if the
return types are compatible and the argument types are compatible,
argument by argument. In addition, they must all agree in whether
they use
...
to allow additional arguments. - Function types that don’t specify argument types are compatible if the return types are.
- Function types that specify the argument types are compatible with function types that omit them, if the return types are compatible and the specified argument types are unaltered by the argument promotions (see Argument Promotions).
In order for types to be compatible, they must agree in their type
qualifiers. Thus, const int
and int
are incompatible.
It follows that const int *
and int *
are incompatible
too (they are pointers to types that are not compatible).
If two types are compatible ignoring the qualifiers, we call them nearly compatible. (If they are array types, we ignore qualifiers on the element types.7) Comparison of pointers is valid if the pointers’ target types are nearly compatible. Likewise, the two branches of a conditional expression may be pointers to nearly compatible target types.
If two types are compatible ignoring the qualifiers, and the first type has all the qualifiers of the second type, we say the first is upward compatible with the second. Assignment of pointers requires the assigned pointer’s target type to be upward compatible with the right operand (the new value)’s target type.
Next: Scope, Previous: Compatible Types, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
24 Type Conversions
C converts between data types automatically when that seems clearly necessary. In addition, you can convert explicitly with a cast.
Next: Assignment Type Conversions, Up: Type Conversions [Contents][Index]
24.1 Explicit Type Conversion
You can do explicit conversions using the unary cast operator,
which is written as a type designator (see Type Designators) in
parentheses. For example, (int)
is the operator to cast to
type int
. Here’s an example of using it:
{ double d = 5.5; printf ("Floating point value: %f\n", d); printf ("Rounded to integer: %d\n", (int) d); }
Using (int) d
passes an int
value as argument to
printf
, so you can print it with ‘%d’. Using just
d
without the cast would pass the value as double
.
That won’t work at all with ‘%d’; the results would be gibberish.
To divide one integer by another without rounding,
cast either of the integers to double
first:
(double) dividend / divisor dividend / (double) divisor
It is enough to cast one of them, because that forces the common type
to double
so the other will be converted automatically.
The valid cast conversions are:
- One numerical type to another.
- One pointer type to another. (Converting between pointers that point to functions and pointers that point to data is not standard C.)
- A pointer type to an integer type.
- An integer type to a pointer type.
- To a union type, from the type of any alternative in the union (see Unions). (This is a GNU extension.)
- Anything, to
void
.
Next: Argument Promotions, Previous: Explicit Type Conversion, Up: Type Conversions [Contents][Index]
24.2 Assignment Type Conversions
Certain type conversions occur automatically in assignments and certain other contexts. These are the conversions assignments can do:
- Converting any numeric type to any other numeric type.
- Converting
void *
to any other pointer type (except pointer-to-function types). - Converting any other pointer type to
void *
. (except pointer-to-function types). - Converting 0 (a null pointer constant) to any pointer type.
- Converting any pointer type to
bool
. (The result is 1 if the pointer is not null.) - Converting between pointer types when the left-hand target type is upward compatible with the right-hand target type. See Compatible Types.
These type conversions occur automatically in certain contexts, which are:
- An assignment converts the type of the right-hand expression
to the type wanted by the left-hand expression. For example,
double i; i = 5;
converts 5 to
double
. - A function call, when the function specifies the type for that
argument, converts the argument value to that type. For example,
void foo (double); foo (5);
converts 5 to
double
. - A
return
statement converts the specified value to the type that the function is declared to return. For example,double foo () { return 5; }
also converts 5 to
double
.
In all three contexts, if the conversion is impossible, that constitutes an error.
Next: Operand Promotions, Previous: Assignment Type Conversions, Up: Type Conversions [Contents][Index]
24.3 Argument Promotions
When a function’s definition or declaration does not specify the type of an argument, that argument is passed without conversion in whatever type it has, with these exceptions:
- Some narrow numeric values are promoted to a wider type. If the
expression is a narrow integer, such as
char
orshort
, the call converts it automatically toint
(see Integer Data Types).8In this example, the expression
c
is passed as anint
:char c = '$'; printf ("Character c is '%c'\n", c);
- If the expression
has type
float
, the call converts it automatically todouble
. - An array as argument is converted to a pointer to its zeroth element.
- A function name as argument is converted to a pointer to that function.
Next: Common Type, Previous: Argument Promotions, Up: Type Conversions [Contents][Index]
24.4 Operand Promotions
The operands in arithmetic operations undergo type conversion automatically.
These operand promotions are the same as the argument promotions
except without converting float
to double
. In other words,
the operand promotions convert
char
orshort
(whether signed or not) toint
.- an array to a pointer to its zeroth element, and
- a function name to a pointer to that function.
Previous: Operand Promotions, Up: Type Conversions [Contents][Index]
24.5 Common Type
Arithmetic binary operators (except the shift operators) convert their operands to the common type before operating on them. Conditional expressions also convert the two possible results to their common type. Here are the rules for determining the common type.
If one of the numbers has a floating-point type and the other is an integer, the common type is that floating-point type. For instance,
5.6 * 2 ⇒ 11.2 /* a double
value */
If both are floating point, the type with the larger range is the common type.
If both are integers but of different widths, the common type is the wider of the two.
If they are integer types of the same width, the common type is
unsigned if either operand is unsigned, and it’s long
if either
operand is long
. It’s long long
if either operand is
long long
.
These rules apply to addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, remainder, comparisons, and bitwise operations. They also apply to the two branches of a conditional expression, and to the arithmetic done in a modifying assignment operation.
Next: Preprocessing, Previous: Type Conversions, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
25 Scope
Each definition or declaration of an identifier is visible in certain parts of the program, which is typically less than the whole of the program. The parts where it is visible are called its scope.
Normally, declarations made at the top-level in the source – that is, not within any blocks and function definitions – are visible for the entire contents of the source file after that point. This is called file scope (see File-Scope Variables).
Declarations made within blocks of code, including within function definitions, are visible only within those blocks. This is called block scope. Here is an example:
void foo (void) { int x = 42; }
In this example, the variable x
has block scope; it is visible
only within the foo
function definition block. Thus, other
blocks could have their own variables, also named x
, without
any conflict between those variables.
A variable declared inside a subblock has a scope limited to that subblock,
void
foo (void)
{
{
int x = 42;
}
// x
is out of scope here.
}
If a variable declared within a block has the same name as a variable declared outside of that block, the definition within the block takes precedence during its scope:
int x = 42; void foo (void) { int x = 17; printf ("%d\n", x); }
This prints 17, the value of the variable x
declared in the
function body block, rather than the value of the variable x
at
file scope. We say that the inner declaration of x
shadows the outer declaration, for the extent of the inner
declaration’s scope.
A declaration with block scope can be shadowed by another declaration with the same name in a subblock.
void
foo (void)
{
char *x = "foo";
{
int x = 42;
…
exit (x / 6);
}
}
A function parameter’s scope is the entire function body, but it can be shadowed. For example:
int x = 42; void foo (int x) { printf ("%d\n", x); }
This prints the value of x
the function parameter, rather than
the value of the file-scope variable x
.
Labels (see goto
Statement and Labels) have function scope: each label
is visible for the whole of the containing function body, both before
and after the label declaration:
void foo (void) { … goto bar; … { // Subblock does not affect labels. bar: … } goto bar; }
Except for labels, a declared identifier is not visible to code before its declaration. For example:
int x = 5; int y = x + 10;
will work, but:
int x = y + 10; int y = 5;
cannot refer to the variable y
before its declaration.
This is part of the GNU C Intro and Reference Manual and covered by its license.
Next: Integers in Depth, Previous: Scope, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
26 Preprocessing
As the first stage of compiling a C source module, GCC transforms the text with text substitutions and file inclusions. This is called preprocessing.
- Preprocessing Overview
- Directives
- Preprocessing Tokens
- Header Files
- Macros
- Conditionals
- Diagnostics
- Line Control
- Null Directive
Next: Directives, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.1 Preprocessing Overview
GNU C performs preprocessing on each line of a C program as the first stage of compilation. Preprocessing operates on a line only when it contains a preprocessing directive or uses a macro—all other lines pass through preprocessing unchanged.
Here are some jobs that preprocessing does. The rest of this chapter gives the details.
- Inclusion of header files. These are files (usually containing declarations and macro definitions) that can be substituted into your program.
- Macro expansion. You can define macros, which are abbreviations for arbitrary fragments of C code. Preprocessing replaces the macros with their definitions. Some macros are automatically predefined.
- Conditional compilation. You can include or exclude parts of the program according to various conditions.
- Line control. If you use a program to combine or rearrange source files into an intermediate file that is then compiled, you can use line control to inform the compiler where each source line originally came from.
- Compilation control.
#pragma
and_Pragma
invoke some special compiler features in how to handle certain constructs. - Diagnostics. You can detect problems at compile time and issue errors or warnings.
Except for expansion of predefined macros, all these operations happen only if you use preprocessing directives to request them.
Next: Preprocessing Tokens, Previous: Preprocessing Overview, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.2 Directives
Preprocessing directives are lines in the program that start with ‘#’. Whitespace is allowed before and after the ‘#’. The ‘#’ is followed by an identifier, the directive name. It specifies the operation to perform. Here are a couple of examples:
#define LIMIT 51 # undef LIMIT # error You screwed up!
We usually refer to a directive as #name
where name
is the directive name. For example, #define
means the
directive that defines a macro.
The ‘#’ that begins a directive cannot come from a macro
expansion. Also, the directive name is not macro expanded. Thus, if
foo
is defined as a macro expanding to define
, that does
not make #foo
a valid preprocessing directive.
The set of valid directive names is fixed. Programs cannot define new preprocessing directives.
Some directives require arguments; these make up the rest of the
directive line and must be separated from the directive name by
whitespace. For example, #define
must be followed by a macro
name and the intended expansion of the macro.
A preprocessing directive cannot cover more than one line. The line can, however, be continued with backslash-newline, or by a ‘/*…*/’-style comment that extends past the end of the line. These will be replaced (by nothing, or by whitespace) before the directive is processed.
Next: Header Files, Previous: Directives, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.3 Preprocessing Tokens
Preprocessing divides C code (minus its comments) into tokens that are similar to C tokens, but not exactly the same. Here are the quirks of preprocessing tokens.
The main classes of preprocessing tokens are identifiers, preprocessing numbers, string constants, character constants, and punctuators; there are a few others too.
- identifier ¶
An identifier preprocessing token is syntactically like an identifier in C: any sequence of letters, digits, or underscores, as well as non-ASCII characters represented using ‘\U’ or ‘\u’, that doesn’t begin with a digit.
During preprocessing, the keywords of C have no special significance; at that stage, they are simply identifiers. Thus, you can define a macro whose name is a keyword. The only identifier that is special during preprocessing is
defined
(see Thedefined
test).- preprocessing number ¶
A preprocessing number is something that preprocessing treats textually as a number, including C numeric constants, and other sequences of characters which resemble numeric constants. Preprocessing does not try to verify that a preprocessing number is a valid number in C, and indeed it need not be one.
More precisely, preprocessing numbers begin with an optional period, a required decimal digit, and then continue with any sequence of letters, digits, underscores, periods, and exponents. Exponents are the two-character sequences ‘e+’, ‘e-’, ‘E+’, ‘E-’, ‘p+’, ‘p-’, ‘P+’, and ‘P-’. (The exponents that begin with ‘p’ or ‘P’ are new to C99. They are used for hexadecimal floating-point constants.)
The reason behind this unusual syntactic class is that the full complexity of numeric constants is irrelevant during preprocessing. The distinction between lexically valid and invalid floating-point numbers, for example, doesn’t matter at this stage. The use of preprocessing numbers makes it possible to split an identifier at any position and get exactly two tokens, and reliably paste them together using the
##
operator (see Concatenation).- punctuator
A punctuator is syntactically like an operator. These are the valid punctuators:
[ ] ( ) { } . -> ++ -- & * + - ~ ! / % << >> < > <= >= == != ^ | && || ? : ; ... = *= /= %= += -= <<= >>= &= ^= |= , # ## <: :> <% %> %: %:%:
- string constant
A string constant in the source code is recognized by preprocessing as a single preprocessing token.
- character constant
A character constant in the source code is recognized by preprocessing as a single preprocessing token.
- header name
Within the
#include
directive, preprocessing recognizes a header name token. It consists of ‘"name"’, where name is a sequence of source characters other than newline and ‘"’, or ‘<name>’, where name is a sequence of source characters other than newline and ‘>’.In practice, it is more convenient to think that the
#include
line is exempt from tokenization.- other
Any other character that’s valid in a C source program is treated as a separate preprocessing token.
Once the program is broken into preprocessing tokens, they remain separate until the end of preprocessing. Macros that generate two consecutive tokens insert whitespace to keep them separate, if necessary. For example,
#define foo() bar foo()baz → bar baz not → barbaz
The only exception is with the ##
preprocessing operator, which
pastes tokens together (see Concatenation).
Preprocessing treats the null character (code 0) as whitespace, but generates a warning for it because it may be invisible to the user (many terminals do not display it at all) and its presence in the file is probably a mistake.
Next: Macros, Previous: Preprocessing Tokens, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.4 Header Files
A header file is a file of C code, typically containing C declarations
and macro definitions (see Macros), to be shared between several
source files. You request the use of a header file in your program by
including it, with the C preprocessing directive
#include
.
Header files serve two purposes.
- System header files declare the interfaces to parts of the operating system. You include them in your program to supply the definitions and declarations that you need to invoke system calls and libraries.
- Program-specific header files contain declarations for interfaces between the source files of a particular program. It is a good idea to create a header file for related declarations and macro definitions if all or most of them are needed in several different source files.
Including a header file produces the same results as copying the header file into each source file that needs it. Such copying would be time-consuming and error-prone. With a header file, the related declarations appear in only one place. If they need to be changed, you can change them in one place, and programs that include the header file will then automatically use the new version when next recompiled. The header file eliminates the labor of finding and changing all the copies as well as the risk that a failure to change one copy will result in inconsistencies within a program.
In C, the usual convention is to give header files names that end with .h. It is most portable to use only letters, digits, dashes, and underscores in header file names, and at most one dot.
The operation of including another source file isn’t actually limited
to the sort of code we put into header files. You can put any sort of
C code into a separate file, then use #include
to copy it
virtually into other C source files. But that is a strange thing to
do.
Next: #include
Operation, Up: Header Files [Contents][Index]
26.4.1 #include
Syntax
You can specify inclusion of user and system header files with the
preprocessing directive #include
. It has two variants:
#include <file>
This variant is used for system header files. It searches for a file named file in a standard list of system directories. You can prepend directories to this list with the -I option (see Invoking GCC in Using the GNU Compiler Collection).
#include "file"
This variant is used for header files of your own program. It searches for a file named file first in the directory containing the current file, then in the quote directories, then the same directories used for
<file>
. You can prepend directories to the list of quote directories with the -iquote option.
The argument of #include
, whether delimited with quote marks or
angle brackets, behaves like a string constant in that comments are not
recognized, and macro names are not expanded. Thus, #include <x/*y>
specifies inclusion of a system header file named x/*y.
However, if backslashes occur within file, they are considered
ordinary text characters, not escape characters: character escape
sequences such as used in string constants in C are not meaningful
here. Thus, #include "x\n\\y"
specifies a filename
containing three backslashes. By the same token, there is no way to
escape ‘"’ or ‘>’ to include it in the header file name if
it would instead end the file name.
Some systems interpret ‘\’ as a file name component separator. All these systems also interpret ‘/’ the same way. It is most portable to use only ‘/’.
It is an error to put anything other than comments on the
#include
line after the file name.
Next: Search Path, Previous: #include
Syntax, Up: Header Files [Contents][Index]
26.4.2 #include
Operation
The #include
directive works by scanning the specified header
file as input before continuing with the rest of the current file.
The result of preprocessing consists of the text already generated,
followed by the result of preprocessing the included file, followed by
whatever results from the text after the #include
directive.
For example, if you have a header file header.h as follows,
char *test (void);
and a main program called program.c that uses the header file, like this,
int x; #include "header.h" int main (void) { puts (test ()); }
the result is equivalent to putting this text in program.c:
int x; char *test (void); int main (void) { puts (test ()); }
Included files are not limited to declarations and macro definitions; those are merely the typical uses. Any fragment of a C program can be included from another file. The include file could even contain the beginning of a statement that is concluded in the containing file, or the end of a statement that was started in the including file. However, an included file must consist of complete tokens. Comments and string literals that have not been closed by the end of an included file are invalid. For error recovery, the compiler terminates them at the end of the file.
To avoid confusion, it is best if header files contain only complete syntactic units—function declarations or definitions, type declarations, etc.
The line following the #include
directive is always treated as
a separate line, even if the included file lacks a final newline.
There is no problem putting a preprocessing directive there.
Next: Once-Only Headers, Previous: #include
Operation, Up: Header Files [Contents][Index]
26.4.3 Search Path
GCC looks in several different places for header files to be included. On the GNU system, and Unix systems, the default directories for system header files are:
libdir/gcc/target/version/include /usr/local/include libdir/gcc/target/version/include-fixed libdir/target/include /usr/include/target /usr/include
The list may be different in some operating systems. Other directories are added for C++.
In the above, target is the canonical name of the system GCC was configured to compile code for; often but not always the same as the canonical name of the system it runs on. version is the version of GCC in use.
You can add to this list with the -Idir command-line option. All the directories named by -I are searched, in left-to-right order, before the default directories. The only exception is when dir is already searched by default. In this case, the option is ignored and the search order for system directories remains unchanged.
Duplicate directories are removed from the quote and bracket search chains before the two chains are merged to make the final search chain. Thus, it is possible for a directory to occur twice in the final search chain if it was specified in both the quote and bracket chains.
You can prevent GCC from searching any of the default directories with the -nostdinc option. This is useful when you are compiling an operating system kernel or some other program that does not use the standard C library facilities, or the standard C library itself. -I options are not ignored as described above when -nostdinc is in effect.
GCC looks for headers requested with #include "file"
first in the directory containing the current file, then in the
quote directories specified by -iquote options, then in
the same places it looks for a system header. For example, if
/usr/include/sys/stat.h contains #include "types.h"
,
GCC looks for types.h first in /usr/include/sys, then in
the quote directories and then in its usual search path.
#line
(see Line Control) does not change GCC’s idea of the
directory containing the current file.
The -I- is an old-fashioned, deprecated way to specify the quote directories. To look for headers in a directory named -, specify -I./-. There are several more ways to adjust the header search path. See Invoking GCC in Using the GNU Compiler Collection.
Next: Computed Includes, Previous: Search Path, Up: Header Files [Contents][Index]
26.4.4 Once-Only Headers
If a header file happens to be included twice, the compiler will process its contents twice. This is very likely to cause an error, e.g. when the compiler sees the same structure definition twice.
The standard way to prevent this is to enclose the entire real contents of the file in a conditional, like this:
/* File foo. */ #ifndef FILE_FOO_SEEN #define FILE_FOO_SEEN the entire file #endif /* !FILE_FOO_SEEN */
This construct is commonly known as a wrapper #ifndef. When the
header is included again, the conditional will be false, because
FILE_FOO_SEEN
is defined. Preprocessing skips over the entire
contents of the file, so that compilation will never “see” the file
contents twice in one module.
GCC optimizes this case even further. It remembers when a header file
has a wrapper #ifndef
. If a subsequent #include
specifies that header, and the macro in the #ifndef
is still
defined, it does not bother to rescan the file at all.
You can put comments in the header file outside the wrapper. They do not interfere with this optimization.
The macro FILE_FOO_SEEN
is called the controlling macro
or guard macro. In a user header file, the macro name should
not begin with ‘_’. In a system header file, it should begin
with ‘__’ (or ‘_’ followed by an upper-case letter) to avoid
conflicts with user programs. In any kind of header file, the macro
name should contain the name of the file and some additional text, to
avoid conflicts with other header files.
Previous: Once-Only Headers, Up: Header Files [Contents][Index]
26.4.5 Computed Includes
Sometimes it is necessary to select one of several different header files to be included into your program. They might specify configuration parameters to be used on different sorts of operating systems, for instance. You could do this with a series of conditionals,
#if SYSTEM_1
# include "system_1.h"
#elif SYSTEM_2
# include "system_2.h"
#elif SYSTEM_3
/* … */
#endif
That rapidly becomes tedious. Instead, GNU C offers the ability to use
a macro for the header name. This is called a computed include.
Instead of writing a header name as the direct argument of
#include
, you simply put a macro name there instead:
#define SYSTEM_H "system_1.h"
/* … */
#include SYSTEM_H
SYSTEM_H
is expanded, then system_1.h is included as if
the #include
had been written with that name. SYSTEM_H
could be defined by your Makefile with a -D option.
You must be careful when you define such a macro. #define
saves tokens, not text. GCC has no way of knowing that the macro will
be used as the argument of #include
, so it generates ordinary
tokens, not a header name. This is unlikely to cause problems if you
use double-quote includes, which are syntactically similar to string
constants. If you use angle brackets, however, you may have trouble.
The syntax of a computed include is actually a bit more general than the
above. If the first non-whitespace character after #include
is
not ‘"’ or ‘<’, then the entire line is macro-expanded
like running text would be.
If the line expands to a single string constant, the contents of that string constant are the file to be included. Preprocessing does not re-examine the string for embedded quotes, but neither does it process backslash escapes in the string. Therefore
#define HEADER "a\"b" #include HEADER
looks for a file named a\"b. Preprocessing searches for the file according to the rules for double-quoted includes.
If the line expands to a token stream beginning with a ‘<’ token and including a ‘>’ token, then the tokens between the ‘<’ and the first ‘>’ are combined to form the filename to be included. Any whitespace between tokens is reduced to a single space; then any space after the initial ‘<’ is retained, but a trailing space before the closing ‘>’ is ignored. Preprocessing searches for the file according to the rules for angle-bracket includes.
In either case, if there are any tokens on the line after the file name, an error occurs and the directive is not processed. It is also an error if the result of expansion does not match either of the two expected forms.
These rules are implementation-defined behavior according to the C standard. To minimize the risk of different compilers interpreting your computed includes differently, we recommend you use only a single object-like macro that expands to a string constant. That also makes it clear to people reading your program.
Next: Conditionals, Previous: Header Files, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.5 Macros
A macro is a fragment of code that has been given a name. Whenever the name is used, it is replaced by the contents of the macro. There are two kinds of macros. They differ mostly in what they look like when they are used. Object-like macros resemble data objects when used, function-like macros resemble function calls.
You may define any valid identifier as a macro, even if it is a C
keyword. In the preprocessing stage, GCC does not know anything about
keywords. This can be useful if you wish to hide a keyword such as
const
from an older compiler that does not understand it.
However, the preprocessing operator defined
(see The defined
test)
can never be defined as a macro.
The operator #
is used in macros for stringification of an
argument (see Stringification), and ##
is used for
concatenation of arguments into larger tokens (see Concatenation)
- Object-like Macros
- Function-like Macros
- Macro Arguments
- Stringification
- Concatenation
- Variadic Macros
- Predefined Macros
- Undefining and Redefining Macros
- Directives Within Macro Arguments
- Macro Pitfalls
Next: Function-like Macros, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.1 Object-like Macros
An object-like macro is a simple identifier that will be replaced by a code fragment. It is called object-like because in most cases the use of the macro looks like reference to a data object in code that uses it. These macros are most commonly used to give symbolic names to numeric constants.
The way to define macros with the #define
directive.
#define
is followed by the name of the macro and then the token
sequence it should be an abbreviation for, which is variously referred
to as the macro’s body, expansion or replacement
list. For example,
#define BUFFER_SIZE 1024
defines a macro named BUFFER_SIZE
as an abbreviation for the
token 1024
. If somewhere after this #define
directive
there comes a C statement of the form
foo = (char *) malloc (BUFFER_SIZE);
then preprocessing will recognize and expand the macro
BUFFER_SIZE
, so that compilation will see the tokens:
foo = (char *) malloc (1024);
By convention, macro names are written in upper case. Programs are easier to read when it is possible to tell at a glance which names are macros. Macro names that start with ‘__’ are reserved for internal uses, and many of them are defined automatically, so don’t define such macro names unless you really know what you’re doing. Likewise for macro names that start with ‘_’ and an upper-case letter.
The macro’s body ends at the end of the #define
line. You may
continue the definition onto multiple lines, if necessary, using
backslash-newline. When the macro is expanded, however, it will all
come out on one line. For example,
#define NUMBERS 1, \ 2, \ 3 int x[] = { NUMBERS }; → int x[] = { 1, 2, 3 };
The most common visible consequence of this is surprising line numbers in error messages.
There is no restriction on what can go in a macro body provided it decomposes into valid preprocessing tokens. Parentheses need not balance, and the body need not resemble valid C code. (If it does not, you may get error messages from the C compiler when you use the macro.)
Preprocessing scans the program sequentially. A macro definition takes effect right after its appearance. Therefore, the following input
foo = X; #define X 4 bar = X;
produces
foo = X; bar = 4;
When preprocessing expands a macro name, the macro’s expansion replaces the macro invocation, then the expansion is examined for more macros to expand. For example,
#define TABLESIZE BUFSIZE #define BUFSIZE 1024 TABLESIZE → BUFSIZE → 1024
TABLESIZE
is expanded first to produce BUFSIZE
, then that
macro is expanded to produce the final result, 1024
.
Notice that BUFSIZE
was not defined when TABLESIZE
was
defined. The #define
for TABLESIZE
uses exactly the
expansion you specify—in this case, BUFSIZE
—and does not
check to see whether it too contains macro names. Only when you
use TABLESIZE
is the result of its expansion scanned for
more macro names.
This makes a difference if you change the definition of BUFSIZE
at some point in the source file. TABLESIZE
, defined as shown,
will always expand using the definition of BUFSIZE
that is
currently in effect:
#define BUFSIZE 1020 #define TABLESIZE BUFSIZE #undef BUFSIZE #define BUFSIZE 37
Now TABLESIZE
expands (in two stages) to 37
.
If the expansion of a macro contains its own name, either directly or via intermediate macros, it is not expanded again when the expansion is examined for more macros. This prevents infinite recursion. See Self-Referential Macros, for the precise details.
Next: Macro Arguments, Previous: Object-like Macros, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.2 Function-like Macros
You can also define macros whose use looks like a function call.
These are called function-like macros. To define one, use the
#define
directive with a pair of parentheses immediately after
the macro name. For example,
#define lang_init() c_init () lang_init () → c_init () lang_init () → c_init () lang_init() → c_init ()
There must be no space between the macro name and the following
open-parenthesis in the the #define
directive; that’s what
indicates you’re defining a function-like macro. However, you can add
unnecessary whitespace around the open-parenthesis (and around the
close-parenthesis) when you call the macro; they don’t change
anything.
A function-like macro is expanded only when its name appears with a pair of parentheses after it. If you write just the name, without parentheses, it is left alone. This can be useful when you have a function and a macro of the same name, and you wish to use the function sometimes. Whitespace and line breaks before or between the parentheses are ignored when the macro is called.
extern void foo(void); #define foo() /* optimized inline version */ /* … */ foo(); funcptr = foo;
Here the call to foo()
expands the macro, but the function
pointer funcptr
gets the address of the real function
foo
. If the macro were to be expanded there, it would cause a
syntax error.
If you put spaces between the macro name and the parentheses in the macro definition, that does not define a function-like macro, it defines an object-like macro whose expansion happens to begin with a pair of parentheses. Here is an example:
#define lang_init () c_init() lang_init() → () c_init()()
The first two pairs of parentheses in this expansion come from the
macro. The third is the pair that was originally after the macro
invocation. Since lang_init
is an object-like macro, it does not
consume those parentheses.
Any name can have at most one macro definition at a time. Thus, you can’t define the same name as an object-like macro and a function-like macro at once.
Next: Stringification, Previous: Function-like Macros, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.3 Macro Arguments
Function-like macros can take arguments, just like true functions. To define a macro that uses arguments, you insert parameters between the pair of parentheses in the macro definition that make the macro function-like. The parameters must be valid C identifiers, separated by commas and optionally whitespace.
To invoke a macro that takes arguments, you write the name of the macro followed by a list of actual arguments in parentheses, separated by commas. The invocation of the macro need not be restricted to a single logical line—it can cross as many lines in the source file as you wish. The number of arguments you give must match the number of parameters in the macro definition. When the macro is expanded, each use of a parameter in its body is replaced by the tokens of the corresponding argument. (The macro body is not required to use all of the parameters.)
As an example, here is a macro that computes the minimum of two numeric values, as it is defined in many C programs, and some uses.
#define min(X, Y) ((X) < (Y) ? (X) : (Y)) x = min(a, b); → x = ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)); y = min(1, 2); → y = ((1) < (2) ? (1) : (2)); z = min(a+28, *p); → z = ((a+28) < (*p) ? (a+28) : (*p));
In this small example you can already see several of the dangers of macro arguments. See Macro Pitfalls, for detailed explanations.
Leading and trailing whitespace in each argument is dropped, and all whitespace between the tokens of an argument is reduced to a single space. Parentheses within each argument must balance; a comma within such parentheses does not end the argument. However, there is no requirement for square brackets or braces to balance, and they do not prevent a comma from separating arguments. Thus,
macro (array[x = y, x + 1])
passes two arguments to macro
: array[x = y
and x +
1]
. If you want to supply array[x = y, x + 1]
as an argument,
you can write it as array[(x = y, x + 1)]
, which is equivalent C
code. However, putting an assignment inside an array subscript
is to be avoided anyway.
All arguments to a macro are completely macro-expanded before they are substituted into the macro body. After substitution, the complete text is scanned again for macros to expand, including the arguments. This rule may seem strange, but it is carefully designed so you need not worry about whether any function call is actually a macro invocation. You can run into trouble if you try to be too clever, though. See Argument Prescan, for detailed discussion.
For example, min (min (a, b), c)
is first expanded to
min (((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)), (c))
and then to
((((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))) < (c) ? (((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))) : (c))
(The line breaks shown here for clarity are not actually generated.)
You can leave macro arguments empty without error, but many macros
will then expand to invalid code. You cannot leave out arguments
entirely; if a macro takes two arguments, there must be exactly one
comma at the top level of its argument list. Here are some silly
examples using min
:
min(, b) → (( ) < (b) ? ( ) : (b)) min(a, ) → ((a ) < ( ) ? (a ) : ( )) min(,) → (( ) < ( ) ? ( ) : ( )) min((,),) → (((,)) < ( ) ? ((,)) : ( )) min() error→ macro "min" requires 2 arguments, but only 1 given min(,,) error→ macro "min" passed 3 arguments, but takes just 2
Whitespace is not a preprocessing token, so if a macro foo
takes
one argument, foo ()
and foo ( )
both supply it an
empty argument.
Macro parameters appearing inside string literals are not replaced by their corresponding actual arguments.
#define foo(x) x, "x" foo(bar) → bar, "x"
See the next subsection for how to insert macro arguments into a string literal.
The token following the macro call and the last token of the macro expansion do not become one token even if it looks like they could:
#define foo() abc foo()def → abc def
Next: Concatenation, Previous: Macro Arguments, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.4 Stringification
Sometimes you may want to convert a macro argument into a string
constant. Parameters are not replaced inside string constants, but
you can use the #
preprocessing operator instead. When a macro
parameter is used with a leading #
, preprocessing replaces it
with the literal text of the actual argument, converted to a string
constant. Unlike normal parameter replacement, the argument is not
macro-expanded first. This is called stringification.
There is no way to combine an argument with surrounding text and stringify it all together. But you can write a series of string constants and stringified arguments. After preprocessing replaces the stringified arguments with string constants, the consecutive string constants will be concatenated into one long string constant (see String Constants).
Here is an example that uses stringification and concatenation of string constants:
#define WARN_IF(EXP) \ do { if (EXP) \ fprintf (stderr, "Warning: " #EXP "\n"); } \ while (0) WARN_IF (x == 0); → do { if (x == 0) fprintf (stderr, "Warning: " "x == 0" "\n"); } while (0);
The argument for EXP
is substituted once, as is, into the
if
statement, and once, stringified, into the argument to
fprintf
. If x
were a macro, it would be expanded in the
if
statement but not in the string.
The do
and while (0)
are a kludge to make it possible to
write WARN_IF (arg);
. The resemblance of WARN_IF
to a function makes that a natural way to write it.
See Swallowing the Semicolon.
Stringification in C involves more than putting double-quote
characters around the fragment. It also backslash-escapes the quotes
surrounding embedded string constants, and all backslashes within
string and character constants, in order to get a valid C string
constant with the proper contents. Thus, stringifying p = "foo\n";
results in "p = \"foo\\n\";". However, backslashes
that are not inside string or character constants are not duplicated:
‘\n’ by itself stringifies to "\n".
All leading and trailing whitespace in text being stringified is ignored. Any sequence of whitespace in the middle of the text is converted to a single space in the stringified result. Comments are replaced by whitespace long before stringification happens, so they never appear in stringified text.
There is no way to convert a macro argument into a character constant.
To stringify the result of expansion of a macro argument, you have to use two levels of macros, like this:
#define xstr(S) str(S) #define str(s) #s #define foo 4 str (foo) → "foo" xstr (foo) → xstr (4) → str (4) → "4"
s
is stringified when it is used in str
, so it is not
macro-expanded first. But S
is an ordinary argument to
xstr
, so it is completely macro-expanded before xstr
itself is expanded (see Argument Prescan). Therefore, by the time
str
gets to its argument text, that text already been
macro-expanded.
Next: Variadic Macros, Previous: Stringification, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.5 Concatenation
It is often useful to merge two tokens into one while expanding macros.
This is called token pasting or token concatenation. The
##
preprocessing operator performs token pasting. When a macro
is expanded, the two tokens on either side of each ##
operator
are combined into a single token, which then replaces the ##
and
the two original tokens in the macro expansion. Usually both will be
identifiers, or one will be an identifier and the other a preprocessing
number. When pasted, they make a longer identifier.
Concatenation into an identifier isn’t the only valid case. It is
also possible to concatenate two numbers (or a number and a name, such
as 1.5
and e3
) into a number. Also, multi-character
operators such as +=
can be formed by token pasting.
However, two tokens that don’t together form a valid token cannot be
pasted together. For example, you cannot concatenate x
with
+
, not in either order. Trying this issues a warning and keeps
the two tokens separate. Whether it puts white space between the
tokens is undefined. It is common to find unnecessary uses of
##
in complex macros. If you get this warning, it is likely
that you can simply remove the ##
.
The tokens combined by ##
could both come from the macro body,
but then you could just as well write them as one token in the first place.
Token pasting is useful when one or both of the tokens comes from a
macro argument. If either of the tokens next to an ##
is a
parameter name, it is replaced by its actual argument before ##
executes. As with stringification, the actual argument is not
macro-expanded first. If the argument is empty, that ##
has no
effect.
Keep in mind that preprocessing converts comments to whitespace before
it looks for uses of macros. Therefore, you cannot create a comment
by concatenating ‘/’ and ‘*’. You can put as much
whitespace between ##
and its operands as you like, including
comments, and you can put comments in arguments that will be
concatenated.
It is an error to use ##
at the beginning or end of a macro
body.
Multiple ##
operators are handled left-to-right, so that
‘1 ## e ## -2’ pastes into ‘1e-2’. (Right-to-left
processing would first generate ‘e-2’, which is an invalid token.)
When #
and ##
are used together, they are all handled
left-to-right.
Consider a C program that interprets named commands. There probably needs to be a table of commands, perhaps an array of structures declared as follows:
struct command { char *name; void (*function) (void); };
struct command commands[] =
{
{ "quit", quit_command },
{ "help", help_command },
/* … */
};
It would be cleaner not to have to write each command name twice, once in the string constant and once in the function name. A macro that takes the name of a command as an argument can make this unnecessary. It can create the string constant with stringification, and the function name by concatenating the argument with ‘_command’. Here is how it is done:
#define COMMAND(NAME) { #NAME, NAME ## _command }
struct command commands[] =
{
COMMAND (quit),
COMMAND (help),
/* … */
};
Next: Predefined Macros, Previous: Concatenation, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.6 Variadic Macros
A macro can be declared to accept a variable number of arguments much as a function can. The syntax for defining the macro is similar to that of a function. Here is an example:
#define eprintf(…) fprintf (stderr, __VA_ARGS__)
This kind of macro is called variadic. When the macro is invoked,
all the tokens in its argument list after the last named argument (this
macro has none), including any commas, become the variable
argument. This sequence of tokens replaces the identifier
__VA_ARGS__
in the macro body wherever it appears. Thus, we
have this expansion:
eprintf ("%s:%d: ", input_file, lineno) → fprintf (stderr, "%s:%d: ", input_file, lineno)
The variable argument is completely macro-expanded before it is inserted
into the macro expansion, just like an ordinary argument. You may use
the #
and ##
operators to stringify the variable argument
or to paste its leading or trailing token with another token. (But see
below for an important special case for ##
.)
Warning: don’t use the identifier __VA_ARGS__
for anything other than this.
If your macro is complicated, you may want a more descriptive name for
the variable argument than __VA_ARGS__
. You can write an
argument name immediately before the ‘…’; that name is used
for the variable argument.9 The
eprintf
macro above could be written thus:
#define eprintf(args…) fprintf (stderr, args)
A variadic macro can have named arguments as well as variable
arguments, so eprintf
can be defined like this, instead:
#define eprintf(format, …) \ fprintf (stderr, format, __VA_ARGS__)
This formulation is more descriptive, but what if you want to specify a format string that takes no arguments? In GNU C, you can omit the comma before the variable arguments if they are empty, but that puts an extra comma in the expansion:
eprintf ("success!\n") → fprintf(stderr, "success!\n", )
That’s an error in the call to fprintf
.
To get rid of that comma, the ##
token paste operator has a
special meaning when placed between a comma and a variable
argument.10 If you write
#define eprintf(format, …) \ fprintf (stderr, format, ##__VA_ARGS__)
then use the macro eprintf
with empty variable arguments,
##
deletes the preceding comma.
eprintf ("success!\n") → fprintf(stderr, "success!\n")
This does not happen if you pass an empty argument, nor does it
happen if the token preceding ##
is anything other than a
comma.
When the only macro parameter is a variable arguments parameter, and the macro call has no argument at all, it is not obvious whether that means an empty argument or a missing argument. Should the comma be kept, or deleted? The C standard says to keep the comma, but the preexisting GNU C extension deleted the comma. Nowadays, GNU C retains the comma when implementing a specific C standard, and deletes it otherwise.
C99 mandates that the only place the identifier __VA_ARGS__
can appear is in the replacement list of a variadic macro. It may not
be used as a macro name, macro parameter name, or within a different
type of macro. It may also be forbidden in open text; the standard is
ambiguous. We recommend you avoid using that name except for its
special purpose.
Variadic macros where you specify the parameter name is a GNU C
feature that has been supported for a long time. Standard C, as of
C99, supports only the form where the parameter is called
__VA_ARGS__
. For portability to previous versions of GNU C
you should use only named variable argument parameters. On the other
hand, for portability to other C99 compilers, you should use only
__VA_ARGS__
.
Next: Undefining and Redefining Macros, Previous: Variadic Macros, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.7 Predefined Macros
Several object-like macros are predefined; you use them without supplying their definitions. Here we explain the ones user programs often need to use. Many other macro names starting with ‘__’ are predefined; in general, you should not define such macro names yourself.
__FILE__
This macro expands to the name of the current input file, in the form of a C string constant. This is the full name by which the GCC opened the file, not the short name specified in
#include
or as the input file name argument. For example,"/usr/local/include/myheader.h"
is a possible expansion of this macro.__LINE__
This macro expands to the current input line number, in the form of a decimal integer constant. While we call it a predefined macro, it’s a pretty strange macro, since its “definition” changes with each new line of source code.
__func__
__FUNCTION__
These names are like variables that have as value a string containing the name of the current function definition. They are not really macros, but this is the best place to mention them.
__FUNCTION__
is the name that has been defined in GNU C since time immemorial;__func__
is defined by the C standard. With the following conditionals, you can use whichever one is defined.#if __STDC_VERSION__ < 199901L # if __GNUC__ >= 2 # define __func__ __FUNCTION__ # else # define __func__ "<unknown>" # endif #endif
__PRETTY_FUNCTION__
This is equivalent to
__FUNCTION__
in C, but in C++
the string includes argument type information as well. It is a GNU C extension.
Those features are useful in generating an error message to report an inconsistency detected by the program; the message can state the source line where the inconsistency was detected. For example,
fprintf (stderr, "Internal error: " "negative string length " "in function %s " "%d at %s, line %d.", __func__, length, __FILE__, __LINE__);
A #line
directive changes __LINE__
, and may change
__FILE__
as well. See Line Control.
__DATE__
This macro expands to a string constant that describes the date of compilation. The string constant contains eleven characters and looks like
"Feb 12 1996"
. If the day of the month is just one digit, an extra space precedes it so that the date is always eleven characters.If the compiler cannot determine the current date, it emits a warning messages (once per compilation) and
__DATE__
expands to"??? ?? ????"
.We deprecate the use of
__DATE__
for the sake of reproducible compilation.__TIME__
This macro expands to a string constant that describes the time of compilation. The string constant contains eight characters and looks like
"23:59:01"
.If the compiler cannot determine the current time, it emits a warning message (once per compilation) and
__TIME__
expands to"??:??:??"
.We deprecate the use of
__TIME__
for the sake of reproducible compilation.__STDC__
In normal operation, this macro expands to the constant 1, to signify that this compiler implements ISO Standard C.
__STDC_VERSION__
This macro expands to the C Standard’s version number, a long integer constant of the form
yyyymmL
where yyyy and mm are the year and month of the Standard version. This states which version of the C Standard the compiler implements.The current default value is
201112L
, which signifies the C 2011 standard.__STDC_HOSTED__
This macro is defined, with value 1, if the compiler’s target is a hosted environment. A hosted environment provides the full facilities of the standard C library.
The rest of the predefined macros are GNU C extensions.
__COUNTER__
This macro expands to sequential integral values starting from 0. In other words, each time the program uses this macro, it generates the next successive integer. This, with the
##
operator, provides a convenient means for macros to generate unique identifiers.__GNUC__
__GNUC_MINOR__
__GNUC_PATCHLEVEL__
These macros expand to the major version, minor version, and patch level of the compiler, as integer constants. For example, GCC 3.2.1 expands
__GNUC__
to 3,__GNUC_MINOR__
to 2, and__GNUC_PATCHLEVEL__
to 1.If all you need to know is whether or not your program is being compiled by GCC, or a non-GCC compiler that claims to accept the GNU C extensions, you can simply test
__GNUC__
. If you need to write code that depends on a specific version, you must check more carefully. Each change in the minor version resets the patch level to zero; each change in the major version (which happens rarely) resets the minor version and the patch level to zero. To use the predefined macros directly in the conditional, write it like this:/* Test for version 3.2.0 or later. */ #if __GNUC__ > 3 || \ (__GNUC__ == 3 && (__GNUC_MINOR__ > 2 || \ (__GNUC_MINOR__ == 2 && \ __GNUC_PATCHLEVEL__ > 0))
Another approach is to use the predefined macros to calculate a single number, then compare that against a threshold:
#define GCC_VERSION (__GNUC__ * 10000 \ + __GNUC_MINOR__ * 100 \ + __GNUC_PATCHLEVEL__) /* … */ /* Test for GCC > 3.2.0 */ #if GCC_VERSION > 30200
Many people find this form easier to understand.
__VERSION__
This macro expands to a string constant that describes the version of the compiler in use. You should not rely on its contents’ having any particular form, but you can count on it to contain at least the release number.
__TIMESTAMP__
This macro expands to a string constant that describes the date and time of the last modification of the current source file. The string constant contains abbreviated day of the week, month, day of the month, time in hh:mm:ss form, and the year, in the format
"Sun Sep 16 01:03:52 1973"
. If the day of the month is less than 10, it is padded with a space on the left.If GCC cannot determine that information date, it emits a warning message (once per compilation) and
__TIMESTAMP__
expands to"??? ??? ?? ??:??:?? ????"
.We deprecate the use of this macro for the sake of reproducible compilation.
Next: Directives Within Macro Arguments, Previous: Predefined Macros, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.8 Undefining and Redefining Macros
You can undefine a macro with the #undef
directive.
#undef
takes a single argument, the name of the macro to
undefine. You use the bare macro name, even if the macro is
function-like. It is an error if anything appears on the line after
the macro name. #undef
has no effect if the name is not a
macro.
#define FOO 4 x = FOO; → x = 4; #undef FOO x = FOO; → x = FOO;
Once a macro has been undefined, that identifier may be redefined
as a macro by a subsequent #define
directive. The new definition
need not have any resemblance to the old definition.
You can define a macro again without first undefining it only if the new definition is effectively the same as the old one. Two macro definitions are effectively the same if:
- Both are the same type of macro (object- or function-like).
- All the tokens of the replacement list are the same.
- If there are any parameters, they are the same.
- Whitespace appears in the same places in both. It need not be exactly the same amount of whitespace, though. Remember that comments count as whitespace.
These definitions are effectively the same:
#define FOUR (2 + 2)
#define FOUR (2 + 2)
#define FOUR (2 /* two */ + 2)
but these are not:
#define FOUR (2 + 2) #define FOUR ( 2+2 ) #define FOUR (2 * 2) #define FOUR(score,and,seven,years,ago) (2 + 2)
This allows two different header files to define a common macro.
You can redefine an existing macro with #define, but redefining an existing macro name with a different definition results in a warning.
Next: Macro Pitfalls, Previous: Undefining and Redefining Macros, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.9 Directives Within Macro Arguments
GNU C permits and handles preprocessing directives in the text provided as arguments for a macro. That case is undefined in the C standard. but in GNU C conditional directives in macro arguments are clear and valid.
A paradoxical case is to redefine a macro within the call to that same macro. What happens is, the new definition takes effect in time for pre-expansion of all the arguments, then the original definition is expanded to replace the call. Here is a pathological example:
#define f(x) x x f (first f second #undef f #define f 2 f)
which expands to
first 2 second 2 first 2 second 2
with the semantics described above. We suggest you avoid writing code which does this sort of thing.
Previous: Directives Within Macro Arguments, Up: Macros [Contents][Index]
26.5.10 Macro Pitfalls
In this section we describe some special rules that apply to macros and macro expansion, and point out certain cases in which the rules have counter-intuitive consequences that you must watch out for.
- Misnesting
- Operator Precedence Problems
- Swallowing the Semicolon
- Duplication of Side Effects
- Using
__auto_type
for Local Variables - Self-Referential Macros
- Argument Prescan
Next: Operator Precedence Problems, Up: Macro Pitfalls [Contents][Index]
26.5.10.1 Misnesting
When a macro is called with arguments, the arguments are substituted into the macro body and the result is checked, together with the rest of the input file, for more macro calls. It is possible to piece together a macro call coming partially from the macro body and partially from the arguments. For example,
#define twice(x) (2*(x)) #define call_with_1(x) x(1) call_with_1 (twice) → twice(1) → (2*(1))
Macro definitions do not have to have balanced parentheses. By writing an unbalanced open parenthesis in a macro body, it is possible to create a macro call that begins inside the macro body but ends outside of it. For example,
#define strange(file) fprintf (file, "%s %d",
/* … */
strange(stderr) p, 35)
→ fprintf (stderr, "%s %d", p, 35)
The ability to piece together a macro call can be useful, but the use of unbalanced open parentheses in a macro body is just confusing, and should be avoided.
Next: Swallowing the Semicolon, Previous: Misnesting, Up: Macro Pitfalls [Contents][Index]
26.5.10.2 Operator Precedence Problems
You may have noticed that in most of the macro definition examples shown above, each occurrence of a macro parameter name had parentheses around it. In addition, another pair of parentheses usually surrounds the entire macro definition. Here is why it is best to write macros that way.
Suppose you define a macro as follows,
#define ceil_div(x, y) (x + y - 1) / y
whose purpose is to divide, rounding up. (One use for this operation is
to compute how many int
objects are needed to hold a certain
number of char
objects.) Then suppose it is used as follows:
a = ceil_div (b & c, sizeof (int)); → a = (b & c + sizeof (int) - 1) / sizeof (int);
This does not do what is intended. The operator-precedence rules of C make it equivalent to this:
a = (b & (c + sizeof (int) - 1)) / sizeof (int);
What we want is this:
a = ((b & c) + sizeof (int) - 1)) / sizeof (int);
Defining the macro as
#define ceil_div(x, y) ((x) + (y) - 1) / (y)
provides the desired result.
Unintended grouping can result in another way. Consider sizeof
ceil_div(1, 2)
. That has the appearance of a C expression that would
compute the size of the type of ceil_div (1, 2)
, but in fact it
means something very different. Here is what it expands to:
sizeof ((1) + (2) - 1) / (2)
This would take the size of an integer and divide it by two. The
precedence rules have put the division outside the sizeof
when it
was intended to be inside.
Parentheses around the entire macro definition prevent such problems.
Here, then, is the recommended way to define ceil_div
:
#define ceil_div(x, y) (((x) + (y) - 1) / (y))
Next: Duplication of Side Effects, Previous: Operator Precedence Problems, Up: Macro Pitfalls [Contents][Index]
26.5.10.3 Swallowing the Semicolon
Often it is desirable to define a macro that expands into a compound
statement. Consider, for example, the following macro, that advances a
pointer (the parameter p
says where to find it) across whitespace
characters:
#define SKIP_SPACES(p, limit) \ { char *lim = (limit); \ while (p < lim) { \ if (*p++ != ' ') { \ p--; break; }}}
Here backslash-newline is used to split the macro definition, which must be a single logical line, so that it resembles the way such code would be laid out if not part of a macro definition.
A call to this macro might be SKIP_SPACES (p, lim)
. Strictly
speaking, the call expands to a compound statement, which is a complete
statement with no need for a semicolon to end it. However, since it
looks like a function call, it minimizes confusion if you can use it
like a function call, writing a semicolon afterward, as in
SKIP_SPACES (p, lim);
This can cause trouble before else
statements, because the
semicolon is actually a null statement. Suppose you write
if (*p != 0)
SKIP_SPACES (p, lim);
else /* … */
The presence of two statements—the compound statement and a null
statement—in between the if
condition and the else
makes invalid C code.
The definition of the macro SKIP_SPACES
can be altered to solve
this problem, using a do … while
statement. Here is how:
#define SKIP_SPACES(p, limit) \ do { char *lim = (limit); \ while (p < lim) { \ if (*p++ != ' ') { \ p--; break; }}} \ while (0)
Now SKIP_SPACES (p, lim);
expands into
do { /* … */ } while (0);
which is one statement. The loop executes exactly once; most compilers generate no extra code for it.
Next: Using __auto_type
for Local Variables, Previous: Swallowing the Semicolon, Up: Macro Pitfalls [Contents][Index]
26.5.10.4 Duplication of Side Effects
Many C programs define a macro min
, for “minimum”, like this:
#define min(X, Y) ((X) < (Y) ? (X) : (Y))
When you use this macro with an argument containing a side effect, as shown here,
next = min (x + y, foo (z));
it expands as follows:
next = ((x + y) < (foo (z)) ? (x + y) : (foo (z)));
where x + y
has been substituted for X
and foo (z)
for Y
.
The function foo
is used only once in the statement as it
appears in the program, but the expression foo (z)
has been
substituted twice into the macro expansion. As a result, foo
might be called twice when the statement is executed. If it has side
effects or if it takes a long time to compute, that may be
undesirable. We say that min
is an unsafe macro.
The best solution to this problem is to define min
in a way that
computes the value of foo (z)
only once. In general, that requires
using __auto_type
(see Referring to a Type with __auto_type
). How to use it for this
is described in the following section. See Using __auto_type
for Local Variables.
Otherwise, you will need to be careful when using the macro
min
. For example, you can calculate the value of foo
(z)
, save it in a variable, and use that variable in min
:
#define min(X, Y) ((X) < (Y) ? (X) : (Y))
/* … */
{
int tem = foo (z);
next = min (x + y, tem);
}
(where we assume that foo
returns type int
).
When the repeated value appears as the condition of the ?:
operator and again as its iftrue expression, you can avoid
repeated execution by omitting the iftrue expression, like this:
#define x_or_y(X, Y) ((X) ? : (Y))
In GNU C, this expands to use the first macro argument’s value if that isn’t zero. If that’s zero, it compiles the second argument and uses that value. See Conditional Expression.
Next: Self-Referential Macros, Previous: Duplication of Side Effects, Up: Macro Pitfalls [Contents][Index]
26.5.10.5 Using __auto_type
for Local Variables
The operator __auto_type
makes it possible to
define macros that can work on any data type even though they need to
generate local variable declarations. See Referring to a Type with __auto_type
.
For instance, here’s how to define a safe “maximum” macro that operates on any arithmetic type and computes each of its arguments exactly once:
#define max(a,b) \ ({ __auto_type _a = (a); \ __auto_type _b = (b); \ _a > _b ? _a : _b; })
The ‘({ … })’ notation produces statement expression—a statement that can be used as an expression (see Statements and Declarations in Expressions). Its value is the value of its last statement. This permits us to define local variables and store each argument value into one.
The reason for using names that start with underscores for the local
variables is to avoid conflicts with variable names that occur within
the expressions that are substituted for a
and b
.
Underscore followed by a lower case letter won’t be predefined by the
system in any way.
Next: Argument Prescan, Previous: Using __auto_type
for Local Variables, Up: Macro Pitfalls [Contents][Index]
26.5.10.6 Self-Referential Macros
A self-referential macro is one whose name appears in its definition. Recall that all macro definitions are rescanned for more macros to replace. If the self-reference were considered a use of the macro, it would produce an infinitely large expansion. To prevent this, the self-reference is not considered a macro call: preprocessing leaves it unchanged. Consider an example:
#define foo (4 + foo)
where foo
is also a variable in your program.
Following the ordinary rules, each reference to foo
will expand
into (4 + foo)
; then this will be rescanned and will expand into
(4 + (4 + foo))
; and so on until the computer runs out of memory.
The self-reference rule cuts this process short after one step, at
(4 + foo)
. Therefore, this macro definition has the possibly
useful effect of causing the program to add 4 to the value of foo
wherever foo
is referred to.
In most cases, it is a bad idea to take advantage of this feature. A
person reading the program who sees that foo
is a variable will
not expect that it is a macro as well. The reader will come across the
identifier foo
in the program and think its value should be that
of the variable foo
, whereas in fact the value is four greater.
It is useful to make a macro definition that expands to the macro name itself. If you write
#define EPERM EPERM
then the macro EPERM
expands to EPERM
. Effectively,
preprocessing leaves it unchanged in the source code. You can tell
that it’s a macro with #ifdef
. You might do this if you want
to define numeric constants with an enum
, but have
#ifdef
be true for each constant.
If a macro x
expands to use a macro y
, and the expansion of
y
refers to the macro x
, that is an indirect
self-reference of x
. x
is not expanded in this case
either. Thus, if we have
#define x (4 + y) #define y (2 * x)
then x
and y
expand as follows:
x → (4 + y) → (4 + (2 * x)) y → (2 * x) → (2 * (4 + y))
Each macro is expanded when it appears in the definition of the other macro, but not when it indirectly appears in its own definition.
Previous: Self-Referential Macros, Up: Macro Pitfalls [Contents][Index]
26.5.10.7 Argument Prescan
Macro arguments are completely macro-expanded before they are substituted into a macro body, unless they are stringified or pasted with other tokens. After substitution, the entire macro body, including the substituted arguments, is scanned again for macros to be expanded. The result is that the arguments are scanned twice to expand macro calls in them.
Most of the time, this has no effect. If the argument contained any macro calls, they were expanded during the first scan. The result therefore contains no macro calls, so the second scan does not change it. If the argument were substituted as given, with no prescan, the single remaining scan would find the same macro calls and produce the same results.
You might expect the double scan to change the results when a self-referential macro is used in an argument of another macro (see Self-Referential Macros): the self-referential macro would be expanded once in the first scan, and a second time in the second scan. However, this is not what happens. The self-references that do not expand in the first scan are marked so that they will not expand in the second scan either.
You might wonder, “Why mention the prescan, if it makes no difference? And why not skip it and make preprocessing go faster?” The answer is that the prescan does make a difference in three special cases:
- Nested calls to a macro.
We say that nested calls to a macro occur when a macro’s argument contains a call to that very macro. For example, if
f
is a macro that expects one argument,f (f (1))
is a nested pair of calls tof
. The desired expansion is made by expandingf (1)
and substituting that into the definition off
. The prescan causes the expected result to happen. Without the prescan,f (1)
itself would be substituted as an argument, and the inner use off
would appear during the main scan as an indirect self-reference and would not be expanded. - Macros that call other macros that stringify or concatenate.
If an argument is stringified or concatenated, the prescan does not occur. If you want to expand a macro, then stringify or concatenate its expansion, you can do that by causing one macro to call another macro that does the stringification or concatenation. For instance, if you have
#define AFTERX(x) X_ ## x #define XAFTERX(x) AFTERX(x) #define TABLESIZE 1024 #define BUFSIZE TABLESIZE
then
AFTERX(BUFSIZE)
expands toX_BUFSIZE
, andXAFTERX(BUFSIZE)
expands toX_1024
. (Not toX_TABLESIZE
. Prescan always does a complete expansion.) - Macros used in arguments, whose expansions contain unshielded commas.
This can cause a macro expanded on the second scan to be called with the wrong number of arguments. Here is an example:
#define foo a,b #define bar(x) lose(x) #define lose(x) (1 + (x))
We would like
bar(foo)
to turn into(1 + (foo))
, which would then turn into(1 + (a,b))
. Instead,bar(foo)
expands intolose(a,b)
, which gives an error becauselose
requires a single argument. In this case, the problem is easily solved by the same parentheses that ought to be used to prevent misnesting of arithmetic operations:#define foo (a,b)
or
#define bar(x) lose((x))
The extra pair of parentheses prevents the comma in
foo
’s definition from being interpreted as an argument separator.
Next: Diagnostics, Previous: Macros, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.6 Conditionals
A conditional is a preprocessing directive that controls whether
or not to include a chunk of code in the final token stream that is
compiled. Preprocessing conditionals can test arithmetic expressions,
or whether a name is defined as a macro, or both together using the
special defined
operator.
A preprocessing conditional in C resembles in some ways an if
statement in C, but it is important to understand the difference between
them. The condition in an if
statement is tested during the
execution of your program. Its purpose is to allow your program to
behave differently from run to run, depending on the data it is
operating on. The condition in a preprocessing conditional directive is
tested when your program is compiled. Its purpose is to allow different
code to be included in the program depending on the situation at the
time of compilation.
Sometimes this distinction makes no practical difference. GCC and
other modern compilers often
do test if
statements when a program is compiled, if their
conditions are known not to vary at run time, and eliminate code that
can never be executed. If you can count on your compiler to do this,
you may find that your program is more readable if you use if
statements with constant conditions (perhaps determined by macros). Of
course, you can only use this to exclude code, not type definitions or
other preprocessing directives, and you can only do it if the file
remains syntactically valid when that code is not used.
Next: Syntax of Preprocessing Conditionals, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
26.6.1 Uses of Conditional Directives
There are three usual reasons to use a preprocessing conditional.
- A program may need to use different code depending on the machine or operating system it is to run on. In some cases the code for one operating system may be erroneous on another operating system; for example, it might refer to data types or constants that do not exist on the other system. When this happens, it is not enough to avoid executing the invalid code. Its mere presence will cause the compiler to reject the program. With a preprocessing conditional, the offending code can be effectively excised from the program when it is not valid.
- You may want to be able to compile the same source file into two different programs. One version might make frequent time-consuming consistency checks on its intermediate data, or print the values of those data for debugging, and the other not.
- A conditional whose condition is always false is one way to exclude code from the program but keep it as a sort of comment for future reference.
Simple programs that do not need system-specific logic or complex debugging hooks generally will not need to use preprocessing conditionals.
Next: Deleted Code, Previous: Uses of Conditional Directives, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
26.6.2 Syntax of Preprocessing Conditionals
A preprocessing conditional begins with a conditional
directive: #if
, #ifdef
or #ifndef
.
Next: The #if
directive, Up: Syntax of Preprocessing Conditionals [Contents][Index]
26.6.2.1 The #ifdef
directive
The simplest sort of conditional is
#ifdef MACRO controlled text #endif /* MACRO */
This block is called a conditional group. The body, controlled text, will be included in compilation if and only if MACRO is defined. We say that the conditional succeeds if MACRO is defined, fails if it is not.
The controlled text inside a conditional can include
preprocessing directives. They are executed only if the conditional
succeeds. You can nest conditional groups inside other conditional
groups, but they must be completely nested. In other words,
#endif
always matches the nearest #ifdef
(or
#ifndef
, or #if
). Also, you cannot start a conditional
group in one file and end it in another.
Even if a conditional fails, the controlled text inside it is still run through initial transformations and tokenization. Therefore, it must all be lexically valid C. Normally the only way this matters is that all comments and string literals inside a failing conditional group must still be properly ended.
The comment following the #endif
is not required, but it is a
good practice if there is a lot of controlled text, because it
helps people match the #endif
to the corresponding #ifdef
.
Older programs sometimes put macro directly after the
#endif
without enclosing it in a comment. This is invalid code
according to the C standard, but it only causes a warning in GNU C.
It never affects which #ifndef
the #endif
matches.
Sometimes you wish to use some code if a macro is not defined.
You can do this by writing #ifndef
instead of #ifdef
.
One common use of #ifndef
is to include code only the first
time a header file is included. See Once-Only Headers.
Macro definitions can vary between compilations for several reasons. Here are some samples.
- Some macros are predefined on each kind of machine (see System-specific Predefined Macros in Using the GNU Compiler Collection). This allows you to provide code specially tuned for a particular machine.
- System header files define more macros, associated with the features they implement. You can test these macros with conditionals to avoid using a system feature on a machine where it is not implemented.
- Macros can be defined or undefined with the -D and -U command-line options when you compile the program. You can arrange to compile the same source file into two different programs by choosing a macro name to specify which program you want, writing conditionals to test whether or how this macro is defined, and then controlling the state of the macro with command-line options, perhaps set in the file Makefile. See Invoking GCC in Using the GNU Compiler Collection.
- Your program might have a special header file (often called
config.h) that is adjusted when the program is compiled. It can
define or not define macros depending on the features of the system and
the desired capabilities of the program. The adjustment can be
automated by a tool such as
autoconf
, or done by hand.
Next: The defined
test, Previous: The #ifdef
directive, Up: Syntax of Preprocessing Conditionals [Contents][Index]
26.6.2.2 The #if
directive
The #if
directive allows you to test the value of an integer arithmetic
expression, rather than the mere existence of one macro. Its syntax is
#if expression controlled text #endif /* expression */
expression is a C expression of integer type, subject to stringent restrictions so its value can be computed at compile time. It may contain
- Integer constants.
- Character constants, which are interpreted as they would be in normal code.
- Arithmetic operators for addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division, bitwise operations, shifts, comparisons, and logical
operations (
&&
and||
). The latter two obey the usual short-circuiting rules of standard C. - Macros. All macros in the expression are expanded before actual computation of the expression’s value begins.
- Uses of the
defined
operator, which lets you check whether macros are defined in the middle of an#if
. - Identifiers that are not macros, which are all considered to be the
number zero. This allows you to write
#if MACRO
instead of#ifdef MACRO
, if you know that MACRO, when defined, will always have a nonzero value. Function-like macros used without their function call parentheses are also treated as zero.In some contexts this shortcut is undesirable. The -Wundef requests warnings for any identifier in an
#if
that is not defined as a macro.
Preprocessing does not know anything about the data types of C.
Therefore, sizeof
operators are not recognized in #if
;
sizeof
is simply an identifier, and if it is not a macro, it
stands for zero. This is likely to make the expression invalid.
Preprocessing does not recognize enum
constants; they too are
simply identifiers, so if they are not macros, they stand for zero.
Preprocessing calculates the value of expression, and carries
out all calculations in the widest integer type known to the compiler;
on most machines supported by GNU C this is 64 bits. This is not the
same rule as the compiler uses to calculate the value of a constant
expression, and may give different results in some cases. If the
value comes out to be nonzero, the #if
succeeds and the
controlled text is compiled; otherwise it is skipped.
Next: The #else
directive, Previous: The #if
directive, Up: Syntax of Preprocessing Conditionals [Contents][Index]
26.6.2.3 The defined
test
The special operator defined
is used in #if
and
#elif
expressions to test whether a certain name is defined as a
macro. defined name
and defined (name)
are
both expressions whose value is 1 if name is defined as a macro at
the current point in the program, and 0 otherwise. Thus, #if defined MACRO
is precisely equivalent to #ifdef MACRO
.
defined
is useful when you wish to test more than one macro for
existence at once. For example,
#if defined (__arm__) || defined (__PPC__)
would succeed if either of the names __arm__
or
__PPC__
is defined as a macro—in other words,
when compiling for ARM processors or PowerPC processors.
Conditionals written like this:
#if defined BUFSIZE && BUFSIZE >= 1024
can generally be simplified to just #if BUFSIZE >= 1024
,
since if BUFSIZE
is not defined, it will be interpreted as having
the value zero.
In GCC, you can include defined
as part of another macro definition,
like this:
#define MACRO_DEFINED(X) defined X #if MACRO_DEFINED(BUFSIZE)
which would expand the #if
expression to:
#if defined BUFSIZE
Generating defined
in this way is a GNU C extension.
Next: The #elif
directive, Previous: The defined
test, Up: Syntax of Preprocessing Conditionals [Contents][Index]
26.6.2.4 The #else
directive
The #else
directive can be added to a conditional to provide
alternative text to be used if the condition fails. This is what it
looks like:
#if expression text-if-true #else /* Not expression */ text-if-false #endif /* Not expression */
If expression is nonzero, the text-if-true is included and the text-if-false is skipped. If expression is zero, the opposite happens.
You can use #else
with #ifdef
and #ifndef
, too.
Previous: The #else
directive, Up: Syntax of Preprocessing Conditionals [Contents][Index]
26.6.2.5 The #elif
directive
One common case of nested conditionals is used to check for more than two possible alternatives. For example, you might have
#if X == 1 /* … */ #else /* X != 1 */ #if X == 2 /* … */ #else /* X != 2 */ /* … */ #endif /* X != 2 */ #endif /* X != 1 */
Another conditional directive, #elif
, allows this to be
abbreviated as follows:
#if X == 1 /* … */ #elif X == 2 /* … */ #else /* X != 2 and X != 1*/ /* … */ #endif /* X != 2 and X != 1*/
#elif
stands for “else if”. Like #else
, it goes in the
middle of a conditional group and subdivides it; it does not require a
matching #endif
of its own. Like #if
, the #elif
directive includes an expression to be tested. The text following the
#elif
is processed only if the original #if
-condition
failed and the #elif
condition succeeds.
More than one #elif
can go in the same conditional group. Then
the text after each #elif
is processed only if the #elif
condition succeeds after the original #if
and all previous
#elif
directives within it have failed.
#else
is allowed after any number of #elif
directives, but
#elif
may not follow #else
.
Previous: Syntax of Preprocessing Conditionals, Up: Conditionals [Contents][Index]
26.6.3 Deleted Code
If you replace or delete a part of the program but want to keep the old code in the file for future reference, commenting it out is not so straightforward in C. Block comments do not nest, so the first comment inside the old code will end the commenting-out. The probable result is a flood of syntax errors.
One way to avoid this problem is to use an always-false conditional
instead. For instance, put #if 0
before the deleted code and
#endif
after it. This works even if the code being turned
off contains conditionals, but they must be entire conditionals
(balanced #if
and #endif
).
Some people use #ifdef notdef
instead. This is risky, because
notdef
might be accidentally defined as a macro, and then the
conditional would succeed. #if 0
can be counted on to fail.
Do not use #if 0
around text that is not C code. Use a real
comment, instead. The interior of #if 0
must consist of complete
tokens; in particular, single-quote characters must balance. Comments
often contain unbalanced single-quote characters (known in English as
apostrophes). These confuse #if 0
. They don’t confuse
‘/*’.
Next: Line Control, Previous: Conditionals, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.7 Diagnostics
The directive #error
reports a fatal error. The
tokens forming the rest of the line following #error
are used
as the error message.
The usual place to use #error
is inside a conditional that
detects a combination of parameters that you know the program does not
properly support. For example,
#if !defined(UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP) && defined(DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO) #error "DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO requires UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP." #endif
The directive #warning
is like #error
, but it reports a
warning instead of an error. The tokens following #warning
are
used as the warning message.
You might use #warning
in obsolete header files, with a message
saying which header file to use instead.
Neither #error
nor #warning
macro-expands its argument.
Internal whitespace sequences are each replaced with a single space.
The line must consist of complete tokens. It is wisest to make the
argument of these directives be a single string constant; this avoids
problems with apostrophes and the like.
Next: Null Directive, Previous: Diagnostics, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.8 Line Control
Due to C’s widespread availability and low-level nature, it is often used as the target language for translation of other languages, or for the output of lexical analyzers and parsers (e.g., lex/flex and yacc/bison). Line control enables the user to track diagnostics back to the location in the original language.
The C compiler knows the location in the source file where each token came from: file name, starting line and column, and final line and column. (Column numbers are used only for error messages.)
When a program generates C source code, as the Bison parser generator does, often it copies some of that C code from another file. For instance parts of the output from Bison are generated from scratch or come from a standard parser file, but Bison copies the rest from Bison’s input file. Errors in that code, at compile time or run time, should refer to that file, which is the real source code. To make that happen, Bison generates line-control directives that the C compiler understands.
#line
is a directive that specifies the original line number
and source file name for subsequent code. #line
has three
variants:
#line linenum
linenum is a non-negative decimal integer constant. It specifies the line number that should be reported for the following line of input. Subsequent lines are counted from linenum.
#line linenum filename
linenum is the same as for the first form, and has the same effect. In addition, filename is a string constant that specifies the source file name. Subsequent source lines are recorded as coming from that file, until something else happens to change that. filename is interpreted according to the normal rules for a string constant. Backslash escapes are interpreted, in contrast to
#include
.#line anything else
anything else is checked for macro calls, which are expanded. The result should match one of the above two forms.
#line
directives alter the results of the __FILE__
and
__LINE__
symbols from that point on. See Predefined Macros.
Previous: Line Control, Up: Preprocessing [Contents][Index]
26.9 Null Directive
The null directive consists of a #
followed by a newline,
with only whitespace and comments in between. It has no
effect on the output of the compiler.
Next: Floating Point in Depth, Previous: Preprocessing, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
27 Integers in Depth
This chapter explains the machine-level details of integer types: how they are represented as bits in memory, and the range of possible values for each integer type.
Next: Maximum and Minimum Values, Up: Integers in Depth [Contents][Index]
27.1 Integer Representations
Modern computers store integer values as binary (base-2) numbers that
occupy a single unit of storage, typically either as an 8-bit
char
, a 16-bit short int
, a 32-bit int
, or
possibly, a 64-bit long long int
. Whether a long int
is
a 32-bit or a 64-bit value is system dependent.11
The macro CHAR_BIT
, defined in limits.h, gives the number
of bits in type char
. On any real operating system, the value
is 8.
The fixed sizes of numeric types necessarily limits their range of values, and the particular encoding of integers decides what that range is.
For unsigned integers, the entire space is used to represent a nonnegative value. Signed integers are stored using two’s-complement representation: a signed integer with n bits has a range from -2(n - 1) to -1 to 0 to 1 to +2(n - 1) - 1, inclusive. The leftmost, or high-order, bit is called the sign bit.
In two’s-complement representation, there is only one value that means zero, and the most negative number lacks a positive counterpart. As a result, negating that number causes overflow; in practice, its result is that number back again. We will revisit that peculiarity shortly.
For example, a two’s-complement signed 8-bit integer can represent all decimal numbers from -128 to +127. Negating -128 ought to give +128, but that value won’t fit in 8 bits, so the operation yields -128.
Decades ago, there were computers that used other representations for signed integers, but they are long gone and not worth any effort to support. The GNU C language does not support them.
When an arithmetic operation produces a value that is too big to represent, the operation is said to overflow. In C, integer overflow does not interrupt the control flow or signal an error. What it does depends on signedness.
For unsigned arithmetic, the result of an operation that overflows is the n low-order bits of the correct value. If the correct value is representable in n bits, that is always the result; thus we often say that “integer arithmetic is exact,” omitting the crucial qualifying phrase “as long as the exact result is representable.”
In principle, a C program should be written so that overflow never occurs for signed integers, but in GNU C you can specify various ways of handling such overflow (see Integer Overflow).
Integer representations are best understood by looking at a table for a tiny integer size; here are the possible values for an integer with three bits:
Unsigned | Signed | Bits | 2s Complement |
---|---|---|---|
0 | 0 | 000 | 000 (0) |
1 | 1 | 001 | 111 (-1) |
2 | 2 | 010 | 110 (-2) |
3 | 3 | 011 | 101 (-3) |
4 | -4 | 100 | 100 (-4) |
5 | -3 | 101 | 011 (3) |
6 | -2 | 110 | 010 (2) |
7 | -1 | 111 | 001 (1) |
The parenthesized decimal numbers in the last column represent the signed meanings of the two’s-complement of the line’s value. Recall that, in two’s-complement encoding, the high-order bit is 0 when the number is nonnegative.
We can now understand the peculiar behavior of negation of the most negative two’s-complement integer: start with 0b100, invert the bits to get 0b011, and add 1: we get 0b100, the value we started with.
We can also see overflow behavior in two’s-complement:
3 + 1 = 0b011 + 0b001 = 0b100 = (-4) 3 + 2 = 0b011 + 0b010 = 0b101 = (-3) 3 + 3 = 0b011 + 0b011 = 0b110 = (-2)
A sum of two nonnegative signed values that overflows has a 1 in the sign bit, so the exact positive result is truncated to a negative value.
Previous: Integer Representations, Up: Integers in Depth [Contents][Index]
27.2 Maximum and Minimum Values
For each primitive integer type, there is a standard macro defined in
limits.h that gives the largest value that type can hold. For
instance, for type int
, the maximum value is INT_MAX
.
On a 32-bit computer, that is equal to 2,147,483,647. The
maximum value for unsigned int
is UINT_MAX
, which on a
32-bit computer is equal to 4,294,967,295. Likewise, there are
SHRT_MAX
, LONG_MAX
, and LLONG_MAX
, and
corresponding unsigned limits USHRT_MAX
, ULONG_MAX
, and
ULLONG_MAX
.
Since there are three ways to specify a char
type, there are
also three limits: CHAR_MAX
, SCHAR_MAX
, and
UCHAR_MAX
.
For each type that is or might be signed, there is another symbol that
gives the minimum value it can hold. (Just replace MAX
with
MIN
in the names listed above.) There is no minimum limit
symbol for types specified with unsigned
because the
minimum for them is universally zero.
INT_MIN
is not the negative of INT_MAX
. In
two’s-complement representation, the most negative number is 1 less
than the negative of the most positive number. Thus, INT_MIN
on a 32-bit computer has the value -2,147,483,648. You can’t
actually write the value that way in C, since it would overflow.
That’s a good reason to use INT_MIN
to specify
that value. Its definition is written to avoid overflow.
This is part of the GNU C Intro and Reference Manual and covered by its license.
Next: Compilation, Previous: Integers in Depth, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
28 Floating Point in Depth
- Floating-Point Representations
- Floating-Point Type Specifications
- Special Floating-Point Values
- Invalid Optimizations
- Floating Arithmetic Exception Flags
- Exact Floating-Point Arithmetic
- Rounding
- Rounding Issues
- Significance Loss
- Fused Multiply-Add
- Error Recovery
- Exact Floating-Point Constants
- Handling Infinity
- Handling NaN
- Signed Zeros
- Scaling by Powers of the Base
- Rounding Control
- Machine Epsilon
- Complex Arithmetic
- Round-Trip Base Conversion
- Further Reading
28.1 Floating-Point Representations
Storing numbers as floating point allows representation of numbers with fractional values, in a range larger than that of hardware integers. A floating-point number consists of a sign bit, a significand (also called the mantissa), and a power of a fixed base. GNU C uses the floating-point representations specified by the IEEE 754-2008 Standard for Floating-Point Arithmetic.
The IEEE 754-2008 specification defines basic binary floating-point
formats of five different sizes: 16-bit, 32-bit, 64-bit, 128-bit, and
256-bit. The formats of 32, 64, and 128 bits are used for the
standard C types float
, double
, and long double
.
GNU C supports the 16-bit floating point type _Float16
on some
platforms, but does not support the 256-bit floating point type.
Each of the formats encodes the floating-point number as a sign bit. After this comes an exponent that specifies a power of 2 (with a fixed offset). Then comes the significand.
The first bit of the significand, before the binary point, is always 1, so there is no need to store it in memory. It is called the hidden bit because it doesn’t appear in the floating-point number as used in the computer itself.
All of those floating-point formats are sign-magnitude representations, so +0 and -0 are different values.
Besides the IEEE 754 format 128-bit float, GNU C also offers a format consisting of a pair of 64-bit floating point numbers. This lacks the full exponent range of the IEEE 128-bit format, but is useful when the underlying hardware platform does not support that.
Next: Special Floating-Point Values, Previous: Floating-Point Representations, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.2 Floating-Point Type Specifications
The standard library header file float.h defines a number of
constants that describe the platform’s implementation of
floating-point types float
, double
and long
double
. They include:
FLT_MIN
DBL_MIN
LDBL_MIN
Defines the minimum normalized positive floating-point values that can be represented with the type.
FLT_HAS_SUBNORM
DBL_HAS_SUBNORM
LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM
Defines if the floating-point type supports subnormal (or “denormalized”) numbers or not (see subnormal numbers).
FLT_TRUE_MIN
DBL_TRUE_MIN
LDBL_TRUE_MIN
Defines the minimum positive values (including subnormal values) that can be represented with the type.
FLT_MAX
DBL_MAX
LDBL_MAX
Defines the largest values that can be represented with the type.
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG
DBL_DECIMAL_DIG
LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG
Defines the number of decimal digits
n
such that any floating-point number that can be represented in the type can be rounded to a floating-point number withn
decimal digits, and back again, without losing any precision of the value.
Next: Invalid Optimizations, Previous: Floating-Point Type Specifications, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.3 Special Floating-Point Values
IEEE floating point provides for special values that are not ordinary numbers.
- infinities
+Infinity
and-Infinity
are two different infinite values, one positive and one negative. These result from operations such as1 / 0
,Infinity + Infinity
,Infinity * Infinity
, andInfinity + finite
, and also from a result that is finite, but larger than the most positive possible value or smaller than the most negative possible value.See Handling Infinity, for more about working with infinities.
- NaNs (not a number) ¶
There are two special values, called Not-a-Number (NaN): a quiet NaN (QNaN), and a signaling NaN (SNaN).
A QNaN is produced by operations for which the value is undefined in real arithmetic, such as
0 / 0
,sqrt (-1)
,Infinity - Infinity
, and any basic operation in which an operand is a QNaN.The signaling NaN is intended for initializing otherwise-unassigned storage, and the goal is that unlike a QNaN, an SNaN does cause an interrupt that can be caught by a software handler, diagnosed, and reported. In practice, little use has been made of signaling NaNs, because the most common CPUs in desktop and portable computers fail to implement the full IEEE 754 Standard, and supply only one kind of NaN, the quiet one. Also, programming-language standards have taken decades to catch up to the IEEE 754 standard, and implementations of those language standards make an additional delay before programmers become willing to use these features.
To enable support for signaling NaNs, use the GCC command-line option -fsignaling-nans, but this is an experimental feature and may not work as expected in every situation.
A NaN has a sign bit, but its value means nothing.
See Handling NaN, for more about working with NaNs.
- subnormal numbers ¶
-
It can happen that a computed floating-point value is too small to represent, such as when two tiny numbers are multiplied. The result is then said to underflow. The traditional behavior before the IEEE 754 Standard was to use zero as the result, and possibly to report the underflow in some sort of program output.
The IEEE 754 Standard is vague about whether rounding happens before detection of floating underflow and overflow, or after, and CPU designers may choose either.
However, the Standard does something unusual compared to earlier designs, and that is that when the result is smaller than the smallest normalized representable value (i.e., one in which the leading significand bit is
1
), the normalization requirement is relaxed, leading zero bits are permitted, and precision is gradually lost until there are no more bits in the significand. That phenomenon is called gradual underflow, and it serves important numerical purposes, although it does reduce the precision of the final result. Some floating-point designs allow you to choose at compile time, or even at run time, whether underflows are gradual, or are flushed abruptly to zero. Numbers that have entered the region of gradual underflow are called subnormal.You can use the library functions
fesetround
andfegetround
to set and get the rounding mode. Rounding modes are defined (if supported by the platform) infenv.h
as:FE_UPWARD
to round toward positive infinity;FE_DOWNWARD
to round toward negative infinity;FE_TOWARDZERO
to round toward zero; andFE_TONEAREST
to round to the nearest representable value, the default mode. It is best to useFE_TONEAREST
except when there is a special need for some other mode.
Next: Floating Arithmetic Exception Flags, Previous: Special Floating-Point Values, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.4 Invalid Optimizations
Signed zeros, Infinity, and NaN invalidate some optimizations by programmers and compilers that might otherwise have seemed obvious:
x + 0
andx - 0
are not the same asx
whenx
is zero, because the result depends on the rounding rule. See Rounding, for more about rounding rules.x * 0.0
is not the same as0.0
whenx
is Infinity, a NaN, or negative zero.x / x
is not the same as1.0
whenx
is Infinity, a NaN, or zero.(x - y)
is not the same as-(y - x)
because when the operands are finite and equal, one evaluates to+0
and the other to-0
.x - x
is not the same as0.0
when x is Infinity or a NaN.x == x
andx != x
are not equivalent to1
and0
when x is a NaN.x < y
andisless (x, y)
are not equivalent, because the first sets a sticky exception flag (see Floating Arithmetic Exception Flags) when an operand is a NaN, whereas the second does not affect that flag. The same holds for the otherisxxx
functions that are companions to relational operators. See FP Comparison Functions in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.
The -funsafe-math-optimizations option enables these optimizations.
Next: Exact Floating-Point Arithmetic, Previous: Invalid Optimizations, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.5 Floating Arithmetic Exception Flags
Sticky exception flags record the occurrence of particular conditions: once set, they remain set until the program explicitly clears them.
The conditions include invalid operand,
division-by_zero, inexact result (i.e., one that
required rounding), underflow, and overflow. Some
extended floating-point designs offer several additional exception
flags. The functions feclearexcept
, feraiseexcept
,
fetestexcept
, fegetexceptflags
, and
fesetexceptflags
provide a standardized interface to those
flags. See Status bit operations in The GNU C Library
Reference Manual.
One important use of those flags is to do a
computation that is normally expected to be exact in floating-point
arithmetic, but occasionally might not be, in which case, corrective
action is needed. You can clear the inexact result flag with a
call to feclearexcept (FE_INEXACT)
, do the computation, and
then test the flag with fetestexcept (FE_INEXACT)
; the result
of that call is 0 if the flag is not set (there was no rounding), and
1 when there was rounding (which, we presume, implies the program has
to correct for that).
Next: Rounding, Previous: Floating Arithmetic Exception Flags, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.6 Exact Floating-Point Arithmetic
As long as the numbers are exactly representable (fractions whose denominator is a power of 2), and intermediate results do not require rounding, then floating-point arithmetic is exact. It is easy to predict how many digits are needed for the results of arithmetic operations:
- addition and subtraction of two n-digit values with the
same exponent require at most
n + 1
digits, but when the exponents differ, many more digits may be needed; - multiplication of two n-digit values requires exactly 2 n digits;
- although integer division produces a quotient and a remainder of no more than n-digits, floating-point remainder and square root may require an unbounded number of digits, and the quotient can need many more digits than can be stored.
Whenever a result requires more than n digits, rounding is needed.
Next: Rounding Issues, Previous: Exact Floating-Point Arithmetic, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.7 Rounding
When floating-point arithmetic produces a result that can’t fit exactly in the significand of the type that’s in use, it has to round the value. The basic arithmetic operations—addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root—always produce a result that is equivalent to the exact, possibly infinite-precision result rounded to storage precision according to the current rounding rule.
Rounding sets the FE_INEXACT
exception flag (see Floating Arithmetic Exception Flags). This enables programs to determine that rounding has
occurred.
Rounding consists of adjusting the exponent to bring the significand back to the required base-point alignment, then applying the current rounding rule to squeeze the significand into the fixed available size.
The current rule is selected at run time from four options. Here they are:
- * round-to-nearest, with ties rounded to an even integer;
- * round-up, towards
+Infinity
; - * round-down, towards
-Infinity
; - * round-towards-zero.
Under those four rounding rules, a decimal value
-1.2345
that is to be rounded to a four-digit result would
become -1.234
, -1.234
, -1.235
, and
-1.234
, respectively.
The default rounding rule is round-to-nearest, because that has the least bias, and produces the lowest average error. When the true result lies exactly halfway between two representable machine numbers, the result is rounded to the one that ends with an even digit.
The round-towards-zero rule was common on many early computer designs, because it is the easiest to implement: it just requires silent truncation of all extra bits.
The two other rules, round-up and round-down, are essential for implementing interval arithmetic, whereby each arithmetic operation produces lower and upper bounds that are guaranteed to enclose the exact result.
See Rounding Control, for details on getting and setting the current rounding mode.
Next: Significance Loss, Previous: Rounding, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.8 Rounding Issues
The default IEEE 754 rounding mode minimizes errors, and most normal computations should not suffer any serious accumulation of errors from rounding.
Of course, you can contrive examples where that is not so. Here is one: iterate a square root, then attempt to recover the original value by repeated squaring.
#include <stdio.h> #include <math.h> int main (void) { double x = 100.0; double y; int n, k; for (n = 10; n <= 100; n += 10) { y = x; for (k = 0; k < n; ++k) y = sqrt (y); for (k = 0; k < n; ++k) y *= y; printf ("n = %3d; x = %.0f\ty = %.6f\n", n, x, y); } return 0; }
Here is the output:
n = 10; x = 100 y = 100.000000 n = 20; x = 100 y = 100.000000 n = 30; x = 100 y = 99.999977 n = 40; x = 100 y = 99.981025 n = 50; x = 100 y = 90.017127 n = 60; x = 100 y = 1.000000 n = 70; x = 100 y = 1.000000 n = 80; x = 100 y = 1.000000 n = 90; x = 100 y = 1.000000 n = 100; x = 100 y = 1.000000
After 50 iterations, y
has barely one correct digit, and
soon after, there are no correct digits.
Next: Fused Multiply-Add, Previous: Rounding Issues, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.9 Significance Loss
A much more serious source of error in floating-point computation is significance loss from subtraction of nearly equal values. This means that the number of bits in the significand of the result is fewer than the size of the value would permit. If the values being subtracted are close enough, but still not equal, a single subtraction can wipe out all correct digits, possibly contaminating all future computations.
Floating-point calculations can sometimes be carefully designed so
that significance loss is not possible, such as summing a series where
all terms have the same sign. For example, the Taylor series
expansions of the trigonometric and hyperbolic sines have terms of
identical magnitude, of the general form x**(2*n +
1) / (2*n + 1)!
. However, those in the trigonometric sine series
alternate in sign, while those in the hyperbolic sine series are all
positive. Here is the output of two small programs that sum k
terms of the series for sin (x)
, and compare the computed
sums with known-to-be-accurate library functions:
x = 10 k = 51 s (x) = -0.544_021_110_889_270 sin (x) = -0.544_021_110_889_370 x = 20 k = 81 s (x) = 0.912_945_250_749_573 sin (x) = 0.912_945_250_727_628 x = 30 k = 109 s (x) = -0.987_813_746_058_855 sin (x) = -0.988_031_624_092_862 x = 40 k = 137 s (x) = 0.617_400_430_980_474 sin (x) = 0.745_113_160_479_349 x = 50 k = 159 s (x) = 57_105.187_673_745_720_532 sin (x) = -0.262_374_853_703_929 // sinh(x) series summation with positive signs // with k terms needed to converge to machine precision x = 10 k = 47 t (x) = 1.101_323_287_470_340e+04 sinh (x) = 1.101_323_287_470_339e+04 x = 20 k = 69 t (x) = 2.425_825_977_048_951e+08 sinh (x) = 2.425_825_977_048_951e+08 x = 30 k = 87 t (x) = 5.343_237_290_762_229e+12 sinh (x) = 5.343_237_290_762_231e+12 x = 40 k = 105 t (x) = 1.176_926_334_185_100e+17 sinh (x) = 1.176_926_334_185_100e+17 x = 50 k = 121 t (x) = 2.592_352_764_293_534e+21 sinh (x) = 2.592_352_764_293_536e+21
We have added underscores to the numbers to enhance readability.
The sinh (x)
series with positive terms can be summed to
high accuracy. By contrast, the series for sin (x)
suffers increasing significance loss, so that when x = 30 only
two correct digits remain. Soon after, all digits are wrong, and the
answers are complete nonsense.
An important skill in numerical programming is to recognize when
significance loss is likely to contaminate a computation, and revise
the algorithm to reduce this problem. Sometimes, the only practical
way to do so is to compute in higher intermediate precision, which is
why the extended types like long double
are important.
Next: Error Recovery, Previous: Significance Loss, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.10 Fused Multiply-Add
In 1990, when IBM introduced the POWER architecture, the CPU
provided a previously unknown instruction, the fused
multiply-add (FMA). It computes the value x * y + z
with
an exact double-length product, followed by an addition with a
single rounding. Numerical computation often needs pairs of
multiply and add operations, for which the FMA is well-suited.
On the POWER architecture, there are two dedicated registers that
hold permanent values of 0.0
and 1.0
, and the
normal multiply and add instructions are just
wrappers around the FMA that compute x * y + 0.0
and
x * 1.0 + z
, respectively.
In the early days, it appeared that the main benefit of the FMA was getting two floating-point operations for the price of one, almost doubling the performance of some algorithms. However, numerical analysts have since shown numerous uses of the FMA for significantly enhancing accuracy. We discuss one of the most important ones in the next section.
A few other architectures have since included the FMA, and most
provide variants for the related operations x * y - z
(FMS), -x * y + z
(FNMA), and -x * y - z
(FNMS).
The functions fmaf
, fma
, and fmal
implement fused
multiply-add for the float
, double
, and long
double
data types. Correct implementation of the FMA in software is
difficult, and some systems that appear to provide those functions do
not satisfy the single-rounding requirement. That situation should
change as more programmers use the FMA operation, and more CPUs
provide FMA in hardware.
Use the -ffp-contract=fast option to allow generation of FMA instructions, or -ffp-contract=off to disallow it.
Next: Exact Floating-Point Constants, Previous: Fused Multiply-Add, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.11 Error Recovery
When two numbers are combined by one of the four basic operations, the result often requires rounding to storage precision. For accurate computation, one would like to be able to recover that rounding error. With historical floating-point designs, it was difficult to do so portably, but now that IEEE 754 arithmetic is almost universal, the job is much easier.
For addition with the default round-to-nearest rounding mode, we can determine the error in a sum like this:
volatile double err, sum, tmp, x, y; if (fabs (x) >= fabs (y)) { sum = x + y; tmp = sum - x; err = y - tmp; } else /* fabs (x) < fabs (y) */ { sum = x + y; tmp = sum - y; err = x - tmp; }
Now, x + y
is exactly represented by sum + err
.
This basic operation, which has come to be called twosum
in the numerical-analysis literature, is the first key to tracking,
and accounting for, rounding error.
To determine the error in subtraction, just swap the +
and
-
operators.
We used the volatile
qualifier (see volatile
Variables and Fields) in the
declaration of the variables, which forces the compiler to store and
retrieve them from memory, and prevents the compiler from optimizing
err = y - ((x + y) - x)
into err = 0
.
For multiplication, we can compute the rounding error without magnitude tests with the FMA operation (see Fused Multiply-Add), like this:
volatile double err, prod, x, y;
prod = x * y; /* rounded product */
err = fma (x, y, -prod); /* exact product = prod + err
*/
For addition, subtraction, and multiplication, we can represent the exact result with the notional sum of two values. However, the exact result of division, remainder, or square root potentially requires an infinite number of digits, so we can at best approximate it. Nevertheless, we can compute an error term that is close to the true error: it is just that error value, rounded to machine precision.
For division, you can approximate x / y
with quo + err
like this:
volatile double err, quo, x, y; quo = x / y; err = fma (-quo, y, x) / y;
For square root, we can approximate sqrt (x)
with root +
err
like this:
volatile double err, root, x; root = sqrt (x); err = fma (-root, root, x) / (root + root);
With the reliable and predictable floating-point design provided by IEEE 754 arithmetic, we now have the tools we need to track errors in the five basic floating-point operations, and we can effectively simulate computing in twice working precision, which is sometimes sufficient to remove almost all traces of arithmetic errors.
Next: Handling Infinity, Previous: Error Recovery, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.12 Exact Floating-Point Constants
One of the frustrations that numerical programmers have suffered
with since the dawn of digital computers is the inability to
precisely specify numbers in their programs. On the early
decimal machines, that was not an issue: you could write a
constant 1e-30
and be confident of that exact value
being used in floating-point operations. However, when the
hardware works in a base other than 10, then human-specified
numbers have to be converted to that base, and then converted
back again at output time. The two base conversions are rarely
exact, and unwanted rounding errors are introduced.
As computers usually represent numbers in a base other than 10,
numbers often must be converted to and from different bases, and
rounding errors can occur during conversion. This problem is solved
in C using hexademical floating-point constants. For example,
+0x1.fffffcp-1
is the number that is the IEEE 754 32-bit value
closest to, but below, 1.0
. The significand is represented as a
hexadecimal fraction, and the power of two is written in
decimal following the exponent letter p
(the traditional
exponent letter e
is not possible, because it is a hexadecimal
digit).
In printf
and scanf
and related functions, you can use
the ‘%a’ and ‘%A’ format specifiers for writing and reading
hexadecimal floating-point values. ‘%a’ writes them with lower
case letters and ‘%A’ writes them with upper case letters. For
instance, this code reproduces our sample number:
printf ("%a\n", 1.0 - pow (2.0, -23)); -| 0x1.fffffcp-1
The strtod
family was similarly extended to recognize
numbers in that new format.
If you want to ensure exact data representation for transfer of floating-point numbers between C programs on different computers, then hexadecimal constants are an optimum choice.
Next: Handling NaN, Previous: Exact Floating-Point Constants, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.13 Handling Infinity
As we noted earlier, the IEEE 754 model of computing is not to stop the program when exceptional conditions occur. It takes note of exceptional values or conditions by setting sticky exception flags, or by producing results with the special values Infinity and QNaN. In this section, we discuss Infinity; see Handling NaN for the other.
In GNU C, you can create a value of negative Infinity in software like this:
double x; x = -1.0 / 0.0;
GNU C supplies the __builtin_inf
, __builtin_inff
, and
__builtin_infl
macros, and the GNU C Library provides the
INFINITY
macro, all of which are compile-time constants for
positive infinity.
GNU C also provides a standard function to test for an Infinity:
isinf (x)
returns 1
if the argument is a signed
infinity, and 0
if not.
Infinities can be compared, and all Infinities of the same sign are equal: there is no notion in IEEE 754 arithmetic of different kinds of Infinities, as there are in some areas of mathematics. Positive Infinity is larger than any finite value, and negative Infinity is smaller than any finite value.
Infinities propagate in addition, subtraction, multiplication,
and square root, but in division, they disappear, because of the
rule that finite / Infinity
is 0.0
. Thus, an
overflow in an intermediate computation that produces an Infinity
is likely to be noticed later in the final results. The programmer can
then decide whether the overflow is expected, and acceptable, or whether
the code possibly has a bug, or needs to be run in higher
precision, or redesigned to avoid the production of the Infinity.
Next: Signed Zeros, Previous: Handling Infinity, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.14 Handling NaN
NaNs are not numbers: they represent values from computations that produce undefined results. They have a distinctive property that makes them unlike any other floating-point value: they are unequal to everything, including themselves! Thus, you can write a test for a NaN like this:
if (x != x) printf ("x is a NaN\n");
This test works in GNU C, but some compilers might evaluate that test
expression as false without properly checking for the NaN value.
A more portable way to test for NaN is to use the isnan
function declared in math.h
:
if (isnan (x)) printf ("x is a NaN\n");
See Floating Point Classes in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.
One important use of NaNs is marking of missing data. For example, in statistics, such data must be omitted from computations. Use of any particular finite value for missing data would eventually collide with real data, whereas such data could never be a NaN, so it is an ideal marker. Functions that deal with collections of data that may have holes can be written to test for, and ignore, NaN values.
It is easy to generate a NaN in computations: evaluating 0.0 /
0.0
is the commonest way, but Infinity - Infinity
,
Infinity / Infinity
, and sqrt (-1.0)
also work.
Functions that receive out-of-bounds arguments can choose to return a
stored NaN value, such as with the NAN
macro defined in
math.h
, but that does not set the invalid operand
exception flag, and that can fool some programs.
Like Infinity, NaNs propagate in computations, but they are even stickier, because they never disappear in division. Thus, once a NaN appears in a chain of numerical operations, it is almost certain to pop out into the final results. The programmer has to decide whether that is expected, or whether there is a coding or algorithmic error that needs repair.
In general, when function gets a NaN argument, it usually returns a NaN. However, there are some exceptions in the math-library functions that you need to be aware of, because they violate the NaNs-always-propagate rule:
pow (x, 0.0)
always returns1.0
, even ifx
is 0.0, Infinity, or a NaN.pow (1, y)
always returns1
, even ify
is a NaN.hypot (INFINITY, y)
andhypot (-INFINITY, y)
both always returnINFINITY
, even ify
is a Nan.- If just one of the arguments to
fmax (x, y)
orfmin (x, y)
is a NaN, it returns the other argument. If both arguments are NaNs, it returns a NaN, but there is no requirement about where it comes from: it could bex
, ory
, or some other quiet NaN.
NaNs are also used for the return values of math-library
functions where the result is not representable in real
arithmetic, or is mathematically undefined or uncertain, such as
sqrt (-1.0)
and sin (Infinity)
. However, note that a
result that is merely too big to represent should always produce
an Infinity, such as with exp (1000.0)
(too big) and
exp (Infinity)
(truly infinite).
Next: Scaling by Powers of the Base, Previous: Handling NaN, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.15 Signed Zeros
The sign of zero is significant, and important, because it records the creation of a value that is too small to represent, but came from either the negative axis, or from the positive axis. Such fine distinctions are essential for proper handling of branch cuts in complex arithmetic (see Complex Arithmetic).
The key point about signed zeros is that in comparisons, their sign
does not matter: 0.0 == -0.0
must always evaluate to
1
(true). However, they are not the same number, and
-0.0
in C code stands for a negative zero.
Next: Rounding Control, Previous: Signed Zeros, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.16 Scaling by Powers of the Base
We have discussed rounding errors several times in this chapter, but it is important to remember that when results require no more bits than the exponent and significand bits can represent, those results are exact.
One particularly useful exact operation is scaling by a power of the base. While one, in principle, could do that with code like this:
y = x * pow (2.0, (double)k); /* Undesirable scaling: avoid! */
that is not advisable, because it relies on the quality of the
math-library power function, and that happens to be one of the
most difficult functions in the C math library to make accurate.
What is likely to happen on many systems is that the returned
value from pow
will be close to a power of two, but
slightly different, so the subsequent multiplication introduces
rounding error.
The correct, and fastest, way to do the scaling is either via the traditional C library function, or with its C99 equivalent:
y = ldexp (x, k); /* Traditional pre-C99 style. */ y = scalbn (x, k); /* C99 style. */
Both functions return x * 2**k
.
See Normalization Functions in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.
Next: Machine Epsilon, Previous: Scaling by Powers of the Base, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.17 Rounding Control
Here we describe how to specify the rounding mode at run time. System header file fenv.h provides the prototypes for these functions. See Rounding in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.
That header file also provides constant names for the four rounding modes:
FE_DOWNWARD
, FE_TONEAREST
, FE_TOWARDZERO
, and
FE_UPWARD
.
The function fegetround
examines and returns the current
rounding mode. On a platform with IEEE 754 floating point,
the value will always equal one of those four constants.
On other platforms, it may return a negative value. The function
fesetround
sets the current rounding mode.
Changing the rounding mode can be slow, so it is useful to minimize the number of changes. For interval arithmetic, we seem to need three changes for each operation, but we really only need two, because we can write code like this example for interval addition of two reals:
{ struct interval_double { double hi, lo; } v; extern volatile double x, y; int rule; rule = fegetround (); if (fesetround (FE_UPWARD) == 0) { v.hi = x + y; v.lo = -(-x - y); } else fatal ("ERROR: failed to change rounding rule"); if (fesetround (rule) != 0) fatal ("ERROR: failed to restore rounding rule"); }
The volatile
qualifier (see volatile
Variables and Fields) is essential on x86
platforms to prevent an optimizing compiler from producing the same
value for both bounds.
Next: Complex Arithmetic, Previous: Rounding Control, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.18 Machine Epsilon
In any floating-point system, three attributes are particularly important to know: base (the number that the exponent specifies a power of), precision (number of digits in the significand), and range (difference between most positive and most negative values). The allocation of bits between exponent and significand decides the answers to those questions.
A measure of the precision is the answer to the question: what is
the smallest number that can be added to 1.0
such that the
sum differs from 1.0
? That number is called the
machine epsilon.
We could define the needed machine-epsilon constants for float
,
double
, and long double
like this:
static const float epsf = 0x1p-23; /* about 1.192e-07 */ static const double eps = 0x1p-52; /* about 2.220e-16 */ static const long double epsl = 0x1p-63; /* about 1.084e-19 */
Instead of the hexadecimal constants, we could also have used the
Standard C macros, FLT_EPSILON
, DBL_EPSILON
, and
LDBL_EPSILON
.
It is useful to be able to compute the machine epsilons at
run time, and we can easily generalize the operation by replacing
the constant 1.0
with a user-supplied value:
double macheps (double x) { /* Return machine epsilon for x, */ /* such that x + macheps (x) > x. */ static const double base = 2.0; double eps; if (isnan (x)) eps = x; else { eps = (x == 0.0) ? 1.0 : x; while ((x + eps / base) != x) eps /= base; /* Always exact! */ } return (eps); }
If we call that function with arguments from 0
to
10
, as well as Infinity and NaN, and print the returned
values in hexadecimal, we get output like this:
macheps ( 0) = 0x1.0000000000000p-1074 macheps ( 1) = 0x1.0000000000000p-52 macheps ( 2) = 0x1.0000000000000p-51 macheps ( 3) = 0x1.8000000000000p-52 macheps ( 4) = 0x1.0000000000000p-50 macheps ( 5) = 0x1.4000000000000p-51 macheps ( 6) = 0x1.8000000000000p-51 macheps ( 7) = 0x1.c000000000000p-51 macheps ( 8) = 0x1.0000000000000p-49 macheps ( 9) = 0x1.2000000000000p-50 macheps ( 10) = 0x1.4000000000000p-50 macheps (Inf) = infinity macheps (NaN) = nan
Notice that macheps
has a special test for a NaN to prevent an
infinite loop.
Our code made another test for a zero argument to avoid getting a
zero return. The returned value in that case is the smallest
representable floating-point number, here the subnormal value
2**(-1074)
, which is about 4.941e-324
.
No special test is needed for an Infinity, because the
eps
-reduction loop then terminates at the first iteration.
Our macheps
function here assumes binary floating point; some
architectures may differ.
The C library includes some related functions that can also be used to determine machine epsilons at run time:
#include <math.h> /* Include for these prototypes. */
double nextafter (double x, double y);
float nextafterf (float x, float y);
long double nextafterl (long double x, long double y);
These return the machine number nearest x in the direction of
y. For example, nextafter (1.0, 2.0)
produces the same
result as 1.0 + macheps (1.0)
and 1.0 + DBL_EPSILON
.
See FP Bit Twiddling in The GNU C Library Reference Manual.
It is important to know that the machine epsilon is not symmetric
about all numbers. At the boundaries where normalization changes the
exponent, the epsilon below x is smaller than that just above
x by a factor 1 / base
. For example, macheps
(1.0)
returns +0x1p-52
, whereas macheps (-1.0)
returns
+0x1p-53
. Some authors distinguish those cases by calling them
the positive and negative, or big and
small, machine epsilons. You can produce their values like
this:
eps_neg = 1.0 - nextafter (1.0, -1.0); eps_pos = nextafter (1.0, +2.0) - 1.0;
If x is a variable, such that you do not know its value at
compile time, then you can substitute literal y values with
either -inf()
or +inf()
, like this:
eps_neg = x - nextafter (x, -inf ()); eps_pos = nextafter (x, +inf() - x);
In such cases, if x is Infinity, then the nextafter
functions return y if x equals y. Our two
assignments then produce +0x1.fffffffffffffp+1023
(that is a
hexadecimal floating point constant and its value is around
1.798e+308; see Floating-Point Constants) for eps_neg, and
Infinity for eps_pos. Thus, the call nextafter (INFINITY,
-INFINITY)
can be used to find the largest representable finite
number, and with the call nextafter (0.0, 1.0)
, the smallest
representable number (here, 0x1p-1074
(about 4.491e-324), a
number that we saw before as the output from macheps (0.0)
).
Next: Round-Trip Base Conversion, Previous: Machine Epsilon, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.19 Complex Arithmetic
We’ve already looked at defining and referring to complex numbers (see Complex Data Types). What is important to discuss here are some issues that are unlikely to be obvious to programmers without extensive experience in both numerical computing, and in complex arithmetic in mathematics.
The first important point is that, unlike real arithmetic, in complex arithmetic, the danger of significance loss is pervasive, and affects every one of the basic operations, and almost all of the math-library functions. To understand why, recall the rules for complex multiplication and division:
a = u + I*v /* First operand. */ b = x + I*y /* Second operand. */ prod = a * b = (u + I*v) * (x + I*y) = (u * x - v * y) + I*(v * x + u * y) quo = a / b = (u + I*v) / (x + I*y) = [(u + I*v) * (x - I*y)] / [(x + I*y) * (x - I*y)] = [(u * x + v * y) + I*(v * x - u * y)] / (x**2 + y**2)
There are four critical observations about those formulas:
- the multiplications on the right-hand side introduce the possibility of premature underflow or overflow;
- the products must be accurate to twice working precision;
- there is always one subtraction on the right-hand sides that is subject to catastrophic significance loss; and
- complex multiplication has up to six rounding errors, and complex division has ten rounding errors.
Another point that needs careful study is the fact that many functions
in complex arithmetic have branch cuts. You can view a
function with a complex argument, f (z)
, as f (x + I*y)
,
and thus, it defines a relation between a point (x, y)
on the
complex plane with an elevation value on a surface. A branch cut
looks like a tear in that surface, so approaching the cut from one
side produces a particular value, and from the other side, a quite
different value. Great care is needed to handle branch cuts properly,
and even small numerical errors can push a result from one side to the
other, radically changing the returned value. As we reported earlier,
correct handling of the sign of zero is critically important for
computing near branch cuts.
The best advice that we can give to programmers who need complex arithmetic is to always use the highest precision available, and then to carefully check the results of test calculations to gauge the likely accuracy of the computed results. It is easy to supply test values of real and imaginary parts where all five basic operations in complex arithmetic, and almost all of the complex math functions, lose all significance, and fail to produce even a single correct digit.
Even though complex arithmetic makes some programming tasks easier, it may be numerically preferable to rework the algorithm so that it can be carried out in real arithmetic. That is commonly possible in matrix algebra.
GNU C can perform code optimization on complex number multiplication and
division if certain boundary checks will not be needed. The
command-line option -fcx-limited-range tells the compiler that
a range reduction step is not needed when performing complex division,
and that there is no need to check if a complex multiplication or
division results in the value Nan + I*NaN
. By default these
checks are enabled. You can explicitly enable them with the
-fno-cx-limited-range option.
Next: Further Reading, Previous: Complex Arithmetic, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.20 Round-Trip Base Conversion
Most numeric programs involve converting between base-2 floating-point numbers, as represented by the computer, and base-10 floating-point numbers, as entered and handled by the programmer. What might not be obvious is the number of base-2 bits vs. base-10 digits required for each representation. Consider the following tables showing the number of decimal digits representable in a given number of bits, and vice versa:
binary in | 24 | 53 | 64 | 113 | 237 |
decimal out | 9 | 17 | 21 | 36 | 73 |
decimal in | 7 | 16 | 34 | 70 |
binary out | 25 | 55 | 114 | 234 |
We can compute the table numbers with these two functions:
int matula(int nbits) { /* Return output decimal digits needed for nbits-bits input. */ return ((int)ceil((double)nbits / log2(10.0) + 1.0)); } int goldberg(int ndec) { /* Return output bits needed for ndec-digits input. */ return ((int)ceil((double)ndec / log10(2.0) + 1.0)); }
One significant observation from those numbers is that we cannot achieve correct round-trip conversion between the decimal and binary formats in the same storage size! For example, we need 25 bits to represent a 7-digit value from the 32-bit decimal format, but the binary format only has 24 available. Similar observations hold for each of the other conversion pairs.
The general input/output base-conversion problem is astonishingly complicated, and solutions were not generally known until the publication of two papers in 1990 that are listed later near the end of this chapter. For the 128-bit formats, the worst case needs more than 11,500 decimal digits of precision to guarantee correct rounding in a binary-to-decimal conversion!
For further details see the references for Bennett Goldberg and David Matula.
Previous: Round-Trip Base Conversion, Up: Floating Point in Depth [Contents][Index]
28.21 Further Reading
The subject of floating-point arithmetic is much more complex than many programmers seem to think, and few books on programming languages spend much time in that area. In this chapter, we have tried to expose the reader to some of the key ideas, and to warn of easily overlooked pitfalls that can soon lead to nonsensical results. There are a few good references that we recommend for further reading, and for finding other important material about computer arithmetic:
We include URLs for these references when we were given them, when they are morally legitimate to recommend; we have omitted the URLs that are paywalled or that require running nonfree JavaScript code in order to function. We hope you can find morally legitimate sites where you can access these works.
- Paul H. Abbott and 15 others, Architecture and software support in IBM S/390 Parallel Enterprise Servers for IEEE Floating-Point arithmetic, IBM Journal of Research and Development 43(5/6) 723–760 (1999), This article gives a good description of IBM’s algorithm for exact decimal-to-binary conversion, complementing earlier ones by Clinger and others.
- Nelson H. F. Beebe, The Mathematical-Function Computation Handbook: Programming Using the MathCW Portable Software Library, Springer (2017). This book describes portable implementations of a large superset of the mathematical functions available in many programming languages, extended to a future 256-bit format (70 decimal digits), for both binary and decimal floating point. It includes a substantial portion of the functions described in the famous NIST Handbook of Mathematical Functions, Cambridge (2018), ISBN 0-521-19225-0. See https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/mathcw/ for compilers and libraries.
- William D. Clinger, How to Read Floating Point Numbers Accurately, ACM SIGPLAN Notices 25(6) 92–101 (June 1990), https://doi.org/10.1145/93548.93557. See also the papers by Steele & White.
- I. Bennett Goldberg, 27 Bits Are Not Enough For 8-Digit Accuracy, Communications of the ACM 10(2) 105–106 (February 1967), https://doi.acm.org/10.1145/363067.363112. This paper, and its companions by David Matula, address the base-conversion problem, and show that the naive formulas are wrong by one or two digits.
- David Goldberg, What Every Computer Scientist Should Know About Floating-Point Arithmetic, ACM Computing Surveys 23(1) 5–58 (March 1991), corrigendum 23(3) 413 (September 1991), https://doi.org/10.1145/103162.103163. This paper has been widely distributed, and reissued in vendor programming-language documentation. It is well worth reading, and then rereading from time to time.
- Norbert Juffa and Nelson H. F. Beebe, A Bibliography of Publications on Floating-Point Arithmetic, https://www.math.utah.edu/pub/tex/bib/fparith.bib. This is the largest known bibliography of publications about floating-point, and also integer, arithmetic. It is actively maintained, and in mid 2019, contains more than 6400 references to original research papers, reports, theses, books, and Web sites on the subject matter. It can be used to locate the latest research in the field, and the historical coverage dates back to a 1726 paper on signed-digit arithmetic, and an 1837 paper by Charles Babbage, the intellectual father of mechanical computers. The entries for the Abbott, Clinger, and Steele & White papers cited earlier contain pointers to several other important related papers on the base-conversion problem.
- William Kahan, Branch Cuts for Complex Elementary Functions, or Much Ado About Nothing’s Sign Bit, (1987), https://people.freebsd.org/~das/kahan86branch.pdf. This Web document about the fine points of complex arithmetic also appears in the volume edited by A. Iserles and M. J. D. Powell, The State of the Art in Numerical Analysis: Proceedings of the Joint IMA/SIAM Conference on the State of the Art in Numerical Analysis held at the University of Birmingham, 14–18 April 1986, Oxford University Press (1987), ISBN 0-19-853614-3 (xiv + 719 pages). Its author is the famous chief architect of the IEEE 754 arithmetic system, and one of the world’s greatest experts in the field of floating-point arithmetic. An entire generation of his students at the University of California, Berkeley, have gone on to careers in academic and industry, spreading the knowledge of how to do floating-point arithmetic right.
- Donald E. Knuth, A Simple Program Whose Proof Isn’t, in Beauty is our business: a birthday salute to Edsger W. Dijkstra, W. H. J. Feijen, A. J. M. van Gasteren, D. Gries, and J. Misra (eds.), Springer (1990), ISBN 1-4612-8792-8, This book chapter supplies a correctness proof of the decimal to binary, and binary to decimal, conversions in fixed-point arithmetic in the TeX typesetting system. The proof evaded its author for a dozen years.
- David W. Matula, In-and-out conversions, Communications of the ACM 11(1) 57–50 (January 1968), https://doi.org/10.1145/362851.362887.
- David W. Matula, The Base Conversion Theorem, Proceedings of the American Mathematical Society 19(3) 716–723 (June 1968). See also other papers here by this author, and by I. Bennett Goldberg.
- David W. Matula, A Formalization of Floating-Point Numeric Base Conversion, IEEE Transactions on Computers C-19(8) 681–692 (August 1970),
- Jean-Michel Muller and eight others, Handbook of Floating-Point Arithmetic, Birkhäuser-Boston (2010), ISBN 0-8176-4704-X (xxiii + 572 pages). This is a comprehensive treatise from a French team who are among the world’s greatest experts in floating-point arithmetic, and among the most prolific writers of research papers in that field. They have much to teach, and their book deserves a place on the shelves of every serious numerical programmer.
- Jean-Michel Muller and eight others, Handbook of Floating-Point Arithmetic, Second edition, Birkhäuser-Boston (2018), ISBN 3-319-76525-6 (xxv + 627 pages). This is a new edition of the preceding entry.
- Michael Overton, Numerical Computing with IEEE Floating Point Arithmetic, Including One Theorem, One Rule of Thumb, and One Hundred and One Exercises, SIAM (2001), ISBN 0-89871-482-6 (xiv + 104 pages), This is a small volume that can be covered in a few hours.
- Guy L. Steele Jr. and Jon L. White, How to Print Floating-Point Numbers Accurately, ACM SIGPLAN Notices 25(6) 112–126 (June 1990), https://doi.org/10.1145/93548.93559. See also the papers by Clinger.
- Guy L. Steele Jr. and Jon L. White, Retrospective: How to Print Floating-Point Numbers Accurately, ACM SIGPLAN Notices 39(4) 372–389 (April 2004), Reprint of 1990 paper, with additional commentary.
- Pat H. Sterbenz, Floating Point Computation, Prentice-Hall (1974), ISBN 0-13-322495-3 (xiv + 316 pages). This often-cited book provides solid coverage of what floating-point arithmetic was like before the introduction of IEEE 754 arithmetic.
Next: Directing Compilation, Previous: Floating Point in Depth, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
29 Compilation
Early in the manual we explained how to compile a simple C program
that consists of a single source file (see Compiling the Example Program).
However, we handle only short programs that way. A typical C program
consists of many source files, each of which is usually a separate
compilation module—meaning that it has to be compiled
separately. (The source files that are not separate compilation
modules are those that are used via #include
; see Header Files.)
To compile a multi-module program, you compile each of the program’s compilation modules, making an object file for that module. The last step is to link the many object files together into a single executable for the whole program.
The full details of how to compile C programs (and other programs) with GCC are documented in xxxx. Here we give only a simple introduction.
These commands compile two compilation modules, foo.c and bar.c, running the compiler for each module:
gcc -c -O -g foo.c gcc -c -O -g bar.c
In these commands, -g says to generate debugging information, -O says to do some optimization, and -c says to put the compiled code for that module into a corresponding object file and go no further. The object file for foo.c is automatically called foo.o, and so on.
If you wish, you can specify the additional compilation options. For instance, -Wformat -Wparenthesis -Wstrict-prototypes request additional warnings.
After you compile all the program’s modules, you link the object files into a combined executable, like this:
gcc -o foo foo.o bar.o
In this command, -o foo species the file name for the executable file, and the other arguments are the object files to link. Always specify the executable file name in a command that generates one.
One reason to divide a large program into multiple compilation modules
is to control how each module can access the internals of the others.
When a module declares a function or variable extern
, other
modules can access it. The other functions and variables defined in a
module can’t be accessed from outside that module.
The other reason for using multiple modules is so that changing one source file does not require recompiling all of them in order to try the modified program. It is sufficient to recompile the source file that you changed, then link them all again. Dividing a large program into many substantial modules in this way typically makes recompilation much faster.
Normally we don’t run any of these commands directly. Instead we
write a set of make rules for the program, then use the
make
program to recompile only the source files that need to
be recompiled, by following those rules. See The GNU Make
Manual in The GNU Make Manual.
Next: Type Alignment, Previous: Compilation, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
30 Directing Compilation
This chapter describes C constructs that don’t alter the program’s meaning as such, but rather direct the compiler how to treat some aspects of the program.
Next: Static Assertions, Up: Directing Compilation [Contents][Index]
30.1 Pragmas
A pragma is an annotation in a program that gives direction to the compiler.
Next: Severity Pragmas, Up: Pragmas [Contents][Index]
30.1.1 Pragma Basics
C defines two syntactical forms for pragmas, the line form and the token form. You can write any pragma in either form, with the same meaning.
The line form is a line in the source code, like this:
#pragma line
The line pragma has no effect on the parsing of the lines around it. This form has the drawback that it can’t be generated by a macro expansion.
The token form is a series of tokens; it can appear anywhere in the program between the other tokens.
_Pragma (stringconstant)
The pragma has no effect on the syntax of the tokens that surround it;
thus, here’s a pragma in the middle of an if
statement:
if _Pragma ("hello") (x > 1)
However, that’s an unclear thing to do; for the sake of understandability, it is better to put a pragma on a line by itself and not embedded in the middle of another construct.
Both forms of pragma have a textual argument. In a line pragma, the
text is the rest of the line. The textual argument to _Pragma
uses the same syntax as a C string constant: surround the text with
two ‘"’ characters, and add a backslash before each ‘"’ or
‘\’ character in it.
With either syntax, the textual argument specifies what to do. It begins with one or several words that specify the operation. If the compiler does not recognize them, it ignores the pragma.
Here are the pragma operations supported in GNU C.
#pragma GCC dependency "file" [message]
_Pragma ("GCC dependency \"file\" [message]")
Declares that the current source file depends on file, so GNU C compares the file times and gives a warning if file is newer than the current source file.
This directive searches for file the way
#include
searches for a non-system header file.If message is given, the warning message includes that text.
Examples:
#pragma GCC dependency "parse.y" _pragma ("GCC dependency \"/usr/include/time.h\" \ rerun fixincludes")
#pragma GCC poison identifiers
_Pragma ("GCC poison identifiers")
Poisons the identifiers listed in identifiers.
This is useful to make sure all mention of identifiers has been deleted from the program and that no reference to them creeps back in. If any of those identifiers appears anywhere in the source after the directive, it causes a compilation error. For example,
#pragma GCC poison printf sprintf fprintf sprintf(some_string, "hello");
generates an error.
If a poisoned identifier appears as part of the expansion of a macro that was defined before the identifier was poisoned, it will not cause an error. Thus, system headers that define macros that use the identifier will not cause errors.
For example,
#define strrchr rindex _Pragma ("GCC poison rindex") strrchr(some_string, 'h');
does not cause a compilation error.
#pragma GCC system_header
_Pragma ("GCC system_header")
Specify treating the rest of the current source file as if it came from a system header file. See System Headers in Using the GNU Compiler Collection.
#pragma GCC warning message
_Pragma ("GCC warning message")
Equivalent to
#warning
. Its advantage is that the_Pragma
form can be included in a macro definition.#pragma GCC error message
_Pragma ("GCC error message")
Equivalent to
#error
. Its advantage is that the_Pragma
form can be included in a macro definition.#pragma GCC message message
_Pragma ("GCC message message")
Similar to ‘GCC warning’ and ‘GCC error’, this simply prints an informational message, and could be used to include additional warning or error text without triggering more warnings or errors. (Note that unlike ‘warning’ and ‘error’, ‘message’ does not include ‘GCC’ as part of the pragma.)
Next: Optimization Pragmas, Previous: Pragma Basics, Up: Pragmas [Contents][Index]
30.1.2 Severity Pragmas
These pragmas control the severity of classes of diagnostics. You can specify the class of diagnostic with the GCC option that causes those diagnostics to be generated.
#pragma GCC diagnostic error option
_Pragma ("GCC diagnostic error option")
For code following this pragma, treat diagnostics of the variety specified by option as errors. For example:
_Pragma ("GCC diagnostic error -Wformat")
specifies to treat diagnostics enabled by the -Wformat option as errors rather than warnings.
#pragma GCC diagnostic warning option
_Pragma ("GCC diagnostic warning option")
For code following this pragma, treat diagnostics of the variety specified by option as warnings. This overrides the -Werror option which says to treat warnings as errors.
#pragma GCC diagnostic ignore option
_Pragma ("GCC diagnostic ignore option")
For code following this pragma, refrain from reporting any diagnostics of the variety specified by option.
#pragma GCC diagnostic push
_Pragma ("GCC diagnostic push")
#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
_Pragma ("GCC diagnostic pop")
These pragmas maintain a stack of states for severity settings. ‘GCC diagnostic push’ saves the current settings on the stack, and ‘GCC diagnostic pop’ pops the last stack item and restores the current settings from that.
‘GCC diagnostic pop’ when the severity setting stack is empty restores the settings to what they were at the start of compilation.
Here is an example:
_Pragma ("GCC diagnostic error -Wformat") /* -Wformat messages treated as errors. */ _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic push") _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic warning -Wformat") /* -Wformat messages treated as warnings. */ _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic push") _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic ignored -Wformat") /* -Wformat messages suppressed. */ _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic pop") /* -Wformat messages treated as warnings again. */ _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic pop") /* -Wformat messages treated as errors again. */ /* This is an excess ‘pop’ that matches no ‘push’. */ _Pragma ("GCC diagnostic pop") /* -Wformat messages treated once again as specified by the GCC command-line options. */
Previous: Severity Pragmas, Up: Pragmas [Contents][Index]
30.1.3 Optimization Pragmas
These pragmas enable a particular optimization for specific function definitions. The settings take effect at the end of a function definition, so the clean place to use these pragmas is between function definitions.
#pragma GCC optimize optimization
_Pragma ("GCC optimize optimization")
These pragmas enable the optimization optimization for the following functions. For example,
_Pragma ("GCC optimize -fforward-propagate")
says to apply the ‘forward-propagate’ optimization to all following function definitions. Specifying optimizations for individual functions, rather than for the entire program, is rare but can be useful for getting around a bug in the compiler.
If optimization does not correspond to a defined optimization option, the pragma is erroneous. To turn off an optimization, use the corresponding ‘-fno-’ option, such as ‘-fno-forward-propagate’.
#pragma GCC target optimizations
_Pragma ("GCC target optimizations")
The pragma ‘GCC target’ is similar to ‘GCC optimize’ but is used for platform-specific optimizations. Thus,
_Pragma ("GCC target popcnt")
activates the optimization ‘popcnt’ for all following function definitions. This optimization is supported on a few common targets but not on others.
#pragma GCC push_options
_Pragma ("GCC push_options")
The ‘push_options’ pragma saves on a stack the current settings specified with the ‘target’ and ‘optimize’ pragmas.
#pragma GCC pop_options
_Pragma ("GCC pop_options")
The ‘pop_options’ pragma pops saved settings from that stack.
Here’s an example of using this stack.
_Pragma ("GCC push_options") _Pragma ("GCC optimize forward-propagate") /* Functions to compile with the
forward-propagate
optimization. */ _Pragma ("GCC pop_options") /* Ends enablement offorward-propagate
. */#pragma GCC reset_options
_Pragma ("GCC reset_options")
Clears all pragma-defined ‘target’ and ‘optimize’ optimization settings.
Previous: Pragmas, Up: Directing Compilation [Contents][Index]
30.2 Static Assertions
You can add compiler-time tests for necessary conditions into your
code using _Static_assert
. This can be useful, for example, to
check that the compilation target platform supports the type sizes
that the code expects. For example,
_Static_assert ((sizeof (long int) >= 8), "long int needs to be at least 8 bytes");
reports a compile-time error if compiled on a system with long integers smaller than 8 bytes, with ‘long int needs to be at least 8 bytes’ as the error message.
Since calls _Static_assert
are processed at compile time, the
expression must be computable at compile time and the error message
must be a literal string. The expression can refer to the sizes of
variables, but can’t refer to their values. For example, the
following static assertion is invalid for two reasons:
char *error_message = "long int needs to be at least 8 bytes"; int size_of_long_int = sizeof (long int); _Static_assert (size_of_long_int == 8, error_message);
The expression size_of_long_int == 8
isn’t computable at
compile time, and the error message isn’t a literal string.
You can, though, use preprocessor definition values with
_Static_assert
:
#define LONG_INT_ERROR_MESSAGE "long int needs to be \ at least 8 bytes" _Static_assert ((sizeof (long int) == 8), LONG_INT_ERROR_MESSAGE);
Static assertions are permitted wherever a statement or declaration is permitted, including at top level in the file, and also inside the definition of a type.
union y { int i; int *ptr; _Static_assert (sizeof (int *) == sizeof (int), "Pointer and int not same size"); };
Next: Aliasing, Previous: Directing Compilation, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
Appendix A Type Alignment
Code for device drivers and other communication with low-level hardware sometimes needs to be concerned with the alignment of data objects in memory.
Each data type has a required alignment, always a power of 2, that says at which memory addresses an object of that type can validly start. A valid address for the type must be a multiple of its alignment. If a type’s alignment is 1, that means it can validly start at any address. If a type’s alignment is 2, that means it can only start at an even address. If a type’s alignment is 4, that means it can only start at an address that is a multiple of 4.
The alignment of a type (except char
) can vary depending on the
kind of computer in use. To refer to the alignment of a type in a C
program, use _Alignof
, whose syntax parallels that of
sizeof
. Like sizeof
, _Alignof
is a compile-time
operation, and it doesn’t compute the value of the expression used
as its argument.
Nominally, each integer and floating-point type has an alignment equal to
the largest power of 2 that divides its size. Thus, int
with
size 4 has a nominal alignment of 4, and long long int
with
size 8 has a nominal alignment of 8.
However, each kind of computer generally has a maximum alignment, and no type needs more alignment than that. If the computer’s maximum alignment is 4 (which is common), then no type’s alignment is more than 4.
The size of any type is always a multiple of its alignment; that way, in an array whose elements have that type, all the elements are properly aligned if the first one is.
These rules apply to all real computers today, but some embedded controllers have odd exceptions. We don’t have references to cite for them.
Ordinary C code guarantees that every object of a given type is in fact aligned as that type requires.
If the operand of _Alignof
is a structure field, the value
is the alignment it requires. It may have a greater alignment by
coincidence, due to the other fields, but _Alignof
is not
concerned about that. See Structures.
Older versions of GNU C used the keyword __alignof__
for this,
but now that the feature has been standardized, it is better
to use the standard keyword _Alignof
.
You can explicitly specify an alignment requirement for a particular
variable or structure field by adding _Alignas
(alignment)
to the declaration, where alignment is a
power of 2 or a type name. For instance:
char _Alignas (8) x;
or
char _Alignas (double) x;
specifies that x
must start on an address that is a multiple of
8. However, if alignment exceeds the maximum alignment for the
machine, that maximum is how much alignment x
will get.
The older GNU C syntax for this feature looked like
__attribute__ ((__aligned__ (alignment)))
to the
declaration, and was added after the variable. For instance:
char x __attribute__ ((__aligned__ 8));
See Attributes in Declarations.
Next: Digraphs, Previous: Type Alignment, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
Appendix B Aliasing
We have already presented examples of casting a void *
pointer
to another pointer type, and casting another pointer type to
void *
.
One common kind of pointer cast is guaranteed safe: casting the value
returned by malloc
and related functions (see Dynamic Memory Allocation). It is safe because these functions do not save the
pointer anywhere else; the only way the program will access the newly
allocated memory is via the pointer just returned.
In fact, C allows casting any pointer type to any other pointer type. Using this to access the same place in memory using two different data types is called aliasing.
Aliasing is necessary in some programs that do sophisticated memory management, such as GNU Emacs, but most C programs don’t need to do aliasing. When it isn’t needed, stay away from it! To do aliasing correctly requires following the rules stated below. Otherwise, the aliasing may result in malfunctions when the program runs.
The rest of this appendix explains the pitfalls and rules of aliasing.
Next: Aliasing and Length, Up: Aliasing [Contents][Index]
B.1 Aliasing and Alignment
In order for a type-converted pointer to be valid, it must have the
alignment that the new pointer type requires. For instance, on most
computers, int
has alignment 4; the address of an int
must be a multiple of 4. However, char
has alignment 1, so the
address of a char
is usually not a multiple of 4. Taking the
address of such a char
and casting it to int *
probably
results in an invalid pointer. Trying to dereference it may cause a
SIGBUS
signal, depending on the platform in use (see Signals).
foo () { char i[4]; int *p = (int *) &i[1]; /* Misaligned pointer! */ return *p; /* Crash! */ }
This requirement is never a problem when casting the return value
of malloc
because that function always returns a pointer
with as much alignment as any type can require.
Next: Type Rules for Aliasing, Previous: Aliasing and Alignment, Up: Aliasing [Contents][Index]
B.2 Aliasing and Length
When converting a pointer to a different pointer type, make sure the
object it really points to is at least as long as the target of the
converted pointer. For instance, suppose p
has type int
*
and it’s cast as follows:
int *p; struct { double d, e, f; } foo; struct foo *q = (struct foo *)p; q->f = 5.14159;
the value q->f
will run past the end of the int
that
p
points to. If p
was initialized to the start of an
array of type int[6]
, the object is long enough for three
double
s. But if p
points to something shorter,
q->f
will run on beyond the end of that, overlaying some other
data. Storing that will garble that other data. Or it could extend
past the end of memory space and cause a SIGSEGV
signal
(see Signals).
Previous: Aliasing and Length, Up: Aliasing [Contents][Index]
B.3 Type Rules for Aliasing
C code that converts a pointer to a different pointer type can use the pointers to access the same memory locations with two different data types. If the same address is accessed with different types in a single control thread, optimization can make the code do surprising things (in effect, make it malfunction).
Here’s a concrete example where aliasing that can change the code’s
behavior when it is optimized. We assume that float
is 4 bytes
long, like int
, and so is every pointer. Thus, the structures
struct a
and struct b
are both 8 bytes.
#include <stdio.h> struct a { int size; char *data; }; struct b { float size; char *data; }; void sub (struct a *p, struct b *q) { int x; p->size = 0; q->size = 1; x = p->size; printf("x =%d\n", x); printf("p->size =%d\n", (int)p->size); printf("q->size =%d\n", (int)q->size); } int main(void) { struct a foo; struct a *p = &foo; struct b *q = (struct b *) &foo; sub (p, q); }
This code works as intended when compiled without optimization. All
the operations are carried out sequentially as written. The code
sets x
to p->size
, but what it actually gets is the
bits of the floating point number 1, as type int
.
However, when optimizing, the compiler is allowed to assume
(mistakenly, here) that q
does not point to the same storage as
p
, because their data types are not allowed to alias.
From this assumption, the compiler can deduce (falsely, here) that the
assignment into q->size
has no effect on the value of
p->size
, which must therefore still be 0. Thus, x
will
be set to 0.
GNU C, following the C standard, defines this optimization as legitimate. Code that misbehaves when optimized following these rules is, by definition, incorrect C code.
The rules for storage aliasing in C are based on the two data types: the type of the object, and the type it is accessed through. The rules permit accessing part of a storage object of type t using only these types:
- t.
- A type compatible with t. See Compatible Types.
- A signed or unsigned version of one of the above.
- A qualified version of one of the above. See Type Qualifiers.
- An array, structure (see Structures), or union type
(
Unions
) that contains one of the above, either directly as a field or through multiple levels of fields. If t isdouble
, this would includestruct s { union { double d[2]; int i[4]; } u; int i; };
because there’s adouble
inside it somewhere. - A character type.
What do these rules say about the example in this subsection?
For foo.size
(equivalently, a->size
), t is
int
. The type float
is not allowed as an aliasing type
by those rules, so b->size
is not supposed to alias with
elements of j
. Based on that assumption, GNU C makes a
permitted optimization that was not, in this case, consistent with
what the programmer intended the program to do.
Whether GCC actually performs type-based aliasing analysis depends on the details of the code. GCC has other ways to determine (in some cases) whether objects alias, and if it gets a reliable answer that way, it won’t fall back on type-based heuristics.
The importance of knowing the type-based aliasing rules is not so as to ensure that the optimization is done where it would be safe, but so as to ensure it is not done in a way that would break the program. You can turn off type-based aliasing analysis by giving GCC the option -fno-strict-aliasing.
Next: Attributes in Declarations, Previous: Aliasing, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
Appendix C Digraphs
C accepts aliases for certain characters. Apparently in the 1990s some computer systems had trouble inputting these characters, or trouble displaying them. These digraphs almost never appear in C programs nowadays, but we mention them for completeness.
- ‘<:’
An alias for ‘[’.
- ‘:>’
An alias for ‘]’.
- ‘<%’
An alias for ‘{’.
- ‘%>’
An alias for ‘}’.
- ‘%:’
An alias for ‘#’, used for preprocessing directives (see Directives) and macros (see Macros).
Next: Signals, Previous: Digraphs, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
Appendix D Attributes in Declarations
You can specify certain additional requirements in a declaration, to get fine-grained control over code generation, and helpful informational messages during compilation. We use a few attributes in code examples throughout this manual, including
aligned
The
aligned
attribute specifies a minimum alignment for a variable or structure field, measured in bytes:int foo __attribute__ ((aligned (8))) = 0;
This directs GNU C to allocate
foo
at an address that is a multiple of 8 bytes. However, you can’t force an alignment bigger than the computer’s maximum meaningful alignment.packed
The
packed
attribute specifies to compact the fields of a structure by not leaving gaps between fields. For example,struct __attribute__ ((packed)) bar { char a; int b; };
allocates the integer field
b
at byte 1 in the structure, immediately after the character fielda
. The packed structure is just 5 bytes long (assumingint
is 4 bytes) and its alignment is 1, that ofchar
.deprecated
Applicable to both variables and functions, the
deprecated
attribute tells the compiler to issue a warning if the variable or function is ever used in the source file.int old_foo __attribute__ ((deprecated)); int old_quux () __attribute__ ((deprecated));
__noinline__
The
__noinline__
attribute, in a function’s declaration or definition, specifies never to inline calls to that function. All calls to that function, in a compilation unit where it has this attribute, will be compiled to invoke the separately compiled function. See Inline Function Definitions.__noclone__
The
__noclone__
attribute, in a function’s declaration or definition, specifies never to clone that function. Thus, there will be only one compiled version of the function. See Label Value Caveats, for more information about cloning.always_inline
The
always_inline
attribute, in a function’s declaration or definition, specifies to inline all calls to that function (unless something about the function makes inlining impossible). This applies to all calls to that function in a compilation unit where it has this attribute. See Inline Function Definitions.gnu_inline
The
gnu_inline
attribute, in a function’s declaration or definition, specifies to handle theinline
keyword the way GNU C originally implemented it, many years before ISO C said anything about inlining. See Inline Function Definitions.
For full documentation of attributes, see the GCC manual. See System Headers in Using the GNU Compiler Collection.
Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Previous: Attributes in Declarations, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
Appendix E Signals
Some program operations bring about an error condition called a signal. These signals terminate the program, by default.
There are various different kinds of signals, each with a name. We have seen several such error conditions through this manual:
SIGSEGV
This signal is generated when a program tries to read or write outside the memory that is allocated for it, or to write memory that can only be read. The name is an abbreviation for “segmentation violation”.
SIGFPE
This signal indicates a fatal arithmetic error. The name is an abbreviation for “floating-point exception”, but covers all types of arithmetic errors, including division by zero and overflow.
SIGBUS
This signal is generated when an invalid pointer is dereferenced, typically the result of dereferencing an uninitialized pointer. It is similar to
SIGSEGV
, except thatSIGSEGV
indicates invalid access to valid memory, whileSIGBUS
indicates an attempt to access an invalid address.
These kinds of signal allow the program to specify a function as a signal handler. When a signal has a handler, it doesn’t terminate the program; instead it calls the handler.
There are many other kinds of signal; here we list only those that come from run-time errors in C operations. The rest have to do with the functioning of the operating system. The GNU C Library Reference Manual gives more explanation about signals (see The GNU C Library in The GNU C Library Reference Manual).
Next: Index of Symbols and Keywords, Previous: Signals, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
Appendix F GNU Free Documentation License
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
- PREAMBLE
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
- APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
- VERBATIM COPYING
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
- COPYING IN QUANTITY
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
- MODIFICATIONS
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
- Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
- List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you from this requirement.
- State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher.
- Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
- Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices.
- Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
- Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s license notice.
- Include an unaltered copy of this License.
- Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled “History” in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence.
- Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the “History” section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
- For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”, Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
- Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
- Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version.
- Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
- Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
- COMBINING DOCUMENTS
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
- COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
- AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
- TRANSLATION
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
- TERMINATION
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
- FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
- RELICENSING
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
Next: Concept Index, Previous: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
Index of Symbols and Keywords
Jump to: | #
_
A B C D E F G I L M R S T U V W |
---|
Jump to: | #
_
A B C D E F G I L M R S T U V W |
---|
Previous: Index of Symbols and Keywords, Up: GNU C Manual [Contents][Index]
Concept Index
Jump to: | #
?
\
_
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z |
---|
Jump to: | #
?
\
_
A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z |
---|
Footnotes
(1)
On some obscure systems, GNU C uses UTF-EBCDIC instead of UTF-8, but that is not worth describing in this manual.
(2)
Personal note from Richard Stallman: I wrote GCC without remembering anything about the C precedence order beyond what’s stated here. I studied the full precedence table to write the parser, and promptly forgot it again. If you need to look up the full precedence order to understand some C code, add enough parentheses so nobody else needs to do that.
(3)
Personal note from Richard Stallman: Eating with hackers at a fish restaurant, I ordered Arctic Char. When my meal arrived, I noted that the chef had not signed it. So I complained, “This char is unsigned—I wanted a signed char!” Or rather, I would have said this if I had thought of it fast enough.
(4)
For compatibility with older versions of GNU C, the
keyword __complex__
is also allowed. Going forward, however,
use the new _Complex
keyword as defined in ISO C11.
(5)
The analogous feature in Fortran is called an assigned goto, but that name seems inappropriate in C, since you can do more with label addresses than store them in special label variables.
(6)
Due to compiler optimizations, allocation and deallocation don’t necessarily really happen at those times.
(7)
This is a GNU C extension.
(8)
On an embedded controller where char
or short
is the same width as int
, unsigned char
or unsigned short
promotes to unsigned int
, but that
never occurs in GNU C on real computers.
(9)
GNU C extension.
(10)
GNU C extension.
(11)
In theory, any of these types could have some other size, bit it’s not worth even a minute to cater to that possibility. It never happens on GNU/Linux.